Canon | EOS 5D Mark IV | User manual | Canon EOS 5D Mark IV User manual

Canon EOS 5D Mark IV User manual
EOS 5D Mark IV (WG)
Instruction manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from
the Canon website (p.4).
www.canon-europe.com/5dmarkiv-downloads
ENGLISH
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
Introduction
The EOS 5D Mark IV is a digital single-lens reflex camera featuring
a full-frame (approx. 36.0 x 24.0 mm) CMOS sensor with approx. 30.4
effective megapixels, DIGIC 6+, normal ISO speed range of ISO 100 ISO 32000, approx. 100% viewfinder coverage, high-precision and
high-speed 61-point AF (up to 41 cross-type points), maximum
continuous shooting speed of approx. 7.0 shots/sec., 3.2-inch LCD
monitor, Dual Pixel RAW shooting, Live View shooting, 4K movie
shooting, High Frame Rate (119.9p/100.0p) HD movie shooting, Dual
Pixel CMOS AF, Wi-Fi/NFC (wireless communication) function, and
GPS function.
Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following
To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety
Precautions” (p.22-24) and “Handling Precautions” (p.25-27). Also, read
this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly.
Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they
come out. You can then better understand the camera. Be sure to store
this manual safely, too, so that you can refer to it again when necessary.
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the
images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon
cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded
images of people and certain subjects for anything but private
enjoyment. Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions,
etc., may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment.
2
Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your
camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
Camera
(with body cap)
Wide Strap
Eyecup Eg
Battery Pack
Battery Charger
LP-E6N
LC-E6E*
(with protective cover)
Interface Cable
IFC-150U II
Cable
protector
* Battery Charger LC-E6E comes with a power cord.
 The Instruction Manual and CD-ROM provided are listed on the next page.
 Attach the Eyecup Eg to the viewfinder eyepiece.
 If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
 Depending on the Lens Kit type, Lens Instruction Manuals may also be included.
 Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon
website (p.4). The Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF) are for lenses sold
individually. Note that when purchasing the Lens Kit, some of the
accessories included with the lens may not match those listed in the Lens
Instruction Manual.
Connecting to Peripheral Devices
When connecting the camera to a computer etc., use the provided interface
cable or one from Canon. When connecting the interface cable, also use the
provided cable protector (p.38).
3
Instruction Manuals and CD-ROM
Basic Instruction Manual
This booklet consists of the basic Camera and Wi-Fi
(Wireless Communication) instructions.
The detailed PDF manual for the Camera and the Wi-Fi/
NFC (wireless communication) function can be
downloaded from Canon website.
EOS Solution Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
EOS Solution Disk (Software CD-ROM)
Contains various software. For more information
and installation procedures of the software,
see pages 596-597.
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
Instruction manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon
website to your computer.
 Instruction manual (PDF files) download site:
• Camera and Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Function
Basic Instruction Manual
• Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Function Instruction
Manual
• Lens Instruction Manual
• Software Instruction Manuals
www.canon-europe.com/5dmarkiv-downloads
4
Compatible Cards
 To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF files), Adobe Acrobat Reader DC
or other Adobe PDF viewer (most recent version recommended) is
required.
 Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the Internet.
 Double-click a downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF file) to open it.
 To learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to software’s Help
section.
 You can also access the download site for the Software Instruction
Manuals from the software installation screen (p.597).
Compatible Cards
The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of
capacity. If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized)
by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera
(p.73).
 CF (CompactFlash) cards
* Type I, UDMA Mode 7 supported.
 SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards
* UHS-I cards supported.
Cards that Can Record Movies
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with good enough
performances (fast enough reading and writing speeds) to handle the
movie recording quality. For details, see page 356.
In this manual, “CF card” refers to CompactFlash cards and “SD
card” refers to SD/SDHC/SDXC cards. “Card” refers to all memory
cards used to record images or movies.
* The camera does not come with a card for recording images/
movies. Please purchase it separately.
5
Quick Start Guide
1
2
Insert the battery (p.44).
To charge the battery, see page 42.
Insert the card (p.45).
The camera-front side slot is
for a CF card, and the
camera-back side slot is for
an SD card.
* Shooting is possible as long as there is a CF card or an SD card in the
camera.
3
Attach the lens (p.55).
4
Set the lens’s focus mode
switch to <AF> (p.55).
5
Set the power switch to <1>
(p.49).
6
Align the red mount index on the
lens with the red mount index on the
camera to attach the lens.
Quick Start Guide
6
While holding down the center
of the Mode Dial, set it to <A>
(Scene Intelligent Auto) (p.35).
All the necessary camera settings
will be set automatically.
7
Focus on the subject (p.58).
8
Take the picture (p.58).
9
Review the picture.
Look through the viewfinder and
aim the viewfinder center over the
subject.
Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus on the
subject.
Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
The image just captured will be
displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
LCD monitor.
To display the image again, press
the <x> button (p.394).
 To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View
Shooting” (p.297).
 To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.394).
 To delete images, see “Erasing Images” (p.439).
7
Conventions Used in this Manual
Icons in this Manual
<6>
<5>
<p>
<9>
<0>
0/9/4/
7/8
:
:
:
:
:
:
Indicates the Main Dial.
Indicates the Quick Control Dial.
Indicates the AF area selection button.
Indicates the Multi-controller.
Indicates the Setting button.
Indicates that each function remains active for
approx. 4 sec., 6 sec., 8 sec., 10 sec., or 16 sec. after
you let go of the button.
* In addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera’s buttons
and displayed on the LCD monitor are also used in this manual when discussing
relevant operations and functionality.
3
: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the
<M> button to change its settings.
M
: This icon at the upper right of the page titles indicates that the
function is available only in the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or
<F> mode.
(p.**)
: Reference page numbers for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Troubleshooting advice.
Basic Assumptions
All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch
is set to <1> and the <R> switch is set to the left (Multi
function lock released) (p.49, 62).
It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are
set to their defaults.
The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the
EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens as an example.
8
Chapters
Introduction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2
Getting Started and Basic Camera Operations
41
Basic Shooting
93
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
99
Image Settings
165
GPS Settings
227
Advanced Operations for Photographic Effects
243
Flash Photography
285
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
297
Shooting Movies
333
Image Playback
393
Post-Processing Images
445
Sensor Cleaning
457
Transferring Images to a Computer and Print Ordering
465
Customizing the Camera
479
Reference
523
Downloading Images to a Computer / Software
593
9
Contents
Introduction
2
Item Check List................................................................................. 3
Instruction Manuals and CD-ROM ................................................... 4
Compatible Cards............................................................................. 5
Quick Start Guide ............................................................................. 6
Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................... 8
Chapters........................................................................................... 9
Index to Features ........................................................................... 18
Safety Precautions ......................................................................... 22
Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 25
Nomenclature ................................................................................. 28
1
Getting Started and Basic Camera Operations
41
Charging the Battery ...................................................................... 42
Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 44
Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 45
Turning on the Power ..................................................................... 49
Setting the Date, Time, and Zone................................................... 51
Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 54
Attaching and Detaching a Lens..................................................... 55
Basic Shooting Operations............................................................. 57
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ....................................... 64
3 Menu Operations .................................................................. 67
d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen ................................. 70
10
Contents
Before You Start ..............................................................................73
Formatting the Card ..................................................................... 73
Disabling the Beeper ....................................................................76
Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off.................................. 76
Setting the Image Review Time ...................................................77
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings.............................. 77
l Displaying the Grid in the Viewfinder ....................................... 81
Q Displaying the Electronic Level ...............................................82
Setting the Viewfinder Information Display .....................................84
B Button Functions................................................................... 86
R Setting Multi Function Lock................................................. 90
Help ............................................................................................91
2
Basic Shooting
93
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...................94
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)..........................97
3
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
99
f: Selecting the AF Operation ................................................... 100
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point ....................................... 104
AF Area Selection Modes ............................................................. 109
AF Sensor ..................................................................................... 113
Lenses and Usable AF Points....................................................... 115
Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics ..........................................127
Customizing AF Functions ............................................................ 136
Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus ........................................ 152
11
Contents
When Autofocus Fails .................................................................. 158
MF: Manual Focus ..................................................................... 159
i Selecting the Drive Mode ....................................................... 160
j Using the Self-timer................................................................. 163
4
Image Settings
165
Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback........................... 166
Setting the Image-Recording Quality ........................................... 169
Setting the Dual Pixel RAW Function ........................................... 175
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos ................................. 177
A Selecting a Picture Style ...................................................... 183
A Customizing a Picture Style ................................................. 187
A Registering a Picture Style ................................................... 190
B: Setting the White Balance ................................................... 192
u White Balance Correction ....................................................... 198
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast ................................ 201
Setting Noise Reduction ............................................................... 202
Highlight Tone Priority .................................................................. 206
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics..... 207
Reducing Flicker........................................................................... 215
Setting the Color Space................................................................ 217
Creating and Selecting a Folder................................................... 218
Changing the File Name............................................................... 220
File Numbering Methods .............................................................. 223
Setting Copyright Information....................................................... 225
12
Contents
5
GPS Settings
227
GPS Features ............................................................................... 228
GPS Precautions .......................................................................... 230
Acquiring GPS Signals..................................................................231
Setting the Positioning Interval ..................................................... 236
Setting Time from GPS on the Camera ........................................ 237
Logging the Route Traveled.......................................................... 238
6
Advanced Operations for Photographic Effects
243
d: Program AE.............................................................................244
s: Shutter-Priority AE ................................................................ 246
f: Aperture-Priority AE..............................................................248
a: Manual Exposure.................................................................... 251
q Selecting the Metering Mode .................................................. 253
O Setting the Desired Exposure Compensation .......................... 255
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ........................................... 257
A Lock the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock) ............................. 259
F: Long (Bulb) Exposures............................................................ 260
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting...............................263
P Multiple Exposures..................................................................268
2 Mirror Lockup .........................................................................276
Using the Eyepiece Cover ............................................................ 278
Using a Remote Switch................................................................. 279
R Remote Control Shooting...........................................................279
H Interval Timer Shooting ...................................................... 281
13
Contents
7
Flash Photography
285
D Flash Photography ................................................................... 286
Setting the Flash Function............................................................ 289
8
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
297
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor .............................................. 298
Shooting Function Settings .......................................................... 307
Menu Function Settings................................................................ 309
Selecting the AF Operation .......................................................... 314
Focusing with AF (AF Method)..................................................... 316
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter............................................. 327
MF: Focusing Manually ................................................................ 329
9
Shooting Movies
333
k Shooting Movies..................................................................... 334
Autoexposure Shooting ............................................................. 334
Shutter-priority AE ..................................................................... 335
Aperture-priority AE ................................................................... 336
Manual Exposure Shooting........................................................ 340
Shooting Function Settings .......................................................... 349
Setting the Movie Recording Quality ............................................ 351
Setting the Sound Recording ....................................................... 362
Setting the Time Code.................................................................. 365
Shooting HDR Movies .................................................................. 369
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies ................................................ 371
Menu Function Settings................................................................ 379
14
Contents
10
Image Playback
393
x Image Playback ......................................................................394
B: Shooting Information Display.............................................397
x Searching for Images Quickly.................................................403
H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display) ..... 403
I Jumping through Images (Jump Display) ............................. 404
u Magnifying Images ..................................................................406
X Comparing Images (Two-Image Display) ...............................408
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen.........................................409
b Rotating the Image .................................................................. 411
K Protecting Images ................................................................... 412
Setting Ratings.............................................................................. 415
Q Quick Control for Playback...................................................... 418
k Enjoying Movies......................................................................420
k Playing Back Movies...............................................................422
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ..................................425
Grabbing Frames from 4K Movies ..........................................427
Slide Show (Auto Playback).......................................................... 429
Viewing Images on a TV Set......................................................... 432
a Copying Images....................................................................... 435
L Erasing Images ........................................................................ 439
Changing Image Playback Settings .............................................. 442
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ....................................... 442
Setting the LCD Monitor Color Tone........................................... 443
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ................................................444
15
Contents
11
Post-Processing Images
445
R Processing RAW Images with the Camera........................... 446
S Resizing JPEG Images........................................................... 452
N Cropping JPEG Images .......................................................... 454
12
Sensor Cleaning
457
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning .................................................. 458
Appending Dust Delete Data ........................................................ 460
Manual Sensor Cleaning .............................................................. 463
13
Transferring Images to a Computer and Print Ordering 465
d Transferring Images to a Computer ....................................... 466
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) ......................................... 471
p Specifying Images for a Photobook ......................................... 476
14
Customizing the Camera
479
Custom Functions ........................................................................ 480
Custom Function Settings ............................................................ 482
C.Fn1: Exposure........................................................................ 482
C.Fn2: Exposure........................................................................ 488
C.Fn3: Display / Operation ........................................................ 489
C.Fn4: Others ............................................................................ 491
7 Custom Controls .................................................................. 495
Custom Quick Control .................................................................. 510
Registering My Menu ................................................................... 515
w: Registering Custom Shooting Modes .................................... 520
16
Contents
15
Reference
523
System Map .................................................................................. 524
Checking the Battery Information.................................................. 526
Using a Household Power Outlet.................................................. 530
H Using Eye-Fi Cards ................................................................. 532
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode...............................536
Menu Settings ............................................................................... 540
Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................554
Error Codes...................................................................................573
Specifications ................................................................................574
16
Downloading Images to a Computer / Software
593
Downloading Images to a Computer.............................................594
Software Overview........................................................................ 596
Installing the Software................................................................... 597
Index ............................................................................................. 599
17
Index to Features
Power
LCD monitor
Charging the battery
 p.42
Touch control
 p.70
Battery level
 p.50
Brightness
 p.442
Battery information
check
 p.526
Household power outlet  p.530
Auto power off
 p.76
Cards
Color tone
 p.443
Electronic level
 p.82
Help
 p.91
AF
AF operation
 p.100
Formatting
 p.73
AF area selection mode  p.104
Recording function
 p.166
AF point selection
 p.107
Selecting card
 p.168
AF point registration
 p.500
Lens group
 p.115
AI Servo AF
characteristics
 p.127
EOS iTR AF
 p.147
Customizing AF
functions
 p.136
Viewfinder display
illumination
 p.150
AF Microadjustment
 p.152
Manual focusing
 p.159
Releasing shutter
without card
 p.46
Lens
Attaching
 p.55
Detaching
 p.56
Basic Settings
Language
 p.54
Date/Time/Zone
 p.51
Beeper
 p.76
Copyright information
 p.225
Clear all camera settings  p.77
Viewfinder
Metering
Metering mode
 p.253
Drive
Dioptric adjustment
 p.57
Drive mode
 p.160
Eyepiece cover
 p.278
Self-timer
 p.163
Electronic level
 p.83
Maximum burst
 p.174
Grid display
 p.81
Information display in
viewfinder
 p.84
18
Index to Features
Recording Images
Shooting
Recording function
 p.166
Shooting mode
 p.35
Selecting card
 p.168
HDR mode
 p.263
Multiple exposures
 p.268
Creating/Selecting a
folder
 p.218
Mirror lockup
 p.276
File name
 p.220
Bulb timer
 p.261
File numbering
 p.223
Interval timer
 p.281
Depth-of-field preview
 p.250
Remote switch
 p.279
Image-recording quality  p.169
Remote control
 p.279
Dual Pixel RAW shooting  p.175
Quick Control
 p.64
ISO speed (still photos)  p.177
Multi function lock
 p.90
Image Quality
Picture Style
 p.183
White balance
 p.192
Exposure
Auto Lighting Optimizer  p.201
Exposure compensation  p.255
Noise reduction for
high ISO speeds
Exposure compensation
with M+ISO Auto
 p.252
 p.202
Noise reduction for long
exposures
 p.204
AEB
 p.257
AE lock
 p.259
Highlight tone priority
 p.206
Safety shift
 p.485
Lens aberration
correction
 p.207
GPS
Reducing flicker
 p.215
GPS
 p.227
Color space
 p.217
Logging
 p.238
19
Index to Features
Flash
External flash
Movie Shooting
 p.286
Movie shooting
 p.333
ISO speed (movie)
 p.379
Flash exposure
compensation
 p.286
AF method
 p.316
FE lock
 p.286
Movie Servo AF
 p.380
Flash function settings
 p.289
Movie Servo AF speed
 p.383
 p.294
Movie Servo AF
tracking sensitivity
 p.384
Flash Custom Function
settings
Movie recording quality  p.351
Live View Shooting
24.00p
 p.357
Live View shooting
 p.297
High Frame Rate movie  p.358
AF operation
 p.314
HDR movie shooting
 p.369
AF method
 p.316
Time-lapse movie
 p.371
Touch shutter
 p.327
Sound recording
 p.362
Aspect ratio
 p.310
Microphone
 p.363
Magnified view
 p.325
Headphones
 p.363
Manual focusing
 p.329
Wind filter
 p.363
Exposure simulation
 p.311
Attenuator
 p.363
Silent LV shooting
 p.312
Time code
 p.365
HDMI output
 p.387
Remote control shooting  p.389
20
Index to Features
Playback
Customization
Image review time
 p.77
Custom Functions (C.Fn)  p.480
Single-image display
 p.394
Custom Controls
 p.495
Custom Quick Control
 p.510
 p.515
Shooting information
display
 p.397
My Menu
Index display
 p.403
Custom shooting mode  p.520
Image browsing
(Jump display)
 p.404
Magnified view
 p.406
Two-image display
 p.408
Sensor cleaning
Image rotate
 p.411
Append Dust Delete Data  p.460
Protect
 p.412
Manual sensor cleaning  p.463
Rating
 p.415
Movie playback
 p.422
Sensor Cleaning and Dust
Reduction
 p.458
Interface
Cable protector
 p.38
Editing a movie’s first
and last scenes
 p.425
Frame Grab (4K)
 p.427
Slide show
 p.429
Viewing images on a
TV set
 p.432
Software
Copying
 p.435
Overview
 p.596
Erasing
 p.439
Installation
 p.597
Quick Control
 p.418
Image Editing
RAW image processing
 p.446
Resizing JPEGs
 p.452
Cropping JPEGs
 p.454
Errors
Error codes
 p.573
Wi-Fi/NFC Functions
 Wi-Fi (Wireless
Communication) Function
Manual
Image Transfer / Print Ordering
Image transfer
(to a computer)
 p.466
Print Order (DPOF)
 p.471
Photobook Set-up
 p.476
21
Safety Precautions
The following precautions are provided to prevent harm or injury to
yourself and others. Make sure to thoroughly understand and follow
these precautions before using the product.
If you experience any malfunctions, problems, or damage to the
product, contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer
from whom you purchased the product.
Warnings:
Follow the warnings below. Otherwise, death or
serious injuries may result.
 To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, explosions, and electrical shock,
follow the safeguards below:
• Do not use any batteries, power sources, or accessories not specified in the
Instruction Manual. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries, or the
product if it is damaged.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery. Do not apply heat or
solder to the battery. Do not expose the battery to fire or water. Do not subject the
battery to strong physical shock.
• Do not insert the battery’s plus and minus ends incorrectly.
• Do not recharge the battery in temperatures outside the allowable charging
(working) temperature range. Also, do not exceed the recharge time indicated in
the Instruction Manual.
• Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,
accessories, connecting cables, etc.
 When disposing of a battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape. Contact with
other metallic objects or batteries may cause a fire or an explosion.
 If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted when recharging the battery,
immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop recharging.
Otherwise, it may cause a fire, heat damage, or electrical shock.
 If the battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it
immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process. It may cause a fire,
electrical shock or burns if you keep using it.
 Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage comes in contact with your
eyes, skin, or clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without
rubbing it. See a physician immediately.
 Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.
 Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the
camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause
skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is
recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when
using the camera in very hot places.
 Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle. It may cause an accident.
22
Safety Precautions
 When the camera or accessories are not in use, make sure to remove the battery
and disconnect the power plug from the equipment before storing. This is to prevent
electrical shock, excessive heat, fire, and corrosion.
 Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an
explosion or a fire.
 If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts,
do not touch the exposed internal parts. There is a possibility of an electrical shock.
 Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause
electrical shock.
 Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or
lens. Doing so may damage your vision.
 Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants, including when in use. Straps
or cords may accidentally cause choking, electrical shock, or injury. Choking or injury
may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory. If
a child or infant swallows a part or accessory, consult a physician immediately.
 Do not use or store the equipment in dusty or humid places. Likewise, keep the battery
away from metallic items and store it with its protective cover attached to prevent
short-circuit. This is to prevent fire, excessive heat, electrical shock, and burns.
 Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.
 To prevent a fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:
• Always insert the power plug all the way in.
• Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.
• When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.
• Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the
cord. Also do not twist or tie the cords.
• Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.
• Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged.
 Unplug the power plug periodically and clean off the dust around the power outlet
with a dry cloth. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power
outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet, causing a fire.
 Do not connect the battery directly to an electrical outlet or a car’s cigarette lighter
outlet. The battery may leak, generate excessive heat or explode, causing fire,
burns, or injuries.
 A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the
product is used by children. Supervise children while they are using the product.
Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury.
 Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera in the sun without the lens cap
attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.
 Do not cover or wrap the product with a cloth. Doing so may trap heat within and
cause the casing to deform or catch fire.
 Be careful not to get the camera wet. If you drop the product in the water or if water
or metal get inside the product, promptly remove the battery. This is to prevent fire,
electrical shock, and burns.
 Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the product.
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.
23
Safety Precautions
Cautions:
Follow the cautions below. Otherwise, physical injury
or property damage may result.
 Do not use or store the product in a high-temperature location such as inside a car
under the hot sun. The product may become hot and cause burns. Doing so may
also cause battery leakage or explosion, which will degrade the performance or
shorten the life of the product.
 Do not carry the camera around when it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause
an injury or an accident. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the
camera and lens.
 Do not leave the product in a low-temperature environment for an extended period of
time. The product will become cold and may cause injury when touched.
 Do not fire the flash near the eyes. It may hurt the eyes.
 Never play the provided CD-ROM in a drive that is not compatible with the CD-ROM.
If you use it in a music CD player, you may damage the speakers and other
components. When using headphones, there is also a risk of injury to your ears from
excessively loud volume.
 While listening with headphones, do not change the sound-recording settings. Doing
so may cause a blast of loud sound that will hurt your ears.
•
24
Handling Precautions
Camera Care
 This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical
shock.
 The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater.
 To maximize the camera’s dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal
cover, battery compartment cover, card slot cover, and all other covers firmly
closed.
 This camera is designed to be dust- and drip- resistant, in order to help
prevent sand, dust, dirt, or water that falls on it unexpectedly from getting
inside, but it is impossible to prevent dirt, dust, water, or salt from getting
inside at all. As far as possible, do not allow dirt, dust, water, and salt to get
on the camera.
 If water gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry and clean cloth. If dirt, dust,
or salt gets on the camera, wipe it off with a clean, well-wrung wet cloth.
 Using the camera in a location with large amounts of dirt or dust may cause
a malfunction.
 Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust, water, or
salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.
 If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that
moisture (water), dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly
consult the nearest Canon Service Center.
 Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such
as a magnet or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the camera near
anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.
 Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
 The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
25
Handling Precautions
 Do not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.
 Use only a commercially-available blower to blow away dust when it adheres
to the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, focusing screen, etc. Do not use
cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For
stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.
 Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to
prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera
malfunction.
 If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
 If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid
damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and
battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before
using the camera.
 If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to
check that the camera is still working.
 Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and
corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
 If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is
an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera
checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the camera
yourself and make sure it is working properly.
 If you repeat continuous shooting or perform Live View shooting or movie
shooting for a prolonged period, the camera may become hot. This is not a
malfunction.
 If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting
may occur.
26
Handling Precautions
LCD Panel and LCD Monitor
 Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, 0.01% or fewer of the pixels
may be dead, and there may also be spots of black, red, or other colors.
Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.
 If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.
 The LCD monitor display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures, or
look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
 Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
 Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything
metallic.
 Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.
 Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field,
such as a TV set, speakers, or magnets. Also avoid places prone to having
static electricity.
 Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
 Store the card in a case.
 Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Lens
After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the
lens with the rear end up and attach the rear lens cap to
avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.
Contacts
27
Nomenclature
<o>
Drive mode selection/
AF operation selection button
(p.160, 163/100)
<m> Flash exposure
compensation/ISO speed
setting button (p.286/177)
<U> LCD panel
illumination button
(p.63)
<6> Main Dial
(p.59)
<n> White balance selection/
Metering mode selection button (p.192/253)
<B> Multi function button
(p.62, 106, 286, 495)
GPS antenna
Lens mount index (p.55)
Flash sync contacts
Hot shoe (p.286)
Mode Dial lock-release
button (p.59)
Shutter button
(p.58)
Mode Dial (p.35, 59)
Built-in
microphone
(p.363)
Self-timer lamp
(p.163)
Strap mount
(p.37)
Remote control
sensor (p.279)
Lens release
button (p.56)
Grip
(Battery
compartment)
Terminal cover
DC coupler cord hole
(p.530)
Depth-of-field preview button
(p.250)
Lens lock pin
Lens mount
Contacts (p.27)
Mirror (p.276, 463)
Remote control terminal
(N3 type) (p.279)
Body cap (p.55)
28
Nomenclature
LCD panel (p.33, 34)
Eyecup (p.278)
Viewfinder eyepiece
<p>
AF start button
(p.58, 100, 300, 347)
<A> AE lock
button (p.259)
<S> AF point
selection button
(p.106, 107)
<B> Info button
(p.63, 82, 86, 91, 301,
305, 344, 394)
Power switch (p.49)
<M>
Menu button (p.67)
<Q> Quick
Control
button (p.64)
Terminal cover
<5> Quick
Control Dial (p.60)
Speaker
Access lamp (p.47)
Ambient light sensor (p.442)
Multi function lock switch (p.62)
<0> Setting button
(p.67)
<D> PC terminal (p.288)
<D> HDMI mini OUT terminal (p.432)
<Y> External microphone IN terminal (p.363)
<g> Digital terminal (p.466, 594)
<n> Headphone terminal (p.363)
Cable protector socket (p.38)
When connecting the interface cable to a digital terminal, use the provided
cable protector (p.38).
29
Nomenclature
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.57)
<V> Focal plane mark
<A> Live View shooting/
<k> Movie shooting switch
(p.297/333)
<0> Start/Stop button
(p.298, 334)
<b/X>
Creative Photo/
Comparative playback
(Two-image display)
button (p.183, 263,
268/408)
<9> Multi-controller
(p.61)
<c>
Rating button
(p.414, 415)
Strap mount
(p.37)
<u>
Index/Magnify/
Reduce button
(p.403/325,
329, 406)
AF area
selection
button (p.61)
Card slot
cover (p.45)
<x> Playback
button (p.394)
P (N-Mark)*
<L>
Erase button
(p.439)
Battery
compartment
cover release
lever (p.44)
Accessory positioning
hole
LCD monitor (p.67, 298,
334, 394, 442)
Battery compartment
cover (p.44)
Tripod socket
Serial number
SD card slot (p.45)
CF card slot (p.45)
CF card eject button (p.47)
* Used for wireless connections with the NFC function.
30
Nomenclature
Viewfinder Information
Electronic level (p.83)
Spot metering circle (p.254)
Large Zone AF frame (p.111)
Area AF frame (p.111)
<S> Single AF point
<O> Spot AF point
(p.109)
Focusing
screen
<V> Digital Lens
Optimizer (p.210)
Grid (p.81)
<U> Dual Pixel
RAW shooting
(p.175)
<
> Battery level
(p.50)
<G>
Flicker detection
(p.215)
Shooting mode (p.35)
<i> AF status
indicator (p.94,
103, 151)
White balance (p.192)
Drive mode (p.160)
<z> Warning symbol
(p.489)
AF operation (p.100)
Metering mode (p.253)
JPEG/RAW (p.169)
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.
31
Nomenclature
<i>
ISO speed
indicator (p.177)
<o> Focus
indicator
(p.94, 101)
<A> AE lock (p.259)
AEB in-progress
(p.257)
<D> Flash-ready
(p.286)
Improper FE lock
warning
<d> FE lock (p.286)
FEB in-progress (p.293)
<e> High-speed sync (p.293)
<y> Flash exposure
compensation (p.286)
Shutter speed (p.246)
Bulb (buLb) (p.260)
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card warning (Card)
Error code (Err)
Aperture (p.248)
Dust Delete Data acquisition (- -)
32
<e> AF status indicator
(p.103, 151)
Maximum burst (p.174)
Number of remaining
multiple exposures (p.270)
ISO speed (p.177)
<A> Highlight tone priority (p.206)
<O> Exposure compensation (p.255)
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount (p.255)
AEB range (p.257)
Flash exposure compensation (p.286)
AF point selection
([ ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)
AF point registration
([ ] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP)
Card warning (Card 1/2/1,2)
Card full warning (FuLL 1/2/1,2)
Nomenclature
LCD Panel
Shutter speed
Bulb (buLb)
FE lock (FEL)
Remaining number of
exposures for time-lapse movie
Busy (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
Cleaning image sensor (CLn)
No card warning (Card)
Error code (Err)
Aperture
Dust Delete Data acquisition (- -)
AF point selection
([ ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)
AF point registration
([ ] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP)
Card warning (Card 1/2/1,2)
Card full warning (FuLL 1/2/1,2)
<J> CF card selection icon
<f> CF card indicator
White balance
(p.192)
Q Auto: Ambience
priority
Qw Auto: White priority
W Daylight
E Shade
R Cloudy
Y Tungsten
light
U White
fluorescent
light
I Flash
O Custom
P Color temperature
<i> ISO speed
indicator (p.177)
<A> Highlight tone priority
(p.206)
<J> SD card selection icon
<g> SD card indicator
Possible shots
Self-timer countdown
Bulb exposure time
Card error warning (Err)
Error number
Remaining images to record
ISO speed (p.177)
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.
33
Nomenclature
<x> Logging function (p.238)
<r> GPS acquisition status
<a> Time-lapse movie shooting
(p.371)
<P> Multiple-exposure shooting
(p.268)
<H> Bulb timer shooting/
Interval timer shooting
(p.261/281)
<z> Warning
symbol (p.489)
<U> Dual
Pixel RAW
shooting
(p.175)
<y>
Flash exposure
compensation
(p.286)
Exposure level
indicator
Exposure compensation amount (p.255)
AEB range (p.257)
Flash exposure compensation amount
(p.286)
<O> Exposure compensation
(p.255)
34
AF operation (p.100, 314)
X
One-Shot AF
9
AI Focus AF
Z
AI Servo AF
K
Servo AF
4L
Manual focus (p.159, 329)
Drive mode (p.160)
u Single shooting
o High-speed
continuous shooting
i Low-speed
continuous shooting
B Silent single shooting
M Silent continuous
shooting
Q Self-timer: 10 sec./
remote control
k Self-timer: 2 sec./
remote control
Metering mode (p.253)
q Evaluative metering
w Partial metering
r Spot metering
e Center-weighted
average metering
Battery level (p.50)
<l> Wi-Fi function
Nomenclature
Mode Dial
You can set the shooting mode. Turn the Mode Dial while holding down
the Mode Dial center (Mode Dial lock release button).
F : Bulb (p.260)
a : Manual exposure (p.251)
f : Aperture-priority AE (p.248)
s : Shutter-priority AE (p.246)
d : Program AE (p.244)
A : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.94)
Custom shooting mode
You can register the shooting mode (<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or
<F>), AF operation, menu settings, etc., to the <w>, <x>, and
<y> Mode Dial positions (p.520).
35
Nomenclature
Battery Charger LC-E6E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.42).
Power cord
Charge lamp
Battery pack slot
Power cord socket
36
Nomenclature
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through the
camera’s strap mount eyelet from the
bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s
buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the
strap to take up any slack and make sure the
strap will not loosen from the buckle.
 The eyepiece cover is also attached to
the strap (p.278).
Eyepiece cover
37
Nomenclature
Using the Cable Protector
When connecting the camera to a computer or the Connect Station, use
the provided interface cable or one from Canon (shown in the System
Map on page 525).
When connecting the interface cable, also use the provided cable
protector. Using the cable protector prevents the cable from accidental
disconnection and the terminal from getting damaged.
Using the Provided Interface Cable and a Genuine HDMI Cable
(sold separately)
1
2
Clamp
3
Cable protector
4
Provided interface cable
5
HDMI cable (sold separately)
38
Nomenclature
Using a Genuine Interface Cable (sold separately)
If you use a genuine interface cable (sold
separately, p.525), run the cable through
the clamp before attaching the clamp to the
cable protector.
Clamp
 Connecting interface cable without using the cable protector may
damage the digital terminal.
 Do not use a USB 2.0 cable equipped with a Micro-B plug. It may
damage the camera’s digital terminal.
 As shown in the lower-right illustration for step 4, check that the interface
cable is securely attached to the digital terminal.
To connect the camera to a TV set, using HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) is recommended. Using the cable protector is also
recommended when connecting an HDMI cable.
39
40
1
Getting Started and Basic
Camera Operations
This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start
shooting and the basic camera operations.
41
Charging the Battery
1
Remove the protective cover.
 Detach the protective cover provided
with the battery.
the battery.
2 Attach
 As shown in the illustration, attach the
battery securely to the charger.
 To detach the battery, follow the
above procedure in reverse.
the battery.
3 Recharge
 Connect the power cord to the
charger and insert the plug into a
power outlet.
 Recharging starts automatically and
the charge lamp blinks in orange.
Charge Level
0-49%
50-74%
75% or higher
Fully charged
Color
Orange
Green
Charge Lamp
Display
Blinks once per second
Blinks twice per second
Blinks three times per second
Lights up
 It takes approx. 2 hr. and 30 min. to fully recharge a completely
exhausted battery at room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time
required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on the
ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.
 For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /
41°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).
42
Charging the Battery
Tips for Using the Battery and Charger
 Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
 Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity.
 After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
 You can attach the cover in a different
orientation to indicate whether the battery
is recharged or not.
If the battery is recharged, attach the cover so
that the battery-shaped hole <
> is aligned
over the blue sticker on the battery. If the battery is exhausted,
attach the cover in the opposite orientation.
 When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount of
power current will keep released, resulting in excess discharge and shorter
battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover attached. Storing the
battery when it is fully charged may lower the battery performance.
 The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter
for the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage
transformer to the battery charger. Doing so may damage the battery charger.
 If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after having been
fully charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.
Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.526) and purchase a new battery.
 After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for
approx. 10 sec.
 If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.526) is 94% or higher, the battery
will not be recharged.
 The provided charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack
LP-E6N/LP-E6.
43
Installing and Removing the Battery
Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N (or LP-E6) into the camera.
The camera’s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed, and
darkens when the battery is removed. If the battery is not installed, the
image in the viewfinder becomes blurred and you cannot perform focusing.
Installing the Battery
1
Open the cover.
 Slide the lever as shown by the
arrows and open the cover.
the battery.
2 Insert
 Insert the end with the electrical
contacts.
 Insert the battery until it locks in
place.
the cover.
3 Close
 Press the cover until it snaps shut.
You cannot use batteries other than the Battery Pack LP-E6N or LP-E6.
Removing the Battery
Open the cover and remove the battery.
 Press the battery lock lever as shown
by the arrow and remove the battery.
 To prevent short circuiting, be sure to
attach the provided protective cover
(p.42) to the battery.
44
Installing and Removing the Card
You can use a CF card and an SD card with this camera. Images can
be recorded when at least one card is installed in the camera.
If cards are inserted in both slots, you can select which card to record images
to or can record the same images simultaneously on both cards (p.166-168).
If you use an SD card, make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set
upward to enable writing/erasing.
Installing the Card
1
CF card (Card 1)
SD card (Card 2)
Open the cover.
 Slide the cover as shown by the
arrows to open it.
the card.
2 Insert
 The camera-front side slot is for a CF
card, and the camera-back side slot
is for an SD card.
 The CF card is [f] (Card 1) and the
SD card is [g] (Card 2).
 With the CF card’s label side facing
you, insert the end with the small
holes into the camera. If the card is
inserted in the wrong way, it may
damage the camera.
 The CF card eject button (gray) will
stick out.
 With the SD card’s label facing
you, push in the card until it clicks
in place.
Write-protect switch
45
Installing and Removing the Card
the cover.
3 Close
 Close the cover and slide it in the
CF card
indicator
SD card
indicator
direction shown by the arrows until it
snaps shut.
 When you set the power switch to
<1> (p.49), the number of possible
shots and the loaded card(s) will be
displayed on the LCD panel.
The images will be recorded to the
card indicated by the arrow < >
icon.
Card selection icon
Possible shots
 Type II CF cards, hard disk-type cards or CFast cards cannot be
used.
 Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used (card error will be displayed).
 Ultra DMA (UDMA) CF cards can also be used with the camera. UDMA
cards enable faster data writing.
 SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards are supported. UHS-I SDHC or
SDXC memory cards can also be used.
 The number of possible shots varies depending on the remaining
capacity of the card, the settings of image-recording quality, ISO speed,
etc.
 Setting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent
you from forgetting to insert a card (p.540).
46
Installing and Removing the Card
Removing the Card
1
Access lamp
Open the cover.
 Set the power switch to <2>.
 Check that the access lamp is off,
then open the cover.
 If [Recording...] is displayed on the
LCD monitor, close the cover.
the card.
2 Remove
 To remove the CF card, push the
CF card eject button
eject button.
 To remove the SD card, push it in
gently and release it. Then pull it out.
 Pull the card straight out, then close
the cover.
Caution
During Live View shooting or movie shooting, if the red E icon appears,
do not remove the card right away. The card may be hot due to the
camera’s high internal temperature. Set the power switch to <2> and stop
shooting for a while. Then remove the card. If you take out the card while it is
still hot after shooting, you may drop the card and damage it. Be careful when
taking out the card.
47
Installing and Removing the Card
 When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are
being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being
transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time.
Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or
blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or banging the camera around.
• Unplugging and connecting a power cord (when household power
outlet accessories (sold separately, p.530) are used).
 If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (p.223).
 If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove
and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer images on the card to a computer, transfer all the
images and then format the card with the camera (p.73). The card may
then return to normal.
 Do not touch the SD card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects.
Do not expose the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the
contacts, contact failure may result.
48
Turning on the Power
If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting
screen appears, see page 51 to set the date/time/zone.
<1> : The camera turns on.
<2>: The camera is turned off and
does not function. Set the
power switch to this position
when not using the camera.
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
 Whenever you set the power switch
to <1> or <2>, sensor
cleaning will be performed
automatically. (A small sound may be
heard.) During the sensor cleaning,
the LCD monitor will display <f>.
 You can still shoot during sensor cleaning by pressing the shutter
button halfway (p.58) to stop cleaning and take a picture.
 If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and
not a malfunction.
3 Auto Power Off
 To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after
approx. 1 minute of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just
press the shutter button halfway (p.58).
 You can change the auto power off time with [52: Auto power off]
(p.76).
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to
the card, [Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the
recording finishes.
49
Turning on the Power
z Battery Level Indicator
When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be
indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon <b> indicates
that the battery will soon be exhausted.
Display
Level (%)
100 - 70
69 - 50
49 - 20
19 - 10
9-1
0
Display
Level (%)
Number of Possible Shots with Viewfinder Shooting
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
Possible shots
Approx. 900 shots
Approx. 850 shots
 The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, no Live View
shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
 With Battery Grip BG-E20 (sold separately) loaded with two LP-E6N battery
packs, the number of possible shots will be approximately doubled.
 Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor frequently.
 The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual
shooting conditions.
 The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Certain lenses
may exhaust the battery faster than others.
 In low ambient temperatures, shooting may not be possible even with
a sufficient battery level.
 For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 299.
 See [53: Battery info.] to check the battery condition (p.526).
50
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone
have been reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow
the steps below to set the time zone first. Set the camera to the time
zone in which you currently live so that, when you travel, you can simply
change the setting to the correct time zone for your destination, and the
camera will automatically adjust the date/time.
Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based
on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
the [52] tab, select [Date/
2 Under
Time/Zone].
 Press the <Q> button and select the
[5] tab.
 Turn the <6> dial to select the [52]
tab.
 Turn the <5> dial to select [Date/
Time/Zone], then press <0>.
the time zone.
3 Set
 [London] is set by default.
 Turn the <5> dial to select [Time
zone], then press <0>.
51
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
 Turn the <5> dial to select the frame
below [Zone], then press <0>.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the time
zone, then press <0>.
 If your desired time zone is not listed,
press the <M> button, then
proceed to the next step to set it (with
the time difference from the
Coordinated Universal Time, UTC).
 To set the time difference from UTC,
turn the <5> dial and select (+/-/
hour/minute) for [Time difference].
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Turn the <5> dial to set it, then
press <0> (Returns to <s>).
 After entering the time zone and time
difference, turn the <5> dial to
select [OK], then press <0>.
the date and time.
4 Set
 Turn the <5> dial to select an item.
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Turn the <5> dial to set it, then
press <0> (Returns to <s>).
52
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
the daylight saving time.
5 Set
 Set it if necessary.
 Turn the <5> dial to select [Y].
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Turn the <5> dial to select [Z], then
press <0>.
 When the daylight saving time is set
to [Z], the time set in step 4 will
advance by 1 hr. If [Y] is set, the
daylight saving time will be canceled
and the time will go back by 1 hr.
the setting.
6 Exit
 Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],
then press <0>.
 The date/time/zone and daylight
saving time will be set and the menu
will reappear.
 The date/time/zone settings may be reset when the camera is stored
without the battery, when its battery becomes exhausted, or when it is
exposed to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period. If this
happens, set the date/time/zone again.
 After changing [Zone/Time difference], check that the correct date/time
are set.
 The date/time that were set will start from when you select [OK] in step 6.
 In step 3, the time displayed in [Time zone] is the time difference
compared with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
 Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [1 min.], [2 min.], or [4 min.], the
auto power off time will be approx. 6 min. when the [52: Date/Time/
Zone] setting screen is displayed.
 Automatic time update is possible with GPS function (p.237).
53
3 Selecting the Interface Language
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
the [52] tab, select
2 Under
[LanguageK].
 Press the <Q> button and select the
[5] tab.
 Turn the <6> dial to select the [52]
tab.
 Turn the <5> dial to select
[LanguageK], then press <0>.
the desired language.
3 Set
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
language, then press <0>.
 The interface language will change.
54
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
The camera is compatible with all Canon EF lenses. The camera
cannot be used with EF-S or EF-M lenses.
Attaching a Lens
1
Remove the caps.
 Remove the rear lens cap and the
body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
the lens.
2 Attach
 Align the red mount index on the lens
with the red mount index on the
camera and turn the lens as shown by
the arrow until it clicks in place.
the lens’s focus mode switch
3 Set
to <AF>.
 <AF> stands for autofocus.
 <MF> stands for manual focus.
Autofocus will not operate.
4 Remove the front lens cap.
55
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Detaching the Lens
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrow.
 Turn the lens until it stops, then
detach it.
 Attach the rear lens cap to the
detached lens.
 Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause
loss of vision.
 When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
 If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do
not touch the rotating part.
Minimizing Dust
 When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
 When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the
body cap to the camera.
 Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
56
Basic Shooting Operations
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity
Turn the dioptric adjustment
knob.
 Turn the knob left or right so that the
AF points in the viewfinder look
sharp.
 If the knob is difficult to turn, remove
the eyecup (p.278).
If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder
image, using Dioptric Adjustment Lens Eg (sold separately) is
recommended.
Holding the Camera
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.
Horizontal shooting
Vertical shooting
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
3. Rest your right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the
other.
6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 297.
57
Basic Shooting Operations
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing Halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel for approx. 4 sec.
(metering timer/0).
Pressing Completely
This releases the shutter and takes the
picture.
 Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is
called camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent
camera shake, note the following:
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press
the shutter button completely.
 In the <d> <s> <f> <a> <F> shooting modes, pressing the
<p> button will be the same as pressing the shutter button halfway.
 If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway
first, or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it
completely immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes
the picture.
 Even during menu display or image playback, you can go back to
shooting-ready state by pressing the shutter button halfway.
58
Basic Shooting Operations
A
MF
F
Mode Dial
Turn the dial while holding down
the lock release button at the
center of the dial.
Use it to set the shooting mode.
6 Main Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<6> dial.
When you press a button such as
<n>, <o>, or <m>, the
respective function remains selectable
for approx. 6 sec. (9). During this time,
you can turn the <6> dial to change
the setting.
When the timer ends or if you press the
shutter button halfway, the camera will
go back to shooting-ready state.
 Use this dial to select the metering
mode, AF operation, ISO speed, AF
point, etc.
(2) Turn only the <6> dial.
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD
panel, turn the <6> dial to change the
setting.
 Use this dial to set the shutter speed,
aperture, etc.
The operations in (1) can be performed even when the <R> switch is
set to the right (Multi function lock, p.62).
59
Basic Shooting Operations
5 Quick Control Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<5> dial.
When you press a button such as
<n>, <o>, or <m>, the
respective function remains selectable
for approx. 6 sec. (9). During this time,
you can turn the <5> dial to change the
setting.
When the timer ends or if you press the
shutter button halfway, the camera will
go back to shooting-ready state.
 Use this dial to select the white
balance, drive mode, flash exposure
compensation, AF point, etc.
(2) Turn only the <5> dial.
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD
panel, turn the <5> dial to change the
setting.
 Use this dial to set the exposure
compensation amount, the aperture
setting for manual exposures, etc.
The operations in (1) can be performed even when the <R> switch is
set to the right (Multi function lock, p.62).
60
Basic Shooting Operations
9 Multi-controller
The <9> consists of an eight-direction key and a button at the center.
Use your thumb to tilt the <9> in the desired direction.
 Use it to select the AF point, correct
the white balance, move the AF point
or magnifying frame during Live View
shooting or movie shooting, scroll
around magnified images during
playback, set the Quick Control, etc.
 You can also use it to select and set
menu items.
p AF Area Selection Button
For selecting the AF area (p.106).
After pressing the <S> button,
press the <p> button.
 Pressing the <S> button will make
the AF area selection mode and AF
point selectable for approx. 6 sec.
(9). Then when you press the <p>
(AF area selection) button within that
time, you can change the AF area
selection mode.
You can also press the <S> button and then press the <B> button to
select the AF area selection mode.
61
Basic Shooting Operations
B Multi Function Button
Use the <B> button for AF area
selection mode (p.106), FE lock (p.286),
and other functions.
To select the AF area selection mode,
press the <S> button (9), then press
the <B> button.
R Multi Function Lock
With [55: Multi function lock] set and the <R> switch set to the
right, you can prevent the settings from being inadvertently changed by
such as the following: Accidentally operating Main Dial, Quick Control
Dial or Multi-controller, pressing the AF area selection button or tapping
on the touch screen.
For [55: Multi function lock] details, see page 90.
<R> switch set to the left:
Lock released
<R> switch set to the right:
Lock engaged
By default, the <5> dial will be locked when locked.
62
Basic Shooting Operations
U LCD Panel Illumination
You can illuminate the LCD panel by
pressing the <U> button. Turn on (9)
or off the LCD panel illumination by
pressing the <U> button.
During a bulb exposure, pressing the shutter button completely will turn off
the LCD panel illumination.
Displaying the Quick Control Screen
After you press the <B> button a number of times (p.86), the Quick
Control screen (p.88) or Custom Quick Control screen (p.510) will
appear. You can then check the current shooting function settings.
Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting
function settings (p.64).
Then you can press the <B> button to turn off the screen (p.86).
63
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the
LCD monitor with intuitive operations. This is called Quick Control.
The basic operating procedures are the same for the Quick Control
screen (p.88) and the Custom Quick Control screen (p.510).
1
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
the desired functions.
2 Set
 Use <9> to select a function.
 The setting of the selected function is
displayed.
 Turn the <5> or <6> dial to
change the setting.
 <A> mode
 <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>,
<F> mode
the picture.
3 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 The captured image will be displayed.
 In the <A> mode with the Quick Control screen displayed, you can only
set [Rec function/card selection], [Image quality], and [Drive mode].
 You can also tap on the screen for Quick Control settings (p.70).
64
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
Functions Settable with the Quick Control
Aperture (p.248)
Shutter speed (p.246)
Flash exposure compensation
(p.286, 293)
Exposure
compensation/
AEB setting
(p.255/257)
ISO speed (p.177)
Custom Controls (p.495)
Picture Style (p.183)
Image-recording quality
(p.169)
AF operation (p.100)
White balance (p.192)
Recording function/
Card selection (p.166)
Metering mode (p.253)
White balance correction /
White balance bracketing
(p.198/199)
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.201)
Drive mode (p.160)
For the Quick Control screen, see page 88.
65
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
Quick Control
 <0>
 Select the desired function and press
<0>. The function setting screen will
appear.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to
change some of the settings. There
are also functions that are set by
pressing the button.
 Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to the previous screen.
 When you select <
> (p.495) and
press the <M> button, the
previous screen will reappear.
Custom Quick Control
You can customize the layout of the Quick Control screen. This feature
lets you display and position the shooting functions on the Quick
Control screen as desired. This feature is called “Custom Quick Control
(screen)”. For the Custom Quick Control, see page 510.
On the Custom Quick Control screen, if you press the <Q> button and
there are no functions you can set with Quick Control, the Quick Control
icon on the lower left of the screen will be displayed in orange.
66
3 Menu Operations
You can set various settings with the menus such as the imagerecording quality, date/time, etc.
<M> button
<6> Main Dial
LCD monitor
<5> Quick Control Dial
<Q> button
<0> Setting button
<A> Mode Menu Screen
* Certain menu tabs and menu items are not displayed in the <A> mode.
<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, <F> Mode Menu Screen
3: Playback
2: AF
z: Shooting
Secondary
tabs
5: Set-up
8: Custom Functions
9: My Menu
Main tabs
Menu settings
Menu items
67
3 Menu Operations
Menu Setting Procedure
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
a tab.
2 Select
 Each time you press the <Q> button,
the main tab (group of functions) will
switch.
 Turn the <6> dial to select a
secondary tab.
 For example, the [z5] tab refers to
the screen displayed when the z
(Shooting) tab’s fifth box “ ” from
the left is selected.
the desired item.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the item,
then press <0>.
the setting.
4 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
desired setting.
 The current setting is indicated in
blue.
the setting.
5 Set
 Press <0> to set it.
the setting.
6 Exit
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to shooting-ready.
68
3 Menu Operations
 The explanation of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.
 You can also use <9> to select and set menu functions. (Except for
[31: Erase images] and [51: Format card].)
 To cancel the operation, press the <M> button.
 For details about each menu item, see page 540.
Dimmed Menu Items
Example: Highlight tone priority
Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The
menu item is dimmed if another function
setting is overriding it.
You can see the overriding function by
selecting the dimmed menu item and
pressing <0>.
If you cancel the overriding function’s
setting, the dimmed menu item will
become settable.
Certain dimmed menu items may not show the overriding function.
With [55: Clear all camera settings], you can reset the menu functions to
the default settings (p.77).
69
d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen
You can operate the camera by touching the LCD monitor (touchsensitive panel) with your fingers.
Tap
Sample Display (Quick Control)
 Use your finger to tap on (touch
briefly and then remove your finger
from) the LCD monitor.
 By tapping, you can select menus,
icons, etc., displayed on the LCD
monitor.
 When touch operation is possible, a
frame will appear around the icon
(except on menu screens).
For example, when you tap on [Q],
the Quick Control screen appears. By
tapping on [2], you can return to the
preceding screen.
Operations possible by tapping on the screen
 Setting menu functions after pressing the <M> button.
 Quick Control
 Setting functions after pressing the <n>, <o>, <m>,
or <S> button
 Touch AF in Live View shooting and movie shooting
 Touch shutter in Live View shooting
 Setting functions in Live View shooting and movie shooting
 Playback operations
If [z1: Beep] is set to [Touch to
operations (p.76).
70
], the beep will not sound for touch
d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen
Drag
Sample Display (Menu screen)
 Slide your finger while touching the
LCD monitor.
Sample Display (Scale display)
Operations possible by dragging your finger on the screen





Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the <M> button
Setting with scale display
Quick Control
Selecting AF points
Playback operations
71
d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen
3 Touch Control Settings
1
Select [Touch control].
 Under the [52] tab, select [Touch
control], then press <0>.
the touch control sensitivity
2 Set
setting.
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 [Standard] is the normal setting.
 [Sensitive] provides a more reactive
touch screen response than
[Standard]. Try using both settings
and select the one you prefer.
 To disable touch operations, select
[Disable].
Cautions for Touch Control Operations
 Since the LCD monitor is not pressure sensitive, do not use any sharp
objects, such as your fingernail or a ballpoint pen, for touch operations.
 Do not use wet fingers for touch operations.
 If the LCD monitor has any moisture or if your fingers are wet, the touch
screen may not respond or malfunction may occur. In such a case, turn
off the power and wipe off the moisture with a cloth.
 Attaching any commercially-available protective sheet or sticker on the
LCD monitor may degrade the touch operation response.
 If you quickly perform touch operation when [Sensitive] is set, the touch
operation response may be slower.
72
Before You Start
3 Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or
computer, format the card with this camera.
When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be
erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is
nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to
a computer, etc., before formatting the card.
1
Select [Format card].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Format
card], then press <0>.
the card.
2 Select
 [f] is the CF card, and [g] is the SD
card.
 Select the card, then press <0>.
the card.
3 Format
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 The card will be formatted.
 When [g] is selected, low-level
formatting is possible (p.74).
For low-level formatting, press the
<L> button to add a checkmark [X]
to [Low level format], then select
[OK].
73
Before You Start
Format the card in the following cases:




The card is new.
The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full of images or data.
A card-related error is displayed (p.573).
Low-level Formatting
 Perform low-level formatting if the SD card’s reading or writing speed
seems slow or if you want to totally erase the data on the card.
 Since low-level formatting will erase all recordable sectors on the SD
card, the formatting will take longer than normal formatting.
 You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in
this case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use the
SD card as usual.
 Card’s file formats
CF cards up to 128 GB in capacity and SD/SDHC cards will be
formatted in FAT32. CF cards exceeding 128 GB and SDXC cards
will be formatted in exFAT.
When shooting a movie with a card formatted in exFAT, the movie
will be recorded in a single file (instead of being split into multiple
files) even if it exceeds 4 GB. (The movie file will exceed 4 GB.)
74
Before You Start
 If you format a CF card exceeding 128 GB or SDXC card with this
camera and then insert it into another camera, an error may be displayed
and the card may become unusable. Certain computer operating
systems or card readers may not recognize a card formatted in exFAT.
 When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the
card, perform low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to
prevent personal data from being leaked.
 The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller
than the capacity indicated on the card.
 This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
75
Before You Start
3 Disabling the Beeper
You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved,
during self-timer shooting, and during touch operations.
1
Select [Beep].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Beep],
then press <0>.
[Disable].
2 Select
 Select [Disable], then press <0>.
 The beeper will not sound.
 If [Touch to ] is selected, the
beeper will be silent only for touch
operations.
3 Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after a set
time of idle operation elapses. The default setting is 1 min., but this
setting can be changed. If you do not want the camera to turn off
automatically, set this to [Disable]. After the power turns off, you can
turn on the camera again by pressing the shutter button or other
buttons.
1
Select [Auto power off].
 Under the [52] tab, select [Auto
power off], then press <0>.
the desired time.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Even if [Disable] is set, the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after
approx. 30 min. to save power. (The camera’s power does not turn off.)
76
Before You Start
3 Setting the Image Review Time
You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor
immediately after shooting. To keep the captured image displayed, set
[Hold]. To not have the captured image displayed, set [Off].
1
Select [Image review].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
review], then press <0>.
the desired time.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
If [Hold] is set, the image will be displayed until the auto power off time
elapses.
3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN
The camera’s shooting function settings and menu settings can be
reverted to their defaults.
1
Select [Clear all camera settings].
 Under the [55] tab, select [Clear all
camera settings], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 Clearing all the camera settings will
reset the camera to the default
settings on pages 78-80.
For how to clear all the Custom Function settings, see page 481.
77
Before You Start
Shooting Function Settings
One-Shot AF
Single-point AF
(Manual selection)
Center
Canceled
q (Evaluative
Metering mode
metering)
AF operation
AF area selection
mode
AF point selection
Registered AF point
ISO speed settings
ISO speed
Range for stills
Auto range
Automatic setting
(Auto)
Minimum: 100
Maximum: 32000
Minimum: 100
Maximum: 12800
Minimum shutter
Auto
speed for auto
Drive mode
u (Single shooting)
Exposure
Canceled
compensation/AEB
Flash exposure
Canceled
compensation
Multiple exposure Disable
HDR mode
Disable HDR
Interval timer
Disable
Bulb timer
Disable
Anti-flicker
Disable
shooting
Mirror lockup
Disable
Viewfinder Information
Electronic level Hide
Grid display
Hide
Show/hide in
Only flicker
detection selected
viewfinder
Custom Functions Unchanged
External Speedlite control
Flash firing
Enable
E-TTL II flash
Evaluative flash
metering
metering
Flash sync. speed
Auto
in Av mode
78
AF
Case 1 - 6
Case1/Parameter
settings of all
cases cleared
AI Servo 1st image
Equal priority
priority
AI Servo 2nd image
Equal priority
priority
Lens electronic MF Enable after
One-Shot AF
AF-assist beam
firing
One-Shot AF
release priority
Lens drive when
AF impossible
Enable
Focus priority
Continue focus
search
Selectable AF point All points
Select AF area
selection mode
AF area selection
method
Orientation linked
AF point
Initial AF Point,
AI Servo AF
Auto AF pt sel.:
EOS iTR AF
AF point selection
movement
AF point display
during focus
VF display
illumination
AF point during
AI Servo AF
AF operation display
in viewfinder
AF
Microadjustment
All items
selected
M-Fn button
Same for both
vertical/horizontal
Auto
EOS iTR AF
(Face priority)
Stops at AF area
edges
Selected
(constant)
Auto
Disable
Displayed in
viewfinder
Disable/
Adjustment
amount retained
Before You Start
Image Recording Settings
Image quality
73
Dual Pixel RAW
Disable
Picture Style
Standard
Auto Lighting
Standard
Optimizer
Lens aberration correction
Peripheral
Enable
illumination
correction
Distortion
Disable
correction
Digital Lens
Disable
Optimizer
Chromatic
Enable
aberration
correction
Diffraction
Enable
White balance
Q (Ambience
priority)
Custom White
Canceled
Balance
White balance shift
Canceled
White balance
Canceled
bracketing
Color space
sRGB
Long exposure noise
Disable
reduction
High ISO speed noise
Standard
reduction
Highlight tone
Disable
priority
Record function+card/folder selection
Record function
Standard
Record and
Unchanged
playback
File numbering
Continuous
File name
Preset code
Dust Delete Data
Erased
Camera Settings
Image review time
2 sec.
Beep
Enable
Release shutter
Enable
without card
Image jump w/6
e (10 images)
Highlight alert
Disable
AF point display
Disable
Playback grid
Off
Histogram display
Brightness
Movie playback count Unchanged
Magnification
2x (magnify
from center)
(Approx.)
Control over HDMI
Disable
Auto rotate vertical
OnzD
images
Auto power off
1 min.
LCD brightness
Auto
LCD color tone
2: Standard
Date/Time/Zone
Unchanged
Language
Unchanged
Touch control
Standard
Video system
Unchanged
Auto cleaning
Enable
zbutton display
All items
selected
options
Custom Quick Control Unchanged
zbutton LV
Unchanged
display options
mbutton function Rating
GPS
Disable
Built-in wireless setting
Wi-Fi/NFC
Disable
FTP transfer setting
Automatic transfer Disable
5 (Quick
Control Dial) only
Custom shooting mode Unchanged
Copyright information Unchanged
Configure: MY MENU Unchanged
Menu display
Normal display
Multi function lock
79
Before You Start
Live View Shooting Settings
Live View shooting
AF method
Touch shutter
Grid display
Aspect ratio
Exposure
simulation
Enable
u+Tracking
Disable
Off
3:2
Enable
Silent LV shooting Mode 1
Metering timer
8 sec.
Movie Shooting Settings
ISO speed settings
ISO speed
Automatic setting
(Auto)
Range for
movies
Minimum: 100
Maximum: 25600
Range for H
Minimum: 100
Maximum: 12800
Movie Servo AF Enable
AF method
u+Tracking
Grid display
Off
Movie recording quality
MOV/MP4
MOV
Movie
NTSC:L6X
recording size PAL: L5X
24.00P
High Frame
Rate
Disable
Disable
Sound recording Auto
Wind filter
Disable
Attenuator
Disable
80
Movie Servo AF Speed
When active
AF speed
Movie Servo AF
track sensitivity
Always on
0 (Standard)
Metering timer
Time code
Count up
Start time setting
Movie
recording count
8 sec.
0
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
Movie
Unchanged
playback count
HDMI
Drop frame
V button
function
Unchanged
Unchanged
/–
Time-lapse movie Disable
HDMI display
a
HDMI frame rate
Auto
Remote control
shooting
Disable
l Displaying the Grid in the Viewfinder
You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt
or compose the shot.
1
Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Grid display].
[Show].
3 Select
 When you exit the menu, the grid will
appear in the viewfinder.
You can display a grid on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting and
before you start shooting a movie (p.309, 382).
81
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the
viewfinder to help you correct the camera tilt.
Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor
1
Press the <B> button.
 Each time you press the <B>
button, the screen display will
change.
 Display the electronic level.
 If the electronic level does not
appear, set [53: z button
display options] so that the
electronic level can be displayed
(p.86).
the camera’s tilt.
2 Check
 The horizontal and vertical tilts are
Vertical level Horizontal level
displayed in 1° increments.
 When the red line turns green, it
indicates that the tilt is almost
corrected.
 Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx. ±1°.
 If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error will be
larger.
During Live View shooting and before movie shooting, you can also display
the electronic level as described above (except with u+ Tracking).
82
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
3 Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder
An electronic level can be displayed on the upper part of the viewfinder.
Since this indicator is displayed during shooting, you can take the
picture while checking the camera tilt.
1
Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Electronic level].
3 Select [Show].
the shutter button halfway.
4 Press
 The electronic level will be displayed
on the upper part of the viewfinder.
 This level also works with vertical
shooting.
1°
1°
4° or greater
7°
7.5° or greater
Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx. ±1°.
83
3 Setting the Viewfinder Information DisplayN
The shooting function settings (Battery (remaining capacity), Shooting
mode, White balance, Drive mode, AF operation, Metering mode,
Image quality (image type), Digital Lens Optimizer, Dual Pixel RAW
(shooting), Flicker detection) can be displayed in the viewfinder.
By default, only Flicker detection is checkmarked [X].
1
Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Show/hide in viewfinder].
[X] the information to
3 Checkmark
be displayed.
 Select the information to display and
press <0> to add a checkmark [X].
 Repeat this procedure to add a
checkmark [X] to all the information
to be displayed. Then select [OK].
 When you exit the menu, the
checkmarked information will appear
in the viewfinder (p.31).
84
3 Setting the Viewfinder Information DisplayN
If no card is inserted in the camera, the image-recording quality (image type:
JPEG/RAW) will not be displayed.
 When you press the <n> or <o> button, operate the lens’s
focus mode switch, or when a lens equipped with electronic manual
focusing function is used and the AF and MF switches as the lens
focusing ring is turned (p.138), the respective information will appear in
the viewfinder regardless of whether it is checkmarked.
 Even if [Battery] is not checkmarked, the battery check icon (
/
)
will be displayed in the viewfinder when the battery level is low.
85
B Button Functions
When you press the <B> button with
the camera being ready to shoot, you
can switch the display as follows:
Displays camera settings (p.87),
Electronic level (p.82), Quick Control
screen (p.88), and Custom Quick Control
screen (p.510).
[z button display options] under
[53] tab enables you to select the
options displayed when the <B>
button is pressed.
 Select the desired display option and
press <0> to add a checkmark [X].
 Then select [OK] to register the
setting.
Camera settings
Custom Quick
Control screen
Electronic level
Quick Control screen
86
B Button Functions
 If you turn off the power with the Electronic level, Quick Control screen,
or Custom Quick Control screen displayed, the same screen will be
displayed when you turn on the power again. To cancel this function,
press the <B> button a number of times until the screen is blank,
then turn off the power switch.
 Note that you cannot remove the [X] for all four display options.
 The [Displays camera settings] sample screen is displayed in English
for all languages.
 Even if you set the [Electronic level] not to be displayed, it may still be
displayed for Live View shooting and movie shooting by pressing the
<B> button.
 When the Quick Control screen or Custom Quick Control screen is
displayed, pressing the <Q> button enables you to set a function with
Quick Control (p.64).
Camera Settings
(p.198, 199)
Custom shooting mode
(p.520)
Color temperature
setting (p.197)
AF Microadjustment
(p.152)
Wi-Fi function
Color space (p.217)
Transfer of some
images failed* (p.468)
(p.204)
(p.202)
(p.220)
(p.46, 171)
* This icon is displayed when the transfer of some images failed.
87
B Button Functions
Quick Control Screen
Aperture
Shutter speed
AE lock
Highlight tone priority
ISO speed
Shooting mode
Exposure level indicator
Flash exposure
compensation
Exposure compensation
Custom Controls
White balance
correction
Card indicator
Image-recording quality
Picture Style
Card selection icon
AF operation
Possible shots/
Auto cleaning
Quick Control icon
Battery level
Max. burst/Number of
remaining multiple exposures
White balance
Metering mode
Wi-Fi function/
Eye-Fi card transmission status
GPS acquisition status
Logging function
Drive mode
Multiple exposures/HDR/
Multi Shot Noise Reduction/
Dual Pixel RAW
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Flash-ready/FE lock/
High-speed sync
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.
Custom Quick Control screen
For the Custom Quick Control, see page 510.
88
B Button Functions
Button Operation for the Quick Control and
Custom Quick Control Screens
When you press the <n>, <o>, <m>, or <S> button,
the setting screen will appear and you can use <6>, <5>, <9>,
<p>, or <B> to set the function.
Metering mode / White balance
ISO speed /
Flash exposure compensation
AF operation / Drive mode
AF Area / AF point selection
89
R Setting Multi Function Lock
By setting the <R> switch to the right, you can prevent the settings
from being inadvertently changed by such as the following: Accidentally
operating Main Dial, Quick Control Dial or Multi-controller, pressing the
AF area selection button or tapping on the touch screen.
For details on the Multi function lock switch, see page 62.
1
Select [Multi function lock].
 Under the [55] tab, select [Multi
function lock], then press <0>.
a checkmark [X] to the
2 Add
camera control to be locked.
 Select a camera control and press
<0> to add a checkmark [X].
 Select [OK].
 When the <R> switch is set to
the right, the checkmarked [X]
camera controls will be locked.
 If the <R> switch is set to the right and you try to use one of the
locked camera controls (except when [hTouch control] is set), <L> will
be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel. On the Quick
Control screen (p.64), [LOCK] will be displayed. During Live View or
movie shooting, [LOCK] will be displayed on the shooting screen.
 By default, the <5> dial will be locked when locked.
 In the <A> mode, only [hTouch control] can be set.
 Quick Control (p.64) will work regardless of the Multi function lock
setting.
90
Help
When [z Help] is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen, the
feature’s description (Help) can be displayed. Press the <B> button
to display the Help. Press it again to turn off the Help display. If the Help
fills more than one screen, a scroll bar will appear on the right edge.
Turn the <5> dial to scroll.
 Example: [21: Case 2]
B

Scroll bar
 Example: [24: Orientation linked AF point]
B

 Example: [55: Multi function lock]
B

91
92
2
Basic Shooting
This chapter explains how to use the Mode Dial’s <A>
(Scene Intelligent Auto) mode for easy picture taking.
In the <A> mode, all you do is point and shoot and the
camera sets everything automatically (p.536). Also, to prevent
botched pictures due to misoperations, advanced shooting
function settings cannot be changed.
Scene Intelligent Auto
Auto Lighting Optimizer
In the <A> mode, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.201) will adjust
the image automatically to obtain the optimum brightness and
contrast based on the shooting resut.
93
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene
and sets the optimum settings automatically. It also adjusts focus
automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the
motion of the subject (p.97).
1
Area AF frame
Set the Mode Dial to <A>.
 Turn the Mode Dial while holding
down the lock release button at the
center.
the Area AF frame over the
2 Aim
subject.
 All the AF points will be used to focus,
and the camera will focus on the
closest object.
 Aiming the center of the Area AF
frame over the subject will make
focusing easier.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway. The
lens elements will shift to focus.
 During the autofocus operation,
<i> will be displayed.
 The AF point that achieves focus will
be displayed. At the same time, the
beeper will sound and the focus
indicator <o> will light up.
 In low light, the AF point(s) will light
up briefly in red.
Focus indicator
94
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 The captured image will be displayed
for approx. 2 sec. on the LCD
monitor.
The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If you do not obtain the desired color tones, change the
mode to <d>, <s>, <f>, or <a>, set a Picture Style other than
<D>, then shoot again (p.183).
FAQ
 The focus indicator <o> blinks and focus is not achieved.
Aim the Area AF frame over an area with good contrast, then press
the shutter button halfway (p.58). If you are too close to the subject,
move away and shoot again.
 When focus is achieved, the AF points do not light up in red.
The AF points light up in red only when focus is achieved in low light
or with a dark subject.
 Multiple AF points light up simultaneously.
Focus has been achieved at all those points. You can take the
picture as long as an AF point covering the target subject is lighting
up.
 The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus indicator <o>
does not light up.)
It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving
subject. (The AF status indicator <i> lights up, but the focus
indicator <o> does not light up.) You can take sharp pictures of a
moving subject.
Note that focus lock (p.97) will not work in this case.
95
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
 Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus on the
subject.
If the focus mode switch of the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus),
set it to <AF> (autofocus).
 The shutter speed display is blinking.
Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject
due to camera shake. Using a tripod or a Canon EX-series Speedlite
(sold separately, p.286) is recommended.
 When the external flash was used, the bottom part of the
picture came out unnaturally dark.
If a hood is attached to the lens, it may obstruct the flash light. If the
subject is close, detach the hood before taking the picture with flash.
Minimizing Blurred Photos
 Silent single shooting (p.161), Single shooting in Live View shooting,
etc. are effective. Mirror lockup (p.276) is also effective except when
the shooting mode is set to <A>.
 For continuous shooting, using Silent continuous shooting (p.161) or
Live View continuous shooting is effective.
 Use a sturdy tripod that can bear the weight of the shooting
equipment. Mount the camera securely on the tripod.
 Using a remote switch or a remote controller is recommended
(p.279).
96
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Recomposing the Shot
Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right
to include a balanced background will result in a picture with better
perspective.
In the <A> mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a
still subject will lock the focus on that subject. Recompose the shot
while keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, and then press the
shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called “focus lock”.
Shooting a Moving Subject
In the <A> mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes)
during or after focusing, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus on the
subject continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long
as you keep the Area AF frame positioned over the subject while
pressing the shutter button halfway, focusing will be continuous. At the
decisive moment, press the shutter button completely to take the
picture.
97
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
A Live View Shooting
You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is
called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 297.
1
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image on
2 Display
the LCD monitor.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely.
 The picture is taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
 When the playback display ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
 Press the <0> button to exit the
Live View shooting.
98
3
Setting the AF and
Drive Modes
The AF points in the viewfinder
are arranged to make AF shooting
suitable for a wide variety of
subjects and scenes.
You can also select the AF operation and drive mode
that best match the shooting conditions and subject.
 A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in the following modes: <d>
<s> <f> <a> <F>.
 In the <A> mode, the AF operation and AF area selection
mode are set automatically.
<AF> stands for autofocus. <MF> stands for manual focus.
99
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting
conditions or subject. In the <A> mode, “AI Focus AF” is set
automatically.
1
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <AF>.
the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>,
2 Set
or <F> mode.
3 Press the <o> button (9).
the AF operation.
4 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
X: One-Shot AF
9: AI Focus AF
Z: AI Servo AF
 When the AF area selection mode (p.109) is set to Zone AF, Large Zone
AF, or Auto selection AF, AF is possible by utilizing the face and subject’s
color information (p.147).
 In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, and <F> shooting modes, AF is also
possible by pressing the <p> button.
100
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Suited for still subjects. When you
press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will focus only once.
Focus indicator
AF point
 The AF point that achieves focus is
displayed, and the focus indicator
<o> in the viewfinder will also light
up.
 With evaluative metering (p.253), the
exposure setting will be set at the
same time as focus is achieved.
 While you hold down the shutter
button halfway, the focus will be
locked. You can then recompose the
shot if desired.
 If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder
will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter
button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot and try to focus again
or see “When Autofocus Fails” (p.158).
 If [z1: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus
is achieved.
 After achieving focus with One-Shot AF, you can lock the focus on a
subject and recompose the shot. This is called “focus lock”. This is useful
when you want to focus on a peripheral subject not covered by the Area
AF frame.
 When a lens equipped with an electronic manual focusing function is
used, after achieving focus, you can focus manually by turning the lens
focusing ring while pressing the shutter button halfway (p.159).
101
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF operation is suited for
moving subjects when the focusing
distance keeps changing. While you
hold down the shutter button halfway,
the camera will keep focusing on the
subject continuously.
 The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
 When the AF area selection mode (p.109) is set to Automatic
selection AF, focus tracking will continue as long as the Area AF
frame covers the subject.
With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
Also, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder will not light up.
AI Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically
AI Focus AF switches the AF
operation from One-Shot AF to AI
Servo AF automatically if a still
subject starts moving.
 After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF, if the subject starts
moving, the camera will detect the movement, change the AF
operation automatically to AI Servo AF, and start tracking the moving
subject.
When focus is achieved with AI Focus AF with the Servo operation active,
the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus indicator <o> in
the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus will not be locked in this case.
102
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
AF Operation Indicator
When you press the shutter button
halfway and the camera is focusing with
AF, the <i> icon will appear on the
lower right of the viewfinder.
In One-Shot AF mode, the icon also
appears if you press the shutter button
halfway after focus is achieved.
The AF operation indicator can be displayed outside the viewfinder’s field of
view (p.151).
AF Points Lighting Up in Red
By default, the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved in lowlight conditions or on a dark subject. In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>,
or <F> mode, you can set whether to have the AF points light up in red
when focus is achieved (p.150).
103
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
The camera has 61 AF points for autofocusing. You can select the AF
area selection mode and AF point(s) suiting the scene or subject.
Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of usable
AF points, AF point patterns, Area AF frame shape, etc. vary. For
details, see “Lenses and Usable AF Points” on page 115.
AF Area Selection Mode
You can select one of seven AF area selection modes. For the selection
procedure, see page 106.
Single-point Spot AF
(Manual selection)
For pinpoint focusing.
Single-point AF
(Manual selection)
Select one AF point to focus.
AF point expansion
(Manual selection )
The manually-selected AF point <S>
and four adjacent AF points <w> (above,
below, on the left, and on the right) are
used to focus.
104
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
AF point expansion
(Manual selection,
surrounding points)
The manually-selected AF point <S>
and the surrounding AF points <w> are
used to focus.
Zone AF
(Manual selection of zone)
One of nine focusing zones is used to
focus.
Large Zone AF
(Manual selection of zone)
One of three focusing zones (left, center,
and right) is used to focus.
Automatic selection AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is
used to focus.
105
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode
1
Press the <S> button (9).
the <p> button or <B>
2 Press
button.
 Look through the viewfinder and
press the <p> (AF area selection)
button or <B> button.
 Each time you press the <p> button
or <B> button, the AF area
selection mode changes.
 With [24: Select AF area selec. mode], you can limit the selectable
AF area selection modes to only those you want to use (p.143).
 If you set [24: AF area selection method] to [S9Main Dial], you
can select the AF area selection mode by pressing the <S> button,
then turning the <6> dial (p.144).
106
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
Selecting the AF Point Manually
You can manually select the AF point or zone.
1
Press the <S> button (9).
 The AF points will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
 In AF point expansion modes,
adjacent AF points will also be
displayed.
 In the Zone AF or Large Zone AF
mode, the selected zone will be
displayed.
an AF point.
2 Select
 The AF point selection will change in
the direction you tilt <9>. If you
press <9> straight down, the center
AF point (or center zone) will be
selected.
 You can also select a horizontal AF
point by turning the <6> dial and
select a vertical AF point by turning
the <5> dial.
 In the Zone AF and Large Zone AF
modes, turning the <6> or <5>
dial will change the zone (in a looping
sequence for Zone AF).
 When [24: Initial AF pt,
AI Servo AF] is set to [Initial
AF pt
selected] (p.146), you can use this method to manually select the AI
Servo AF’s initial position.
 When you press the <S> button, the LCD panel displays the following:
• Zone AF, Large Zone AF, Automatic selection AF:
AF
• Single-point spot AF, Single-point AF, AF point expansion: SEL
(Center), SEL AF (Off center)
107
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
AF Point Display Indications
Pressing the <S> button lights up the AF points that are cross-type AF
points for high-precision autofocusing. The blinking AF points are
horizontal-line or vertical-line sensitive. For details, see pages 113-121.
Registering the AF point
You can register a frequently-used AF point to the camera.
When you use the button set with the [83: Custom Controls] (p.495)
menu’s detailed settings screens for [Metering and AF start], [Switch
to registered AF point], [Direct AF point selection], [Selected AFpt
z Cent/Reg AFpt], or [Register/recall shooting func], you can
instantly switch from the current AF point to the registered AF point.
For details on registering the AF point, see page 500.
108
AF Area Selection ModesN
Single-point Spot AF (Manual selection)
For pinpoint focusing over a narrower area than
with Single-point AF. Select one AF point <O> to
focus.
Effective for pinpoint focusing or focusing on
overlapping subjects such as an animal in a cage.
Since Single-point Spot AF covers a very small
area, focusing may be difficult during handheld
shooting or for a moving subject.
Single-point AF (Manual selection)
Select one AF point <S> to be used for focusing.
AF point expansion (Manual selection
)
The manually-selected AF point <S> and adjacent AF points <w>
(above, below, on the left, and on the right) are used to focus. Effective
when it is difficult to track a moving subject with just one AF point.
With AI Servo AF, the initial manually-selected AF point <S> must
focus-track the subject first. However, it is superior to Zone AF in
focusing on the target subject.
With One-Shot AF, when focus is achieved with expanded AF points,
the expanded AF points <S> will also be displayed along with the
manually-selected AF point <S>.
109
AF Area Selection ModesN
AF point expansion (Manual selection, surrounding points)
The manually-selected AF point <S> and surrounding AF points <w>
are used to focus. Focusing is performed over a wider area than with
AF point expansion (manual selection ). Effective when it is difficult to
track a moving subject with just one AF point.
AI Servo AF and One-Shot AF work in the same way as with AF point
expansion (manual selection ) mode (p.109).
Zone AF (Manual selection of zone)
The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing. All the AF
points in the selected zone are used for the automatic AF point
selection. It is superior to Single-point AF or AF point expansion in
achieving focus, and it is effective for moving subjects.
However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on
a specific target may be more difficult.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
110
AF Area Selection ModesN
Large Zone AF (Manual selection of zone)
The AF area is divided into three focusing zones (left, center, and right)
for focusing. Since the focusing area is larger than with Zone AF and all
the AF points in the selected zone are used for the automatic AF point
selection, it is superior to single-point AF and AF point expansion in
tracking the subject, and it is effective for moving subjects.
However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on
a specific target may be more difficult.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
Automatic selection AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used to focus. The AF point(s)
achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
With One-Shot AF, pressing the shutter button
halfway will display the AF point(s) <S> that
achieved focus. If multiple AF points are
displayed, it means they all have achieved focus.
This mode tends to focus on the nearest subject.
With AI Servo AF, you can set the AI Servo AF’s
initial position with [f4: Initial AF pt,
AI
Servo AF] (p.146). As long as the Area AF frame
can track the subject during shooting, focusing
will continue.
111
AF Area Selection ModesN
 When AI Servo AF mode is set for Zone AF, Large Zone AF, or Automatic
selection AF, the active AF point <S> will keep switching to track the
subject. However, under certain shooting conditions (such as when the
subject is small), it may not be able to track the subject.
 With Single-point Spot AF, focusing with an EOS-dedicated, external
Speedlite’s AF-assist beam may be difficult.
 If a peripheral AF point or a wide-angle or telephoto lens is used,
achieving focus may be difficult with an EOS-dedicated, external
Speedlite’s AF-assist beam. In such a case, use the center AF point or
an AF point close to the center.
 In low temperatures, the AF point display may be difficult to see due to
the characteristics of AF point display (using liquid crystal).
 With [24: Orientation linked AF point], you can set the AF area
selection mode + AF point or only the AF point separately for the
horizontal and vertical orientations (p.144).
 With [24: Selectable AF point], you can change the number of
manually selectable AF points (p.142).
112
AF Sensor
The camera’s AF sensor has 61 AF points. The illustration below shows
the AF sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point. When using
lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or faster, high-precision AF is
possible at the viewfinder center.
Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of usable
AF points, AF point patterns, Area AF frame shape, etc. vary. For
details, see “Lenses and Usable AF Points” on page 115.
Diagram
Cross-type focusing:
Cross-type focusing:
f/4 horizontal + f/5.6 or f/8 vertical f/5.6 or f/8 vertical + f/5.6 or f/8 horizontal
f/5.6 or f/8 vertical focusing
Dual cross-type focusing:
f/2.8 right diagonal + f/2.8 left diagonal
f/5.6 or f/8 vertical + f/5.6 or f/8 horizontal
113
AF Sensor
These focusing sensors are geared to obtain
higher precision focusing for lenses with a
maximum aperture of f/2.8 or faster. A diagonal
cross pattern makes it easier to focus subjects
that may be difficult to focus. They cover the five
AF points vertically aligned at the center.
These focusing sensors are geared to obtain
high-precision focusing for lenses with a
maximum aperture of f/4 or faster. Since they
have a horizontal pattern, they can detect
vertical lines.
These focusing sensors are geared for lenses
with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster
(greater than f/5.6 but not exceeding f/8 with an
extender attached). Since they have a horizontal
pattern, they can detect vertical lines. They
cover the three columns of AF points at the
viewfinder center.
These focusing sensors are geared for lenses
with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster
(greater than f/5.6 but not exceeding f/8 with an
extender attached). Since they have a vertical
pattern, they can detect horizontal lines. They
cover all 61 AF points.
114
Lenses and Usable AF Points
 Although the camera has 61 AF points, the number of usable AF
points, focusing patterns, Area AF frame shape, etc. vary
depending on the lens. The lenses are thereby classified into
eleven groups from A to K.
 When using a lens in groups G to K, fewer AF points will be usable.
 Lens groups are listed on pages 122-126. Check which group your
lens belongs to.
 When you press the <S> button, the AF points indicated by the mark
will blink. (The / / AF points will stay lit.) Regarding lighting up or
blinking of the AF points, see page 108.
 Regarding new lenses released after the EOS 5D Mark IV (in the second
half of 2016), check the Canon website to see which group they belong
to.
 Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions.
Group A
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and the focusing
precision is higher than with other AF
points.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
115
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group B
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and the focusing
precision is higher than with other AF
points.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
Group C
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
Group D
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and the focusing
precision is higher than with other AF
points.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
116
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group E
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
Group F
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
If an extender is attached (extender compatible lenses only) and the
maximum aperture is f/8 (greater than f/5.6 but not exceeding f/8), AF
will be possible.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
 If the maximum aperture is slower than f/5.6 (greater than f/5.6 but not
exceeding f/8), focus may not be achieved with AF when shooting lowcontrast or low-light subjects.
 If the maximum aperture is slower than f/8 (exceeding f/8), AF is not
possible during viewfinder shooting.
117
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group G
Autofocusing with the 47 points shown in the diagram is possible. (Not
possible with all 61 AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are
selectable. During automatic AF point selection, the outer frame
marking the AF area (Area AF frame) will be different from 61-point
Automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
Group H
Autofocusing with the 33 points shown in the diagram is possible. (Not
possible with all 61 AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are
selectable. During automatic AF point selection, the outer frame
marking the AF area (Area AF frame) will be different from 61-point
Automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
118
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group I
Autofocusing with the 13 points shown in the diagram is possible. Only
the following AF area selection modes are selectable: Single-point Spot
AF, Single-point AF, AF point expansion (manual selection ), Zone AF
(Manual selection of zone), and 13-point automatic selection AF.
If an extender is attached (extender compatible lenses only) and the
maximum aperture is f/8 (greater than f/5.6 but not exceeding f/8), AF
will be possible.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines
(AF points in line extending left and
right through center AF point) or
vertical lines (top and bottom AF
points adjacent to the center AF
point).
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
 Even when AF point expansion (manual selection ) is set, AF point
expansion will be applied to the 13 AF points. If the manually selected AF
point does not have all four AF points on the top, bottom, left, or right, it
will expand only to those active AF points that are adjacent to it.
 If the maximum aperture is slower than f/5.6 (greater than f/5.6 but not
exceeding f/8), focus may not be achieved with AF when shooting lowcontrast or low-light subjects.
 If the maximum aperture is slower than f/8 (exceeding f/8), AF is not
possible during viewfinder shooting.
119
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group J
Autofocusing with the 9 points shown in the diagram is possible. Only
the following AF area selection modes are selectable: Single-point Spot
AF, Single-point AF, AF point expansion (manual selection ), and 9point automatic selection AF.
If an extender is attached (extender compatible lenses only) and the
maximum aperture is f/8 (greater than f/5.6 but not exceeding f/8), AF
will be possible.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines
(AF points in line extending left and
right through center AF point) or
vertical lines (top and bottom AF
points adjacent to the center AF
point).
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
 Even when AF point expansion (manual selection ) is set, AF point
expansion will be applied to the 9 AF points. If the manually selected AF
point does not have all four AF points on the top, bottom, left, or right, it
will expand only to those active AF points that are adjacent to it.
 If the maximum aperture is slower than f/5.6 (greater than f/5.6 but not
exceeding f/8), focus may not be achieved with AF when shooting lowcontrast or low-light subjects.
 If the maximum aperture is slower than f/8 (exceeding f/8), AF is not
possible during viewfinder shooting.
120
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group K
AF is possible with the center AF point and the adjacent AF points
above, below, on the left, and on the right. Only the following AF area
selection modes are selectable: Single-point Spot AF, Single-point AF,
and AF point expansion (manual selection ).
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines
(left and right AF points adjacent to
the center AF point) or vertical lines
(top and bottom AF points adjacent
to the center AF point). Not manually
selectable. It works only when AF
point expansion (manual
selection ) is selected.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
121
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Lens Group Designations
EF14mm f/2.8L USM
EF14mm f/2.8L II USM
EF15mm f/2.8 Fisheye
EF20mm f/2.8 USM
EF24mm f/1.4L USM
EF24mm f/1.4L II USM
EF24mm f/2.8
EF24mm f/2.8 IS USM
EF28mm f/1.8 USM
EF28mm f/2.8
EF28mm f/2.8 IS USM
EF35mm f/1.4L USM
EF35mm f/1.4L II USM
EF35mm f/2
EF35mm f/2 IS USM
EF40mm f/2.8 STM
EF50mm f/1.0L USM
EF50mm f/1.2L USM
EF50mm f/1.4 USM
EF50mm f/1.8
EF50mm f/1.8 II
EF50mm f/1.8 STM
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro
+ LIFE SIZE Converter
EF85mm f/1.2L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L II USM
EF85mm f/1.4L IS USM
EF85mm f/1.8 USM
EF100mm f/2 USM
EF100mm f/2.8 Macro
EF100mm f/2.8 Macro USM
EF100mm f/2.8L Macro IS USM
EF135mm f/2L USM
EF135mm f/2L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF135mm f/2L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF135mm f/2.8 (Softfocus)
122
B
B
B
B
A
A
B
B
A
D
B
A
A
A
A
D
A
A
A
A
A
A
C
F
A
A
A
A
A
C
F
C
A
A
C
A
EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF300mm f/4L USM
EF300mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF300mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II
H
H
A
A*
C*
A
A
C
A
C
F
A
C
F
A
C*
F*
A
C
F
A
C
F
C
F
J (f/8)
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF300mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x III
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x III
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF2x III
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x III
EF400mm f/5.6L USM
EF400mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II
I (f/8)
C
F
J (f/8)
I (f/8)
A
C*
F*
A
C*
F*
A
C
F
A
C
F
C
F
J (f/8)
F (f/8)
C
F
J (f/8)
F (f/8)
F
J (f/8)
EF400mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x III
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x III
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x III
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x III
EF600mm f/4L USM
EF600mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF600mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II
EF600mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x III
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x III
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x III
EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM
EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
F (f/8)
C
F
J (f/8)
F (f/8)
C
F
J (f/8)
F (f/8)
F
J (f/8)
F (f/8)*
C
F*
J (f/8)
F (f/8)*
C
F
J (f/8)
F (f/8)
C
F
J (f/8)
F (f/8)
G
J (f/8)
H
123
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF8-15mm f/4L Fisheye USM
EF11-24mm f/4L USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L II USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L III USM
EF16-35mm f/4L IS USM
EF17-35mm f/2.8L USM
EF17-40mm f/4L USM
EF20-35mm f/2.8L
EF20-35mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF22-55mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF24-70mm f/2.8L USM
EF24-70mm f/2.8L II USM
EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM
EF24-85mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM
EF24-105mm f/4L IS II USM
EF28-70mm f/2.8L USM
EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5
EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 II
EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 III USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 IV USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 V USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 III
EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 II USM
EF28-105mm f/4-5.6
EF28-105mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6
124
J (f/8)*
C
E
A
A
A
C
A
C
A
F
G
B
A
C
F
F
C
C
A
G
G
C
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
G
G
F
F
EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6 USM
EF28-300mm f/3.5-5.6L IS USM
EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5A
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 PZ
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 II
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 III
EF35-105mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF35-135mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-135mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF35-350mm f/3.5-5.6L USM
EF38-76mm f/4.5-5.6
EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5
EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5L
EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x III
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
F
F
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
F
K
K
F
F
G
F
F
F
F
F
A
C**
F**
A
C
F
A
C
F
C
F
J (f/8)
I (f/8)
C
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x III
EF70-210mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF70-210mm f/4
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS II USM
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6L IS USM
EF70-300mm f/4.5-5.6 DO IS USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM
EF80-200mm f/2.8L
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II
EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6
EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF100-200mm f/4.5A
EF100-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF100-300mm f/5.6
EF100-300mm f/5.6L
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM
F
J (f/8)
I (f/8)
F
C
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
A
F
G
G
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II
J (f/8)
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x III
F (f/8)
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
F
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II
J (f/8)
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x III
F (f/8)
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x
E
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x: Built-in Ext.1.4x used
F
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x: Built-in Ext.1.4x used
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II
J (f/8)
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x: Built-in Ext.1.4x used
+ Extender EF1.4x III
F (f/8)
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x + Extender EF2x I/II
J (f/8)
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x + Extender EF2x III
F (f/8)
TS-E17mm f/4L
C
TS-E24mm f/3.5L
C
TS-E24mm f/3.5L II
C
TS-E45mm f/2.8
A
TS-E50mm f/2.8L Macro
C
TS-E90mm f/2.8
A
TS-E90mm f/2.8L Macro
C
TS-E135mm f/4L Macro
C
125
Lenses and Usable AF Points
 If Extender EF2x (I/II/III) is attached to the EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
lens, AF is not possible.
 When using a lens and Extender EF1.4x III/EF2x III in a combination
marked with an asterisk (*) or a lens and extender in a combination
marked with two asterisks (**), precise focus may not be achieved with
AF. In such a case, refer to the Instruction Manual of the lens or extender
used.
If you use a TS-E lens, manual focusing will be required. The lens group
designation of TS-E lenses applies only when you do not use the tilt or shift
function.
126
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
You can easily fine-tune AI Servo AF to suit a particular subject or
shooting scene just by selecting an option from case 1 to case 6. This
feature is called the “AF Configuration Tool”.
1 Select the [21] tab.
a case.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select a case
icon, then press <0>.
 The selected case will be set. The
selected case is indicated in blue.
Case 1 to 6
As explained on pages 132 to 134, case 1 to 6 are six setting
combinations of “Tracking sensitivity”, “Acceleration/deceleration
tracking”, and “AF point auto switching”. Refer to the table below to
select the case applicable to the subject or shooting scene.
Case
Icon
Description
Applicable Subjects
Page
Case 1
Versatile multi purpose
setting
Case 2
Tennis players, butterfly
Continue to track subjects,
swimmers, freestyle skiers,
ignoring possible obstacles
etc.
128
Case 3
Instantly focus on subjects Starting line of a bicycle
race, alpine downhill skiers,
suddenly entering AF
etc.
points
129
Case 4
For subjects that
accelerate or decelerate
quickly
129
Case 5
For erratic subjects moving
Figure skaters, etc.
quickly in any direction
130
Case 6
For subjects that change
Rhythm gymnastics, etc.
speed and move erratically
131
For any moving subject.
Soccer, motor sports,
basketball, etc.
128
127
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 1: Versatile multi purpose setting
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
• AF pt auto switching: 0
Standard setting suited for any moving
subject. Works with various subjects and
scenes.
Select [Case 2] to [Case 6] for the
following: When an obstacle cuts across
the AF points or the subject tends to
stray from the AF points, when you want
to focus on a subject appearing
suddenly, when the speed of a moving
subject changes suddenly, or when the
subject dramatically moves horizontally
or vertically.
Case 2: Continue to track subjects, ignoring possible obstacles
Default settings
The camera will try to continue focusing
on the subject even if an obstacle cuts
across the AF points or if the subject
strays from the AF points. Effective when
there may be an obstacle blocking the
subject or when you do not want to focus
on the background.
• Tracking sensitivity: Locked on:
-1
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
• AF pt auto switching: 0
If an obstacle gets in the way or if the subject moves away from the AF
points for a prolonged period and the default setting is unable to track the
target subject, setting [Tracking sensitivity] to [-2] may give better results
(p.132).
128
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 3: Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering AF points
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: Responsive:
+1
• Accel./decel. tracking: +1
• AF pt auto switching: 0
Once an AF point starts tracking the
subject, this setting enables the camera
to consecutively focus on subjects at
different distances. If a new subject
appears in front of the target subject, the
camera will start focusing on the new
subject. Also effective when you want to
always focus on the closest subject.
If you want to quickly focus on a subject appearing suddenly, setting
[Tracking sensitivity] to [+2] may give better results (p.132).
Case 4: For subjects that accelerate or decelerate quickly
Geared for tracking moving subjects
whose speed can change dramatically
and suddenly.
Effective for subjects having sudden
movements, sudden acceleration,
sudden deceleration, or sudden stops.
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: +1
• AF pt auto switching: 0
If the subject is in motion, and prone to sudden, dramatic changes in speed,
setting [Accel./decel. tracking] to [+2] may give better results (p.133).
129
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 5: For erratic subjects moving quickly in any direction
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
• AF pt auto switching: +1
Even if the target subject moves
dramatically up, down, left, or right, the
AF point will switch automatically to
focus-track the subject. Effective for
shooting subjects that move dramatically
up, down, left, or right.
It is recommended to use this setting
with the following modes; AF point
expansion (manual selection ), AF
point expansion (manual selection,
surrounding points), Zone AF, Large
Zone AF, and Automatic selection AF.
With Single-point Spot AF or Single-point
AF mode, the tracking action will be the
same as with Case 1.
If the subject moves even more dramatically up, down, left, or right, setting
[AF pt auto switching] to [+2] may give better results (p.134).
130
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 6: For subjects that change speed and move erratically
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: +1
• AF pt auto switching: +1
Geared for tracking moving subjects
whose speed can change dramatically
and suddenly. Also, if the target subject
moves dramatically up, down, left or right
and it is difficult to focus, the AF point
switches automatically to track the
subject.
It is recommended to use this setting
with the following modes; AF point
expansion (manual selection ), AF
point expansion (manual selection,
surrounding points), Zone AF, Large
Zone AF, and Automatic selection AF.
With Single-point Spot AF or Single-point
AF mode, the tracking action will be the
same as with Case 4.
 If the subject is in motion, and prone to sudden, dramatic changes in
speed, setting [Accel./decel. tracking] to [+2] may give better results
(p.133).
 If the subject moves even more dramatically up, down, left, or right,
setting [AF pt auto switching] to [+2] may give better results (p.134).
131
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Parameters
 Tracking sensitivity
Sets the subject-tracking sensitivity
during AI Servo AF when an obstacle
cuts across the AF points or when the
subject strays from the AF point.
0
Default setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general.
Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1
The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an
obstacle cuts across the AF points or if the subject strays from the AF
points. The -2 setting makes the camera keep tracking the target
subject longer than the -1 setting.
However, if the camera focuses on a wrong subject, it may take
slightly longer to switch and focus on the target subject.
Responsive: +2 / Responsive: +1
The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at different
distances that are covered by the AF points. Also effective when you
want to always focus on the closest subject. The +2 setting is more
responsive than the +1 setting when focusing on the next subject.
However, the camera will be more prone to focus on an unintended
subject.
[Tracking sensitivity] is the feature named [AI Servo tracking sensitivity]
in the EOS-1D Mark III/IV, EOS-1Ds Mark III, and EOS 7D.
132
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
 Acceleration/deceleration tracking
This sets the tracking sensitivity for
moving subjects whose speed can
momentarily change dramatically by
starting or stopping suddenly, etc.
0
Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in
moving speed).
-2 / -1
Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in
moving speed). It is effective when 0 is set but focus is unstable due
to the subject’s slight movement or an obstacle in front of the subject.
+2 / +1
Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden
acceleration/deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving
subject’s speed suddenly changes dramatically, the camera
continues to focus on the target subject. For example, for an
approaching subject, the camera becomes less prone to focus
behind it to avoid subject blur. For a subject stopping suddenly, the
camera becomes less prone to focus in front of it. Setting +2 can
track dramatic changes in the moving subject’s speed better than
with +1.
However, since the camera will be sensitive to even slight
movements of the subject, focusing may become unstable for short
periods.
133
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
 AF point auto switching
This sets the switching sensitivity of the
AF points as they track the subject
moving dramatically up, down, left, or
right.
This setting takes effect when the AF
area selection mode is set to AF point
expansion (manual selection ), AF
point expansion (manual selection,
surrounding points), Zone AF, Large
Zone AF, or Automatic selection AF.
0
Standard setting for gradual AF point switching.
+2 / +1
Even if the target subject moves dramatically up, down, left, or right
and moves away from the AF point, the camera switches its focus to
neighboring AF points to continue focusing on the subject. The
camera switches to the AF point deemed most likely to focus on the
subject based on the subject’s continual movement, contrast, etc.
Setting +2 makes the camera more prone to switch the AF point than
with +1.
However, with a wide-angle lens having a wide depth of field or if the
subject is too small in the frame, the camera may focus with an
unintended AF point.
134
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Changing Cases’ Parameter Settings
You can manually adjust each case’s three parameters: 1. Tracking
sensitivity, 2. Acceleration/deceleration tracking, and 3. AF point auto
switching.
1
Select a case.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the icon
of the case you want to adjust.
the <c> button.
2 Press
 The selected parameter will be
highlighted with a purple frame.
the parameter to adjust.
3 Select
 Select the parameter to adjust, then
press <0>.
the adjustment.
4 Make
 Adjust the setting, then press <0>.
 The adjustment is saved.
 The default setting is indicated by the
light gray [C] mark.
 To return to the screen in step 1,
press the <c> button.
 In step 2, if you press the <c> button, then press the <L> button,
you can revert the 1, 2, and 3 parameter settings above for each case to
their defaults.
 You can also register the 1, 2, and 3 parameter settings to My Menu
(p.515). Doing so will change the selected case’s settings.
 When shooting with a case whose parameters you adjusted, select the
adjusted case, then take the picture.
135
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
With the [22] to [25] menu tabs, you
can set the AF functions to suit your
shooting style or subject.
22: AI Servo
AI Servo 1st image priority
AF2
You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing
for the first shot with AI Servo AF.
: Equal priority
Equal priority is given to focusing and
shutter release.
: Release priority
Pressing the shutter button takes the
picture immediately even if focus has
not been achieved. Useful when you
want to give priority to capturing the
decisive moment rather than achieving
focus.
: Focus priority
Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus is
achieved. Useful when you want to achieve focus before capturing
the image.
136
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AI Servo 2nd image priority
AF2
With AI Servo AF for continuous shooting, you can preset the AF
operation characteristics and shutter-release timing for the subsequent
shots after the first shot in continuous shooting.
0: Equal priority
Equal priority is given to focusing and
continuous shooting speed. In low
light or with low-contrast subjects,
continuous shooting speed may slow
down.
-2/-1: Shooting speed priority
Priority is given to the continuous shooting speed instead of achieving
focus. With -2, decrease of continuous shooting speed can be better
prevented than with -1.
+2/+1: Focus priority
Priority is given to achieving focus instead of the continuous shooting
speed. The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved. Although
focus can be achieved easier in low-light conditions with +2 than with
+1, continuous shooting speed may decrease.
Under shooting conditions that activate flicker reduction (p.215), even if
[Shooting speed priority]: [-1] or [-2] is set, the continuous shooting speed
may become slower or the shooting interval may become irregular.
If focus cannot be achieved in low-light conditions when [0: Equal priority]
is set, setting [Focus priority]: [+1] or [+2] may give better results.
137
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
23: One Shot
Lens electronic MF
AF3
With the following USM and STM lenses equipped with an electronic
manual focusing function, you can set whether to use electronic manual
focusing.
EF50mm f/1.0L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L II USM
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
EF600mm f/4L USM
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS II USM
EF40mm f/2.8 STM
EF50mm f/1.8 STM
EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
: Enable after One-Shot AF
After the AF operation, if you keep
pressing the shutter button halfway,
you can adjust the focus manually.
: Disable after One-Shot AF
After the AF operation, manual
focusing adjustment is disabled.
OFF: Disable in AF mode
When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>, manual focusing
is disabled.
138
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF-assist beam firing
AF3
Enables or disables the EOS-dedicated external Speedlite’s AF-assist
beam.
ON: Enable
The external Speedlite emits the AFassist beam when necessary.
OFF: Disable
The external Speedlite will not emit the
AF-assist beam. Useful when the AFassist beam may disturb others.
IR: IR AF assist beam only
When an external Speedlite is attached, only the infrared AF-assist
beam will be emitted. Useful when you do not want to fire a series of
small flashes as the AF-assist light (Intermittent flash method).
With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED
light will not automatically turn on as the AF-assist light.
If an external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set to
[Disable], this function’s setting will be overridden and the AF-assist beam
will not be emitted.
139
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
One-Shot AF release priority
AF3
You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing
for One-Shot AF.
: Focus priority
The picture will not be taken until
focus is achieved. Useful when you
want to achieve focus before capturing
the image.
: Release priority
Priority is given to the timing of shutter
release instead of achieving focus.
This gives priority to capturing the
image rather than achieving precise
focus.
Note that the picture will be taken
even if focus has not been
achieved.
140
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
24
Lens drive when AF impossible
AF4
If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, you can have the camera
keep searching for the precise focus or have it stop searching.
ON: Continue focus search
If focus cannot be achieved with
autofocus, the lens is driven to search
for the precise focus.
OFF: Stop focus search
If autofocus starts and the focus is far
off or if focus cannot be achieved, the
lens drive will not be performed. This
prevents the lens from becoming
grossly out of focus due to the focus
search drive.
When focus search drive is performed using a super telephoto lenses or
other lenses with wide focusing drive ranges, the lens can become grossly
out of focus and it may take more time to achieve focus next time. Setting
[Stop focus search] is recommended.
141
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Selectable AF point
AF4
You can change the number of manually selectable AF points. With
Zone AF, Large Zone AF, or Automatic selection AF set, AF will be
performed with the selected AF area selection mode (Zone AF, Large
Zone AF, or Automatic selection AF) regardless of the [Selectable AF
point] setting.
: All points
All AF points will be manually
selectable.
: Only cross-type AF points
Only the cross-type AF points will be
manually selectable. The number of
selectable AF points will vary
depending on the lens used.
: 15 points
Fifteen major AF points will be
manually selectable.
: 9 points
Nine major AF points will be manually
selectable.
With a lens in groups G to K (p.118-121), the number of manually selectable
AF points will be lower.
 Even with settings other than [All points], AF point expansion (manual
selection ), AF point expansion (manual selection, surrounding points),
Zone AF, and Large Zone AF are still possible.
 When you press the <S> button, the AF points that are not manually
selectable will not be displayed in the viewfinder.
142
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Select AF area selection mode
AF4
You can limit the selectable AF area selection modes to suit your
shooting preferences. Select the desired selection mode and press
<0> to add a checkmark [X]. Then select [OK] to register the setting.
The AF area selection modes are explained on pages 109-111.
: Manual select.:Spot AF
: Manual selection:1 pt AF
: Expand AF area:
: Expand AF area:Surround
: Manual select.:Zone AF
: Manual select.:Large Zone AF
: Auto selection AF
 The [X] mark cannot be removed from [Manual selection:1 pt AF].
 If the attached lens belongs to group I, J or K, you cannot use certain AF
area selection modes even if you add a [X] in [Select AF area selec.
mode] (p.119 - 121).
143
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF area selection method
AF4
You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode.
:S9 M-Fn button
After you press the <S> button,
pressing the <p> (AF area selection)
button or <B> button changes the
AF area selection mode.
:S9 Main Dial
After you press the <S> button,
pressing the <p> (AF area selection)
button or turning the <6> dial
changes the AF area selection mode.
When [S9Main Dial] is set, use the <9> to move the AF point
horizontally.
Orientation linked AF point
AF4
You can set the AF point or the AF area selection mode + AF point
separately for vertical shooting and horizontal shooting.
: Same for both vert/horiz
The same AF area selection mode
and manually-selected AF point (or
zone) are used for both vertical
shooting and horizontal shooting.
144
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
: Separate AF pts: Area+pt
The AF area selection mode and AF point (or zone) can be set
separately for each camera orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with
the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical with the camera grip at the
bottom).
When you manually select the AF area selection mode and AF point
(or zone) for each of the three camera orientations, they will be
registered for the respective orientation. Whenever you change the
camera orientation during shooting, the camera will switch to the AF
area selection mode and manually-selected AF point (or zone) set for
that orientation.
: Separate AF pts: Pt only
The AF point can be set separately for each camera orientation (1.
Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical with
the camera grip at the bottom). While using the same AF area
selection mode, the AF point will switch automatically for the
respective camera orientation.
When you manually select the AF point for each of the three camera
orientations, it will be registered for the respective orientation. During
shooting, the AF point will switch to the manually-selected one
depending on the camera orientation. Even if you change the AF
area selection mode to Manual select.:Spot AF, Manual selection:1 pt
AF, Expand AF area: , or Expand AF area: Surround, the AF point
set for the respective orientation will be retained.
If you change the AF area selection mode to Zone AF or Large Zone
AF, the zone will switch to the manually-selected one for the
respective camera orientation.
 If you clear the camera settings to their defaults (p.77), the setting will be
[Same for both vert/horiz]. Also, your settings for the three camera
orientations (1, 2 and 3) will be cleared and all three will revert to Singlepoint AF with the center AF point selected.
 If you set this and later attach a lens from a different AF group (p.115121, particularly group I, J, or K), the setting may be cleared.
145
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Initial AF Point,
AI Servo AF
AF4
You can set the AI Servo AF’s starting AF point for when the AF area
selection mode is set to Auto selection AF.
: Initial
AF pt selected
AI Servo AF will start with the
manually-selected AF point when the
AF operation is set to AI Servo AF and
the AF area selection mode is set to
Auto selection AF.
: Manual
AF pt
If you switch from Manual select.:Spot AF, Manual selection:1 pt AF,
Expand AF area: , or Expand AF area:Surround to Auto selection
AF, AI Servo AF will start with the AF point that was manually
selected before the switch. Useful if you want AI Servo AF to start
with the AF point that was selected before the AF area selection
mode was switched to Auto selection AF.
After setting the AF area selection mode to Auto selection AF with the
[83: Custom Controls] menu’s [Metering and AF start] (p.500),
[Switch to registered AF func.] (p.502) or [Register/recall
shooting func] (p.508), during shooting with Manual select: Spot AF,
Manual selection: 1 pt AF, Expand AF area: , or Expand AF area:
Surround, you can press the assigned button to start shooting with
Auto selection AF set for the AI Servo AF using the last used AF point
as the initial AF point.
AUTO: Auto
The AF point which AI Servo AF starts with is set automatically to suit
the shooting conditions.
When [Manual
AF pt] is set, AI Servo AF will start with the zone
that corresponds to the manually-selected AF point even if you switch AF
area selection mode to Zone AF or Large Zone AF.
146
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Auto AF point selection: EOS iTR AF
AF4
EOS iTR* AF performs autofocus by recognizing faces and subject
colors. EOS iTR AF works when the AF area selection mode is set to
Zone AF, Large Zone AF, or Automatic selection AF.
* intelligent Tracking and Recognition: a function that identifies the subject with
the metering sensor in order for the AF points to track it.
u: EOS iTR AF (Face priority)
The AF point is automatically selected
based not only on AF information, but
also the human face and the subject’s
color information.
With AI Servo AF, the subject is tracked while giving higher priority to
using face information than with the [EOS iTR AF] setting. This makes it
easier to keep track of the subject than when only AF information is
available.
In One-Shot AF mode, EOS iTR AF makes focusing on human faces
easier, so you can shoot while concentrating on the composition.
ON: EOS iTR AF
The AF point is automatically selected based not only on AF
information, but also the human face and the subject’s color
information. With AI Servo AF, the subject is tracked giving weight to the
information not only on the face information but also on where (AF
point) the focus was first achieved. The One-Shot AF operation will be
the same as with the [EOS iTR AF (Face priority)] setting.
OFF: Disable
AF points are automatically selected based only on AF information.
(The AF does not use the face information or the subject’s color
information.)
147
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
 If [EOS iTR AF (Face priority)] or [EOS iTR AF] is set, the camera may
take longer to focus than when [Disable] is set.
 Even if you set [EOS iTR AF (Face priority)] or [EOS iTR AF], the
expected effect may not be obtained depending on the shooting
conditions and subject.
 Under light so low that the EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite emits the
AF-assist beam automatically, AF points are selected automatically
based only on AF information.
 Face detection may not work if the face is small or under low-light
conditions.
25
AF point selection movement
AF5
You can set either to stop the selection at the outer edge or it can cycle
around to the opposite side in AF point selection.
: Stops at AF area edges
Useful if you often use an AF point
along the edge.
: Continuous
Instead of stopping at the outer edge,
the selection of AF point continues to
the opposite side.
With [24: Initial AF pt,
AI Servo AF] set to [Initial
AF pt
selected], the above setting will also work when you are selecting the initial
AF point for AI Servo AF.
148
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF point display during focus
AF5
You can set whether to display the AF point(s) when AF starts, during
AF, when focus is achieved, and when the metering timer is active after
focus is achieved.
: Selected (constant)
: All (constant)
: Selected (pre-AF,focused)
: Selected AF pt (focused)
OFF: Disable display
k: Displayed, l: Not displayed
With AF point
selected
Before AF starts
(Camera
shooting-ready)
At AF start
Selected (constant)
k
k
k
All (constant)
k
k
k
Selected (pre-AF,focused)
k
k
k
Selected AF pt (focused)
k
l
k
Disable display
k
l
l
During AF
Focus
achieved
Metering active
after achieving
focus
Selected (constant)
k
k
k
All (constant)
k
k
k
Selected (pre-AF,focused)
l
k
k
Selected AF pt (focused)
l
k
l
Disable display
l
l
l
AF point display
during focus
AF point display
during focus
149
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
VF display illumination
AF5
You can set whether the AF points in the viewfinder are to light up in red
when focus is achieved.
AUTO: Auto
The AF points achieving focus in low
light or with a dark subject will
automatically light up in red.
ON: Enable
The AF points light up in red
regardless of the ambient light level.
OFF: Disable
The AF points do not light up in red.
With [Auto] or [Enable] set, by pressing the [Q] button, you can set
whether the AF point is to light up in red during AI Servo AF.
OFF: Non illuminated
The AF points will not light up during
AI Servo AF.
ON: Illuminated
The AF points used for focusing light
up in red during AI Servo AF. The AF
points also light up during continuous
shooting.
This function will not work if [VF
display illumination] is set to
[Disable].
 When you press the <S> button, the AF points will light up in red
regardless of this setting.
 The electronic level and grid in the viewfinder and the information set
with [Show/hide in viewfinder] (p.84) will also light up in red.
150
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF status in viewfinder
AF5
You can display the AF status icon indicating AF operation either inside
or outside of the viewfinder's field of view.
: Show in field of view
The AF status icon <i> is displayed in
the lower right of the viewfinder’s field of
view.
: Show outside view
The <e> icon is displayed below the
focus indicator <o> outside the
viewfinder’s field of view.
See page 103 for the AF operation display.
AF Microadjustment
AF5
You can make fine adjustments for the AF’s point of focus. For details,
see “Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus” on the next page.
151
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Fine adjustment of the AF’s point of focus is possible for viewfinder
shooting. This is called “AF Microadjustment”. Before making the
adjustment, read “General Cautions for AF Microadjustment” and
“Notes for AF Microadjustment” on page 157.
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this adjustment
only if necessary. Note that performing this adjustment may prevent
accurate focusing from being achieved.
Adjust All by Same Amount
Set the adjustment amount manually by repeatedly making
adjustments, shooting, and checking the results until the desired result
is achieved. During AF, regardless of the lens used, the point of focus
will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.
1
Select [AF Microadjustment].
 Under the [25] tab, select [AF
Microadjustment], then press <0>.
2 Select [All by same amount].
the <B> button.
3 Press
 The [All by same amount] screen
will appear.
152
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
the adjustment.
4 Make
 Set the adjustment amount. The
adjustable range is ±20 steps.
 Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the
point of focus in front of the standard
point of focus.
 Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the
point of focus to behind the standard
point of focus.
 After making the adjustment, press
<0>.
 Select [All by same amount], then
press <0>.
the result of the
5 Check
adjustment.
 Take a picture and play back the
image (p.394) to check the
adjustment result.
 If the shooting result comes out with
focus in front of the targeted point,
adjust toward the “+: ” side. If it
comes out with focus behind the
targeted point, adjust toward the
“-: ” side.
 If necessary, repeat the adjustment.
If [All by same amount] is selected, separate AF adjustment will not be
possible for the wide-angle and telephoto ends of zoom lenses.
153
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Adjust by Lens
You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment
in the camera. You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses.
When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment is registered, the
point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.
Set the adjustment amount manually by repeatedly making
adjustments, shooting, and checking the results until the desired result
is achieved. If you use a zoom lens, make the adjustment for the wideangle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.
1
Select [Adjust by lens].
the <B> button.
2 Press
 The [Adjust by lens] screen will
appear.
and change the lens
3 Check
information.
Registered number
154
Displaying the Lens Information
 Press the <Q> button.
 The screen will show the lens name
and a 10-digit serial number. When
the serial number is displayed, select
[OK] and go to step 4.
 If the lens’s serial number cannot be
confirmed, “0000000000” will be
displayed. In this case, enter the
number by following the instructions
on the next page.
 Regarding the asterisk “ * ” displayed
in front of some lens serial numbers,
see the next page.
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Entering the Serial Number
 Select the digit to be entered, then
press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Enter the number, then press <0>.
 After entering all the digits, select
[OK].
Lens Serial Number
 In step 3, if “ * ” appears in front of the 10-digit lens serial
number, you can register only one unit of the same lens model.
Even if you enter the serial number, “ * ” will remain displayed.
 The serial number on the lens may differ from the serial number
displayed on the screen in step 3. This is not a malfunction.
 If the lens serial number includes letters, enter only the numbers.
 If the lens serial number is eleven digits or longer, enter only the last
ten digits.
 The location of the serial number varies depending on the lens.
 Certain lenses may not have a serial number inscribed. To register a
lens that has no serial number inscribed, enter any serial number.
 If [Adjust by lens] is selected and an extender is used, the adjustment
will be registered for the lens and extender combination.
 If 40 lenses have already been registered, a message will appear. After
you select a lens whose registration is to be erased (overwritten), you
can register another lens.
155
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Single focal length lens
the adjustment.
4 Make
 For a zoom lens, select the wide-

Zoom lens





angle (W) or telephoto (T) end.
Pressing <0> will turn off the purple
frame and make the adjustment
possible.
Set the adjustment amount, then
press <0>. The adjustable range is
±20 steps.
Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the
point of focus in front of the standard
point of focus.
Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the
point of focus to behind the standard
point of focus.
For a zoom lens, repeat this
procedure and adjust it for the wideangle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.
After completing the adjustment,
press the <M> button to return to
the screen in step 1.
Select [Adjust by lens], then press
<0>.
the result of the
5 Check
adjustment.
 Take a picture and play back the
image (p.394) to check the
adjustment result.
 If the shooting result comes out with focus in front of the targeted
point, adjust toward the “+: ” side. If it comes out with focus behind
the targeted point, adjust toward the “-: ” side.
 If necessary, repeat the adjustment.
156
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
When shooting with the intermediate range (focal length) of a zoom lens, the
AF’s point of focus is corrected automatically relative to the adjustments
made for the wide-angle and telephoto ends. Even if only the wide-angle or
telephoto end is adjusted, a correction will be made automatically for the
intermediate range.
Clearing All AF Microadjustments
When [ Clear all] appears at the bottom of the screen, pressing the
<L> button will clear all the adjustments made for [All by same
amount] and [Adjust by lens].
General Cautions for AF Microadjustment
 The AF’s point of focus will vary slightly depending on the subject
conditions, brightness, zoom position, and other shooting conditions.
Therefore, even if you perform AF Microadjustment, focus may still not
be achieved at the suitable position.
 The adjustment amount of one step varies depending on the maximum
aperture of the lens. Keep adjusting, shooting, and checking the focus
repeatedly to adjust the AF’s point of focus.
 The adjustment will not be applied to AF in Live View shooting or movie
shooting.
 The adjustments will be retained even if you clear all the camera settings
(p.77). However, the setting itself will be [Disable].
Notes for AF Microadjustment
 It is best to make the adjustment at the actual location where you will
shoot. This will make the adjustment more precise.
 Using a tripod when making the adjustment is recommended.
 For making adjustments, shooting at the 73 image-recording quality is
recommended.
157
When Autofocus Fails
Autofocus may fail to achieve focus (focus indicator <o> in the
viewfinder blinks) with special subjects such as the following:
Subjects Difficult to Focus
 Subjects with very low contrast
(Example: Blue skies, solid-color flat surfaces, etc.)
 Subjects in very low light
 Strongly backlit or reflective subjects
(Example: Cars with highly reflective bodies, etc.)
 Near and distant subjects framed close to an AF point
(Example: Animals in cages, etc.)
 Subjects such as dots of light framed close to an AF point
(Example: Night scenes, etc.)
 Subjects with repetitive patterns
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)
 Subjects with finer patterns than an AF point
(Example: Faces or flowers as small as or smaller than an AF point,
etc.)
In such cases, focus in either of the following two ways.
(1) With One-Shot AF, focus on an object at the same distance as the
subject and lock the focus, then recompose the shot (p.101).
(2) Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually
(p.159).
 Depending on the subject, focus may be achieved by slightly
recomposing the shot and performing AF operation again.
 For conditions that make focusing difficult with AF during Live View
shooting or movie shooting, see page 324.
158
When Autofocus Fails
MF: Manual Focus
1
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <MF>.
 <4 L> will be displayed on the
LCD panel.
Focusing ring
on the subject.
2 Focus
 Focus by turning the lens focusing
ring until the subject looks sharp in
the viewfinder.
 If you manually focus while pressing the shutter button halfway, the focus
indicator <o> will light up when focus is achieved.
 With Automatic selection AF, when the center AF point achieves focus,
the focus indicator <o> will light up.
159
i Selecting the Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the
drive mode suiting the scene or subject.
1
Press the <o> button (9).
the drive mode.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <5> dial.
u : Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will be taken.
o(
160
): High-speed continuous shooting
While you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot
continuously at approx. 7.0 shots/sec. maximum.
However, the maximum continuous shooting speed may become
slower under the following conditions:
With Anti-flicker shooting:
The continuous shooting speed will be approx. 6.6 shots/sec.
maximum.
With Dual Pixel Raw shooting:
The continuous shooting speed will be approx. 5.0 shots/sec.
maximum.
With Live View shooting:
When [AF operation] is set to [One-Shot AF] and [Silent LV
shooting] is set to [Disable], the continuous shooting speed will
be approx. 7.0 shots/sec. maximum. If [Mode 1] is set, the
maximum continuous shooting speed will slightly decrease.
Note that when [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], the
continuous shooting speed of approx. 4.3 shots/sec.
maximum will be given priority.
i Selecting the Drive Mode
With the Digital Lens Optimizer set:
When [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Enable], the
continuous shooting speed will greatly decrease.
The maximum continuous shooting speed will vary depending on
the shooting conditions. For details, see page 162.
i : Low-speed continuous shooting
While you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot
continuously at approx. 3.0 shots/sec. maximum.
During Live View shooting, if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF],
priority will be given to focus tracking on the subject (Subjecttracking priority) with a maximum continuous shooting speed of
approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
B : Silent single shooting
You can perform single shooting while suppressing the mechanical
sound during viewfinder shooting. This cannot be set for Live View
shooting.
M : Silent continuous shooting
You can shoot continuously at approx. 3.0 shots/sec. maximum
while suppressing the mechanical sound during viewfinder
shooting (as compared to the <i> setting). This cannot be set for
Live View shooting.
Q : 10-sec. self-timer/remote control
k: 2-sec. self-timer/remote control
For self-timer shooting, see page 163. For remote control shooting,
see page 279.
161
i Selecting the Drive Mode
 The approx. 7.0 shots/sec. maximum high-speed continuous shooting
speed <o> (p.160) is achieved under the following conditions: Fully
charged battery pack, 1/500 sec. or faster shutter speed, maximum
aperture (varies depending on the lens)*, at room temperature (23°C /
73°F), flicker reduction disabled, Dual Pixel RAW shooting disabled, Live
View shooting with One Shot AF and Silent LV shooting both disabled,
and Digital Lens Optimizer disabled.
* With the AF mode set to One-Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off when
using the following lenses: EF300mm f/4L IS USM, EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
USM, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM.
 The continuous shooting speed for <o> high-speed continuous
shooting may become slower depending on the power source type,
battery level, temperature, flicker reduction, Dual Pixel RAW shooting,
Digital Lens Optimizer, shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions,
brightness, AF operation, lens, flash use, shooting function settings, etc.
 When using the external flash, the maximum continuous shooting speed
will become slower.
 With [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] set to [Enable] (p.215), shooting under
flickering light will decrease the maximum continuous shooting speed.
Also, the continuous shooting interval may become irregular and the time
lag until the shot is taken may become longer.
 If [z1: Dual Pixel RAW] is set to [Enable] (p.175) and [z1: Imagerecording quality] is set to [1] or [1+JPEG] (p.169), the maximum
continuous shooting speed will decrease.
 For Live View shooting, if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF] (p.314),
the maximum continuous shooting speed will decrease.
 If [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Enable] (p.210), the continuous
shooting speed will greatly decrease.
 With AI Servo AF, the maximum continuous shooting speed may become
slower depending on the subject conditions and the lens used.
 If the battery temperature is low due to a low ambient temperature or if
the battery level is low, the maximum continuous shooting speed may
decrease to approx. 6.0 shots/sec. with the LP-E6N, or to approx. 5.0
shots/sec. with the LP-E6.
 If <B> or <M> is set, the time lag from when you press the shutter
button completely until the shutter is released will be longer than normal.
 When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the
continuous shooting speed may drop off because shooting will be
temporarily disabled (p.174).
162
j Using the Self-timer
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a
commemorative photograph.
1 Press the <o> button (9).
the self-timer.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <5> dial.
Q : Shoot in approx. 10 sec.
k : Shoot in approx. 2 sec.
the picture.
3 Take
 Look through the viewfinder, focus on
the subject, then press the shutter
button completely.
 You can check the self-timer
operation with the self-timer lamp,
beeper, and countdown display (in
seconds) on the LCD panel.
 Approx. 2 sec. before the picture is
taken, the self-timer lamp will light up
and the beeper will sound faster.
If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button,
attach the eyepiece cover (p.278). If stray light enters the viewfinder when
the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
 The <k> enables you to shoot while not touching the camera
mounted on a tripod. This prevents camera vibration blur when you shoot
still lifes or long exposures.
 After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.394) to check
focus and exposure is recommended.
 When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (p.97) on an
object at the same distance as where you will stand.
 To cancel the self-timer, press the <o> button.
163
164
4
Image Settings
This chapter explains image-related function settings:
Image-recording quality, Dual Pixel RAW function, ISO
speed, Picture Style, white balance, Auto Lighting
Optimizer, noise reduction, highlight tone priority, lens
aberration correction, anti-flicker shooting, and other
functions.
 A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in the following modes: <d>
<s> <f> <a> <F>.
165
3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback
If either a CF card or SD card is already inserted in the camera, you
can start recording captured images. When only one card is
inserted, you do not have to follow the procedures described on
pages 166-168.
If you insert both cards, you can select the recording method and select
which card to use for recording and playing back images.
[f] indicates the CF card, and [g] the SD card.
Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted
1
Select [Record func+card/folder
sel.].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Record
func+card/folder sel.], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Record func.].
the recording method.
3 Select
 Select the recording method, then
press <0>.
166
3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback
 Standard
Images will be recorded to the card selected with [Record/play].
 Auto switch card
Same as with the [Standard] setting, but if the card becomes full,
the camera will automatically switch to the other card to record
images. When the card is automatically switched, a new folder will
be created.
 Rec. separately
You can set the image-recording quality for each card (p.169). Each
image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards at the imagerecording quality you set. You can freely set the image-recording
quality, such as to 73 and 1, or c and 41, etc.
 Rec. to multiple
Each image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards simultaneously
at the same image-recording quality. You can also select
RAW+JPEG.
 If [Rec. separately] is set and different recording qualities are set for the
CF card and SD card, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
decrease (p.171).
 Movies cannot be recorded simultaneously to the CF card and SD card.
Movies will be recorded to the card set for [Playback].
[Rec. separately] and [Rec. to multiple]
 The same file number is used for recording to both the CF card and SD
card.
 The LCD panel will display the number of possible shots of the card
having the lower number.
 If one of the cards becomes full, [Card* full] will be displayed and
shooting will be disabled. If this happens, either replace the card or set
[Record func.] to [Standard], and select the card with remaining
capacity to continue shooting.
 Regarding the [51: Record func+card/folder sel.] menu’s [Folder],
see page 218.
167
3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback
Selecting the CF or SD Card for Recording and Playback
If [Record func.] is set to [Standard] or [Auto switch card], select the
card for recording and playing back images.
If [Record func.] is set to [Rec. separately] or [Rec. to multiple],
select the card for playing back images.
Standard / Auto switch card
Select [Record/play].
 Select [Record/play], then press
<0>.
f : Record images to and play back
images from the CF card.
g : Record images to and play back
images from the SD card.
 Select the card, then press <0>.
Rec. separately / Rec. to multiple
Select [Playback].
 Select [Playback], then press <0>.
f : Play back the CF card’s images.
g : Play back the SD card’s
images.
 Select the card, then press <0>.
168
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
You can select the pixel count and the image quality. There are eight
JPEG image-recording quality settings: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a,
8a, b, c. There are three RAW image quality settings: 1, 41,
61 (p.173).
1
Standard / Auto switch
card / Rec. to multiple
Select [Image quality].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
quality], then press <0>.
the image-recording
2 Select
quality.
 To select a RAW quality, turn the
<6> dial. To select a JPEG quality,
turn the <5> dial.
 On the upper right, the “**M
(megapixels) ****x****” number
indicates the recorded pixel count,
and [***] is the number of possible
shots (displayed up to 9999).
 Press <0> to set it.
Rec. separately
 Under [51: Record func+card/
folder sel.], if [Record func.] is set to
[Rec. separately], select CF card
[f] or SD card [g], then press
<0>.
 Select the desired image-recording
quality, then press <0>.
169
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Image-recording Quality Setting Examples
73 only
1 only
1+73
61+74
The image size [****x****] and number of possible shots [****] displayed on
the Image-recording quality setting screen always apply to the [3:2] setting
regardless of the [z5: Aspect ratio] setting (p.310).
If [-] is set for both the RAW image and JPEG image, 73 will be set.
170
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Guide to Image-recording Quality Settings
Image
Pixels
Quality Recorded
Print
Size
File
Possible
Size
Shots
(MB)
(Approx.)
Maximum Burst
CF Card
SD Card
High
High
Standard
Standard
Speed
Speed
JPEG
73
83
74
30 M
A2
13 M
A3
7.5 M
A4
b
2.5 M
9x13 cm
c
0.3 M
–
84
7a
8a
8.8
820
110
Full
130
Full
4.5
1590
Full
Full
Full
Full
4.7
1530
Full
Full
Full
Full
2.4
2970
Full
Full
Full
Full
3.0
2350
Full
Full
Full
Full
1.5
4560
Full
Full
Full
Full
1.3
5420
Full
Full
Full
Full
0.3
20330
Full
Full
Full
Full
36.8
170
17
21
17
19
A2
66.9
90
7
7
7
7
27.7
220
23
32
23
26
A4
18.9
310
35
74
36
48
RAW
1
30 M
1:
U
30 M
41
17 M
61
7.5 M
RAW+JPEG
1
73
30 M
30 M
A2
A2
36.8
8.8
140
13
16
13
14
41
73
17 M
30 M
A2
A2
27.7
8.8
170
13
17
14
15
61
73
7.5 M
30 M
A4
A2
18.9
8.8
220
15
22
15
18
 b is suitable for playing the images on a digital photo frame, etc.
 c is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a website.
 b and c will be in 7 (Fine) quality.
171
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
 The number of possible shots is based on Canon’s testing standards and an 8
GB card.
 The maximum burst is with Canon’s standard testing CF card (Standard: 8 GB,
High speed: UDMA Mode 7, 64 GB) and SD card (Standard: 8 GB, High speed:
UHS-I, 16 GB), and based on the following conditions set by the Canon’s
testing standard: <o> High-speed continuous shooting, 3:2 aspect ratio,
ISO 100, Dual Pixel RAW shooting disabled, Standard Picture Style, IPTC
information not appended.
 The file size, number of possible shots, and maximum burst will vary
depending on the subject, card brand, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom
Functions, and other settings.
 “Full” indicates that shooting is possible until the card becomes full with the
listed conditions.
 Even if you use a UDMA CF card or high-speed SD card, the maximum
burst indicator remains the same. However, the maximum burst shown in
the table on the preceding page applies to continuous shooting.
 If you select both RAW and JPEG, the same image will be recorded
simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the imagerecording qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded with
the same file numbers (file extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for
RAW).
 The image-recording quality icons indicate as follows: 1 (RAW),
41 (Medium RAW), 61 (Small RAW), JPEG (JPEG), 7 (Fine),
8 (Normal), 3 (Large), 4 (Medium), and 6 (Small).
172
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
RAW Images
A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to
digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the
quality as follows: 1, 41, or 61.
A 1 image can be processed with [31: RAW image processing]
(p.446) and saved as a JPEG image. (41 and 61 images cannot
be processed with the camera.) As the RAW image itself does not
change, you can process the RAW image to create any number of
JPEG images with various processing conditions.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.596) to
process RAW images. You can make various adjustments to images
depending upon how they will be used and can generate JPEG, TIFF, or
other types of images reflecting the effects of those adjustments.
RAW Image Processing Software
 To display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional
(DPP, EOS software) is recommended.
 Previous versions of DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken with this
camera. If a previous version of DPP Ver.4.x is installed on your computer,
update it with the EOS Solution Disk (p.597). (The previous version will be
overwritten.) Note that DPP Ver.3.x or earlier cannot process RAW images
taken with this camera.
 Commercially-available software may not be able to display RAW
images taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the
software manufacturer.
173
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
One-touch Image Quality SettingN
With Custom Controls, you can assign the image-recording quality to
the <B> button or depth-of-field preview button so you can switch
to it momentarily. If you assign [One-touch image quality setting] or
[One-touch image quality (hold)] to the <B> button or depth-offield preview button, you can quickly switch to the desired imagerecording quality and shoot.
For details, see “Custom Controls” (p.495).
Under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.], if [Record func.] is set to [Rec.
separately], you cannot switch to the One-touch image quality setting.
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting
The approximate maximum burst is
displayed in the viewfinder and on the
bottom right of the Quick Control screen
and Custom Quick Control screen.
If the maximum burst for continuous
shooting is 99 or higher, “99” will be
displayed.
The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the
camera. Make sure that a card is inserted before taking a picture.
If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99
or more shots continuously. If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or lower
and the internal buffer memory becomes full, “buSY” will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the LCD panel. Shooting will then be disabled temporarily.
If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase. After all
the captured images are written to the card, you can resume continuous
shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst listed in the table on page 171.
174
Setting the Dual Pixel RAW Function
If you shoot 1 images (other than 41 or 61) when Dual Pixel
RAW function is set, they will be recorded as “special 1 images (Dual
Pixel RAW images)” with Dual Pixel data from the image sensor
appended. This is called Dual Pixel RAW shooting.
When you perform processing of the Dual Pixel RAW image with the
Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.596), you can make use of
the Dual Pixel data recorded with the Dual Pixel RAW image for
microadjustment of the position of maximum sharpness and resolution
using the depth information contained within the file, repositioning the
viewpoint or foreground bokeh for a more pleasing result, and reducing
the appearance of ghosting in images.
Since the effect will differ depending on the shooting conditions,
refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual for the
features of Duel Pixel RAW function and Dual Pixel RAW image
processing before performing Dual Pixel Raw shooting.
1
Select [Dual Pixel RAW].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Dual
Pixel RAW], then press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Press the <B> button and read
the Help screen (p.91) before
proceeding.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the image-recording quality to
3 Set
1.
 See page 169, then set the imagerecording quality to 1 or 1+JPEG.
 <U> will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
the picture.
4 Take
 A RAW image appended with Dual
Pixel data (Dual Pixel RAW image)
will be recorded.
175
Setting the Dual Pixel RAW Function
 Even if [z1: Dual Pixel RAW] is set to [Enable], you cannot record
41 or 61 images appended with the Dual Pixel data (only possible
with 1 images).
 If [51: Record func+card/folder sel.] is set to [Rec. separately] and
the image-recording quality is set to 1 for one card and 41 or
61 for the other, Dual Pixel RAW shooting cannot be performed.
 When [z1: Dual Pixel RAW] is set to [Enable], you cannot use multiple
exposures, HDR shooting, the One-touch image quality setting or Digital
Lens Optimizer. Also, the startup time will be longer when the power
switch is set to <1> or to resume from the Auto power off state.
 With Dual Pixel RAW shooting, the number of possible shots will decrease.
 Shooting in Dual Pixel RAW using the viewfinder will decrease the
continuous shooting speed. The maximum burst for continuous shooting
will also decrease.
 If [z1: Dual Pixel RAW] is set to [Enable] for Live View shooting, the
<o> and <i> drive modes cannot be selected. If <o> or <i> is
set, the <u> drive mode will apply for shooting.
 In viewfinder shooting with [z1: Dual Pixel RAW] set to [Enable], if you
switch to Live View shooting while <o> or <i> drive mode is set, the
<u> drive mode will be set automatically.
 When you shoot RAW or RAW+JPEG images with [z1: Dual Pixel
RAW] set to [Enable], noise may be more noticeable compared with that
in normal shooting.
Adjustment Amount and Correction Effect of the Dual Pixel RAW
Function
 The adjustment amount and correction effect will increase with a larger
aperture.
 The sufficient adjustment amount and correction effect may not be
obtained depending on the lens and scene.
 The adjustment amount and correction effect will vary depending on the
camera orientation (vertical or horizontal).
 The sufficient adjustment amount and correction effect may not be
obtained depending on the shooting conditions.
<U> can be displayed in the viewfinder for Dual Pixel RAW shooting
(p.84).
176
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the
ambient light level. In the <A> mode, the ISO speed is automatically
set (p.179).
Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see pages 337 and
341.
1
Press the <m> button (9).
the ISO speed.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
 ISO speed can be set within ISO 100
- ISO 32000 in 1/3-stop increments.
 “A” indicates ISO Auto. The ISO
speed will be set automatically
(p.179).
ISO Speed Guide
ISO Speed
Shooting Situation
(No flash)
L (50), ISO 100 - ISO 400
Sunny outdoors
ISO 400 - ISO 1600
Overcast skies or
evening time
ISO 1600 - ISO 32000,
H1 (51200), H2 (102400)
Dark indoors or night
Flash Range
The higher the ISO speed,
the farther the effective
flash range will be.
* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.
You can also set the ISO speed with the [z2: ISO speed settings] menu’s
[ISO speed] screen.
177
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
 As H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200) and H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) are
expanded ISO speed settings, noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) and
irregular colors will be more noticeable, and the resolution lower
compared with the standard setting.
 As L (equivalent to ISO 50) is an expanded ISO speed setting, the
dynamic range will be somewhat narrower compared with the standard
setting.
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.206), L (equivalent
to ISO 50), ISO 100/125/160, H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and H2
(equivalent to ISO 102400) cannot be selected.
 When shooting with a high ISO speed, high temperature, long exposure,
or multiple exposure, image noise (rough grain, dots of light, banding,
etc.) and irregular colors may become noticeable.
 When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise,
such as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long
exposure, images may not be recorded properly.
 If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,
overexposure may result.
Under [z2: ISO speed settings], you can use [Range for stills] to expand
the settable ISO speed range from L (equivalent to ISO 50) to H1
(equivalent to ISO 51200) and H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) (p.180).
178
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
ISO Auto
If the ISO speed is set to “A” (Auto), the
actual ISO speed to be set will be
displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway.
As indicated below, the ISO speed will
be set automatically to suit the shooting
mode.
Shooting Mode
ISO Speed Setting
No Flash
A
ISO 100 - ISO 12800
d/s/f/a
ISO 100 - ISO 32000*1
F
ISO 400*1
With Flash
ISO 100 - ISO 1600
ISO 400*1*2*3
*1: The actual ISO speed range depends on the [Minimum] and [Maximum]
settings set in [Auto range].
*2: If fill-in flash will cause overexposure, ISO 100 or a higher ISO will be set.
(Except in the <a> and <F> modes.)
*3: In the <d> mode, if you use bounce flash with an external Speedlite, ISO 400
- ISO 1600 will be set automatically.
179
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
3 Setting the Manually-Settable ISO Speed Range
You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and
maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within L (equivalent to
ISO 50) to H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and the maximum limit within
ISO 100 to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).
1
Select [ISO speed settings].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [ISO
speed settings], then press <0>.
2 Select [Range for stills].
the minimum limit.
3 Set
 Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
the maximum limit.
4 Set
 Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
5 Select [OK].
180
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
3 Setting the ISO Speed Range for ISO Auto
You can set the automatic ISO speed range for ISO Auto within ISO 100
- ISO 32000. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 - ISO 25600,
and the maximum limit within ISO 200 - ISO 32000 in whole-stop
increments.
1
Select [Auto range].
the minimum limit.
2 Set
 Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
the maximum limit.
3 Set
 Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
4 Select [OK].
The [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also be applied to the
minimum and maximum ISO speeds of the safety shift effected by the ISO
speed (p.485).
181
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
3 Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto
You can set the minimum shutter speed so that the shutter speed set
automatically will not be too slow when ISO Auto is set.
This is effective in the <d> and <f> modes when you use a wideangle lens to shoot a moving subject or when you use a telephoto lens.
It helps to reduce camera shake and blurred subjects.
1
Automatically set
Manually set
Select [Min. shutter spd.].
the desired minimum shutter
2 Set
speed.
 Select [Auto] or [Manual].
 If you select [Auto], turn the <6>
dial to set the desired speed, slower
or faster compared to the standard
speed, then press <0>.
 If you select [Manual], turn the <6>
dial to select the shutter speed, then
press <0>.
 If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed
limit set with [Auto range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min. shutter
spd.] will be set to obtain the standard exposure.
 This function will not be applied to flash and movie shooting.
When [Auto: 0] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the reciprocal of
the lens focal length. A single step from [Slower] to [Faster] is equivalent to
a single shutter speed stop.
182
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
matching your photographic expression or the subject.
In the <A> mode, the Picture Style is set automatically to [D]
(Auto).
1
Press the <b> button.
[A].
2 Select
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
a Picture Style.
3 Select
 The Picture Style will be set and the
camera will be ready to shoot.
You can also set this with the [z3: Picture Style] screen.
183
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
Picture Style Characteristics
D Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The
colors will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets,
particularly in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes.
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture
Style.
P Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
Q Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up
portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (p.188), you can adjust the skin tone.
R Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.
Effective for impressive landscapes.
u Fine Detail
Suited for detailed outline and fine texture description of the subject.
The colors will be slightly vivid.
S Neutral
Suited for processing the image with a computer. For natural colors
and subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
184
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
U Faithful
Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a
subject that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K
will be adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For
subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
V Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot be turned into color. Be
careful not to leave the [Monochrome] setting on when you want to shoot
photos in color again.
You can set the camera to display <z> in the viewfinder and on the LCD
panel for when [Monochrome] is set (p.489).
W User Def. 1-3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a
Picture Style file, etc. and adjust it as desired (p.190). Any User
Defined Picture Style that is not set will have the same settings as
the default setting of the [Standard] Picture Style.
185
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
Symbols
The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness],
or [Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast], and other
parameters. The numerals indicate the values for these parameters set
for the respective Picture Style.
Symbols
Sharpness
g
A
Strength
B
Fineness
C
Threshold
h
Contrast
i
Saturation
j
Color tone
k
Filter effect (Monochrome)
l
Toning effect (Monochrome)
During movie shooting, “ * ” will be displayed for both [Fineness] and
[Threshold] for [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] will not be
applied to movies.
186
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
You can customize the Picture Styles. You can change or adjust the
parameter settings of Picture Styles such as [Strength], [Fineness], or
[Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other
parameters from the default settings. To see the resulting effects, take
test shots. To customize [Monochrome], see page 189.
1 Press the <b> button.
[A].
2 Select
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
a Picture Style.
3 Select
 Select a Picture Style, then press
<B> button.
a parameter.
4 Select
 Select the parameter (such as
[Strength] of [Sharpness]) to be set,
then press <0>.
 The settings and effects are
explained on the next page.
187
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
the parameter.
5 Set
 Adjust the level of effect (parameter)
as desired, then press <0>.
 Press the <M> button to save the
adjusted parameter settings. The
Picture Style selection screen will
reappear.
 The value of parameter settings
different from the default will be
displayed in blue.
Parameter Settings and Effects
Sharpness
g
h
A Strength
0: Weak outline emphasis
7: Strong outline emphasis
B Fineness*1
1: Fine
5: Grainy
C Threshold*2
1: Low
5: High
Contrast
-4: Low contrast
+4: High contrast
-4: Low saturation
+4: High saturation
-4: Reddish skin tone
+4: Yellowish skin tone
i Saturation
Color tone
j
*1: Indicates the fineness of the outlines to be emphasized. The smaller the
number, the finer the outlines that can be emphasized.
*2: Sets how much the outline is emphasized based on the difference in contrast
between the subject and the surrounding area. The smaller the number, the
more the outline will be emphasized when the contrast difference is low.
However, noise tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.
 For movie shooting, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] cannot
be set (not displayed).
 By selecting [Default set.] in step 4, you can revert the parameter
settings of the respective Picture Style to their defaults.
 To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted
Picture Style, then shoot.
188
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
V Monochrome Adjustment
Besides the effects described on the preceding page such as
[Contrast], or [Strength], [Fineness] and [Threshold] for
[Sharpness], you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect].
kFilter effect
With a filter effect applied to a
monochrome image, you can make
white clouds or green trees stand out
more.
Filter
Sample Effects
N: None
Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye: Yellow
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will
look crisper.
Or: Orange
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
R: Red
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper
and brighter.
G: Green
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will
look crisper and brighter.
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
lToning effect
By applying a toning effect, you can
create a monochrome image in the
selected color. Effective when you want
to create more impressive images.
The following can be selected: [N:None],
[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or
[G:Green].
189
A Registering a Picture StyleN
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3]. Useful when you want to preset multiple
Picture Styles with different settings.
You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that is registered
to the camera with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.596).
1 Press the <b> button.
[A].
2 Select
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
[User Def. *].
3 Select
 Select [User Def. *], then press the
<B> button.
<0>.
4 Press
 With [Picture Style] selected, press
<0>.
the base Picture Style.
5 Select
 Select the base Picture Style, then
press <0>.
 To adjust the parameters of a Picture
Style that is registered to the camera
with EOS Utility (EOS software),
select the Picture Style here.
190
A Registering a Picture StyleN
a parameter.
6 Select
 Select the parameter (such as
[Strength] of [Sharpness]) to be set,
then press <0>.
the parameter.
7 Set
 Adjust the level of effect (parameter)
as desired, then press <0>.
For details, see “Customizing a
Picture Style” (p.187).
 Press the <M> button to register
the adjusted parameter settings. The
Picture Style selection screen will
then reappear.
 The base Picture Style will be
indicated on the right of [User Def. *].
 If a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing the
base Picture Style in step 5 will clear the parameter settings of the
previously registered User Defined Picture Style.
 If you perform [55: Clear all camera settings] (p.77), all the
[User Def. *] styles and settings will revert to their defaults.
 To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, select the registered
[User Def. *], then shoot.
 Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,
refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
191
B: Setting the White BalanceN
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally,
the Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) or [Qw] (White priority) setting will
obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be
obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light
source or set it manually by shooting a white object.
In the <A> mode, [Q] (Ambience priority) is automatically set.
1
Press the <n> button (9).
a white balance setting.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <5> dial.
(Approx.)
Display
Mode
Q
Auto (Ambience priority, p.194)
Qw
Auto (White priority, p.194)
Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)
3000 - 7000
W
Daylight
5200
E
Shade
7000
R
Cloudy, twilight, sunset
6000
Y
Tungsten light
3200
U
White fluorescent light
D
Flash use
4000
Automatically set*
O
Custom (p.195)
2000 - 10000
P
Color temperature (p.197)
2500 - 10000
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.
Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000 K.
192
B: Setting the White BalanceN
 You can also set this with the [z2: White balance] screen.
 To switch between Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) and [Qw] (White
priority), use the [z2: White balance] screen (p.194).
White Balance
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of
lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is
decided depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and
then the color is adjusted with software to make the white areas look
white. With this function, pictures with natural color tones can be taken.
193
B: Setting the White BalanceN
Q Auto White Balance
With [Q] (Ambience priority), you can increase the intensity of the
image’s warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you
select [Qw] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the
image’s warm color cast.
If you want to match the Auto white balance of previous EOS camera
models, select [Q] (Ambience priority).
1
Select [White balance].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
[Q].
2 Select
 With [Q] selected, press the
<B> button.
the desired item.
3 Select
 Select [Auto: Ambience priority] or
[Auto: White priority], then press
<0>.
Q : Auto: Ambience priority
Qw : Auto: White priority
Cautions for Setting [Qw] (White priority)
 The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
 When multiple light sources are included on the screen, the warm color
cast of the picture may not be lessened.
 When using flash, the color tone will be the same as with [Q]
(Ambience priority).
194
B: Setting the White BalanceN
O Custom White Balance
With custom white balance, you can manually set the white balance for
the specific light source of the shooting location. Make sure to perform
this procedure under the light source at the actual location of the shoot.
1
Shoot a white object.
 Look through the viewfinder and aim
the entire dotted line box (shown in
the illustration) over a plain, white
object.
 Focus manually and shoot with the
standard exposure set for the white
object.
 You can use any white balance
setting.
[Custom White Balance].
2 Select
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Custom
White Balance], then press <0>.
 The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
the white balance data.
3 Import
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image captured in step 1, then press
<0>.
 On the dialog screen that appears,
select [OK] and the data will be
imported.
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
195
B: Setting the White BalanceN
4 Press the <n> button (9).
the custom white balance.
5 Select
 Look at the LCD panel and turn the
<5> dial to select <O>.
 If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard
exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
 In step 3, the following images cannot be selected: Images captured with
the Picture Style set to [Monochrome], multiple-exposure images,
frame-grab images from 4K movies, and images shot with another
camera.
 Instead of a white object, shooting a gray chart or standard 18% gray
reflector (commercially-available) can produce a more accurate white
balance.
 The personal white balance registered with the EOS software will be
registered under <O>. If you perform step 3, the data for the registered
personal white balance will be erased.
196
B: Setting the White BalanceN
P Setting the Color Temperature
You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically. This is
for advanced users.
1
Select [White balance].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
the color temperature.
2 Set
 Select [P].
 Turn the <6> dial to set the color
temperature, then press <0>.
 The color temperature can be set
from approx. 2500 K to 10000 K in
100 K increments.
 When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set white
balance correction (magenta or green) as necessary.
 If you set [P] to the reading taken with a commercially-available color
temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate
for the difference between the color temperature meter’s reading and the
camera’s color temperature reading.
197
u White Balance CorrectionN
You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have
the same effect as using a commercially-available color temperature
conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be
corrected to one of nine levels.
This function is for advanced users, particularly for those users who
understand the use of color temperature conversion and color
compensating filters and their effects.
White Balance Correction
1
Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [WB
Shift/Bkt.], then press <0>.
the white balance correction.
2 Set
 Use <9> to move the “ ” mark to the
Sample setting: A2, G1
appropriate position.
 B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The image’s
color balance will be adjusted toward
the color in the direction of the move.
 On the right of the screen, “Shift”
indicates the direction and correction
amount, respectively.
 Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
 Press <0> to exit the setting.
 You can set the camera to display <z> in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel for when white balance correction has been set (p.489).
 One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Unit of measure for color
temperature used to indicate values such as the density of a color
temperature conversion filter.)
198
u White Balance CorrectionN
White Balance Auto Bracketing
With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be
recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current
white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber
bias and magenta/green bias. This function is called white balance
bracketing (WB-BKT). White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3
levels in single-level increments.
Set the white balance bracketing
amount.
B/A bias ±3 levels
 In step 2 for “White Balance
Correction”, when you turn the <5>
dial, the “ ” mark on the screen will
change to “
” (3 points).
Turning the dial to the right sets the B/
A bracketing, and turning it to the left
sets the M/G bracketing.
 On the right, “Bracket” indicates the
bracketing direction and correction
amount.
 Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
 Press <0> to exit the setting.
 Bracketing Sequence
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
199
u White Balance CorrectionN
 During white balance bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous
shooting will be lower.
 Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record
the image to the card.
 You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
 When white balance bracketing is set, the white balance icon will blink.
 You can change the sequence (p.483) and number of shots (p.484) for
the white balance bracketing.
 “Bkt.” stands for bracketing.
200
3 Auto Correction of Brightness and ContrastN
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and
contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto
Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG
images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.
In the <A> mode, [Standard] is automatically set.
1
Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Auto
Lighting Optimizer], then press
<0>.
the setting.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Take the picture.
3  The image will be recorded with the
brightness and contrast corrected if
necessary.
 Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.
 If the effect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and the image is too
bright, set [Low] or [Disable].
 If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,
the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set
this function to [Disable].
 When you set multiple exposures (p.268), HDR mode (p.263), or
highlight tone priority (p.206), [Auto Lighting Optimizer] will be
automatically set to [Disable].
In step 2, if you press the <B> button and remove the [X] mark for
[Disabled in M or B modes] setting, the [Auto Lighting Optimizer] can be
set even in the <a> and <F> modes.
201
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise
reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high
ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker
parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced.
1
Select [High ISO speed NR].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [High ISO
speed NR], then press <0>.
the level.
2 Set
 Select the desired noise reduction
level, then press <0>.
 M: Multi Shot Noise Reduction
This applies noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].
For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned
and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.
If the image-recording quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you
cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction].
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
You can set to display <z> in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel for
when Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set (p.489).
202
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction
 If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the
noise reduction effect may become smaller.
 If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
 If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave
afterimages.
 The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
 If the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are
taken, irregular exposure in the image may result.
 After shooting, it may take some time to record an image to the card after
performing noise reduction and merging the images. During the
processing of the images, “buSY” will be displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD panel, and you cannot take another picture until the
processing is completed.
 You cannot use AEB and WB bracketing.
 If [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], [z3: Multiple exposure], [z3:
HDR Mode], Dual Pixel RAW shooting, AEB shooting, WB bracketing, or
Live View shooting with Servo AF is set, [Multi Shot Noise Reduction]
cannot be set.
 This cannot be set for bulb shooting.
 Flash shooting is not possible. Note that the AF-assist beam of EOSdedicated, external Speedlites will be emitted according to the [23:
AF-assist beam firing] setting.
 Doing any of the following will automatically switch the setting to
[Standard]: Setting the power switch to <2>, replacing the battery,
replacing the card, selecting the <A> or <F> shooting mode, setting or
switching the image-recording quality to RAW or RAW+JPEG, or
switching to movie shooting.
203
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise (dots of light and
banding) typical of long exposures can be reduced.
1
Select [Long exp. noise
reduction].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Long
exp. noise reduction], then press
<0>.
the desired setting.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 Auto
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This
[Auto] setting is effective in most cases.
 Enable
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.
The [Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with
the [Auto] setting.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
204
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
 With [Auto] or [Enable] set, the noise reduction process after the picture
is taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure.
During noise reduction, shooting is still possible as long as the maximum
burst indicator in the viewfinder shows “1” or higher.
 Images taken at high ISO speeds may look grainier with the [Enable]
setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting.
 With [Enable] set, if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image
displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction process.
The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is
completed. (You cannot take another picture.)
205
3 Highlight Tone PriorityN
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.
1
Select [Highlight tone priority].
 Under the [z3] tab, select
[Highlight tone priority], then
press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Highlight details are improved.
The dynamic range is expanded from
the standard 18% gray to bright
highlights. The gradation between
the grays and highlights becomes
smoother.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with
highlight tone priority applied.
 When [Enable] is set, noise may increase slightly.
 With [Enable], the settable ISO speed range will start from ISO 200.
Expanded ISO speeds cannot be set.
 When you set multiple exposures (p.268) or HDR mode (p.263),
[Highlight tone priority] will be automatically set to [Disable].
When highlight tone is set, <A> is displayed in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel.
206
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due
to Optical CharacteristicsN
Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners
look darker due to the optical characteristics of the lens. Image
distortion due to optical characteristics of the lens is called distortion.
Color fringing along subject outlines is called chromatic aberration. And
decreased image sharpness due to the aperture is called diffraction
phenomenon. These lens aberrations can be corrected. The Digital
Lens Optimizer can correct the various aberrations caused by optical
characteristics of the lens, diffraction phenomenon, and the
deterioration of resolution caused by the low-pass filter.
By default, the [Peripheral illum corr], [Chromatic aberr corr], and
[Diffraction correction] are set to [Enable], [Distortion correction]
and [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Disable].
If the lens correction data is registered (saved) in the camera,
peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, and
diffraction correction will be done even in the <A> mode.
If the setting screen displays [Correction data not available] or the
[ ] icon, it means that the correction data for the respective lens is not
registered in the camera. See “Lens Correction Data” on page 213.
Peripheral Illumination Correction
1
Select [Lens aberration
correction].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Lens
aberration correction], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Peripheral illum corr].
207
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN
[Enable].
3 Select
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
4 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
peripheral illumination corrected.
 Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image
periphery.
 The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
The correction amount applied will be slightly lower than the maximum
correction amount that can be applied with Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software, p.596).
208
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN
Distortion Correction
1 Select [Distortion correction].
[Enable].
2 Select
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
distortion corrected.
 When distortion correction is enabled, the camera records an image
range narrower than the one seen through the viewfinder. (The image
periphery is slightly trimmed and the resolution looks slightly lowered.)
 During movie shooting, [Distortion correction] will not be displayed
(correction is not possible).
 Using distortion correction during Live View shooting will slightly affect
the angle of view.
 When you magnify the image during Live View shooting, distortion
correction is not applied to the image displayed. Therefore, magnifying
the periphery of the image may display parts of the image that will not be
recorded.
 Images with distortion correction applied will not have the Dust Delete
Data (p.460) appended. Also, the AF point(s) will not be displayed
(p.402) for image playback.
209
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN
Digital Lens Optimizer
1 Select [Digital Lens Optimizer].
[Enable].
2 Select
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
following being corrected: lens
aberrations, diffraction phenomenon,
and the deterioration of resolution
caused by the low-pass filter.
 Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified with the
effects of correction. Also, stronger application of outline emphasis may
result. In such a case, adjust the Picture Style’s Sharpness as necessary.
 The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
 If the image-recording quality is set to 41 or 61 and you set [Digital
Lens Optimizer] to [Enable], the image-recording quality will be 1.
 If [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Enable], the continuous shooting speed
will greatly decrease. Also, 41 and 61 cannot be set for the imagerecording quality. If a correction is made during Live View shooting, [BUSY]
will be displayed and the Live View image will not be displayed until the
correction process is completed. (Another Live View shooting is not possible.)
 If [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Enable], and you set [Dual Pixel
RAW] to [Enable], [Digital Lens Optimizer] will not function. (The
setting will be switched to [Disable].)
 During movie shooting, [Digital Lens Optimizer] will not be displayed
(correction is not possible).
 If [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Enable], Multi Shot Noise
Reduction cannot be set. Also, even if you assign a button to switch the
image-recording quality to 41 or 61 with [One-touch image
quality setting] or [One-touch image quality (hold)] in Custom
Controls, that Custom Control function will not take effect.
210
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN
 When [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Enable], [Chromatic aberr
corr] and [Diffraction correction] will not be displayed, but both will be
set to [Enable] for shooting.
 The <V> icon can be displayed in the viewfinder (p.84) by adding a
checkmark [X] to [Digital Lens Optimizer] in [Viewfinder display].
 The Digital Lens Optimizer’s correction data for newly released lenses
can be added with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.596).
 If [Invalid correction data for Digital Lens Optimizer.] is displayed,
use EOS Utility (EOS software) to add the correction data for the Digital
Lens Optimizer to the camera.
Chromatic Aberration Correction
1 Select [Chromatic aberr corr].
[Enable].
2 Select
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
chromatic aberration corrected.
If [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Enable], [Chromatic aberr corr] will
not be displayed.
211
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN
Diffraction Correction
1 Select [Diffraction correction].
[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
diffraction corrected.
 Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified with the
effects of correction.
 The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
 For movie shooting, [Diffraction correction] will not appear (correction
is not possible).
 With “Diffraction correction”, degraded resolution due to the low-pass filter,
etc. is corrected in addition to diffraction. Therefore, correction is effective
even near the maximum aperture.
 If [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Enable], [Diffraction correction]
will not be displayed.
212
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN
Lens Correction Data
The lens correction data for lens aberration corrections is registered
(stored) in the camera. With [Enable] selected, the peripheral
illumination correction, distortion correction, Digital Lens Optimizer,
chromatic aberration correction, and diffraction correction will be
applied automatically.
With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.596), you can check which lenses
have their correction data registered in the camera. You can also
register the correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to
the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
For lenses incorporating the correction data, it is not necessary to
register the correction data to the camera.
213
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN
Cautions for Lens Correction
 Peripheral illumination correction, distortion correction, chromatic
aberration correction, and diffraction correction cannot be applied to
JPEG images already taken.
 When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
 If you use magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral
illumination correction and distortion correction will not be reflected in the
image on the screen. Note that the Digital Lens Optimizer and diffraction
correction will not be applied to the Live View image.
 The correction amount will be less (except for diffraction correction) if the
lens used does not have distance information.
Notes for Lens Correction
 The effect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens
used and shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to discern
depending on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.
 If the correction is difficult to discern, magnifying and checking the image
after shooting is recommended.
 Corrections can be applied even when an extender or life-size converter
is attached.
 If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the
camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to
[Disable] (except for diffraction correction).
214
3 Reducing FlickerN
If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source
such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker
and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous
shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors
across the images may result. When you use this feature during
viewfinder shooting, the camera detects the flickering frequency of the
light source and takes the picture when the flicker causes less effect on
exposure or color tone.
1
Select [Anti-flicker shoot.].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Antiflicker shoot.], then press <0>.
2 Select [Enable].
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be taken with reduced
unevenness of exposure or color tone
caused by the flicker.
 When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the
shutter-release time lag may become longer. Also, the continuous shooting
speed may become slower, and the shooting interval may become irregular.
 This function does not work with mirror lockup, Live View shooting, or
movie shooting.
 In the <d> or <f> mode, if the shutter speed changes during continuous
shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at different shutter
speeds, the color tone may be inconsistent. To avoid inconsistent color
tones, use the <s> or <a> mode at a fixed shutter speed.
 The color tone of the captured images when [Anti-flicker shoot.] is set
to [Enable] may look different from when [Disable] is set.
 Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected.
Also, if the flickering frequency of the light source changes during
continuous shooting, effects of the flicker cannot be reduced.
215
3 Reducing FlickerN
 If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in
the image, flicker may not be properly detected.
 Under certain special types of lighting, the camera may not be able to
reduce the effects of the flicker even when <G> is displayed.
 Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.
 If you recompose a shot, <G> may appear and disappear
intermittently.
 Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, the expected
result may not be obtained even if you use this function.
 Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
 If <G> is not displayed in the viewfinder, add a checkmark to
[Flicker detection] in [Show/hide in viewfinder] (p.84). If you shoot
with flicker reduction, <G> will light up. Under a light source which
does not flicker, or if no flicker is detected, <G> will not be
displayed.
 If a checkmark is added to [Flicker detection] and [z4: Anti-flicker
shoot.] is set to [Disable], metering under a flickering light source will
cause <G> to blink in the viewfinder as a warning. Setting to
[Enable] before shooting is recommended.
 In the <A> mode, <G> will not be displayed, but the picture will
be taken with flicker reduction.
 Flicker reduction also works with flash. However, the expected result
may not be obtained for wireless flash shooting.
216
3 Setting the Color SpaceN
The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this
camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.
In the <A> mode, the color space is set automatically to [sRGB].
1
Select [Color space].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Color
space], then press <0>.
the desired color space.
2 Set
 Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then
press <0>.
Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other
industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you are not familiar
with image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a
sRGB computer environment and with printers not compliant to Design
rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Post-processing
of the image with computer software will therefore be required.
 If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the
first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.
 The ICC profile is not appended. For explanations about the ICC profile,
refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual.
217
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images
are to be saved.
This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for
saving captured images.
Creating a Folder
1
Select [Record func+card/folder
sel.].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Record
func+card/folder sel.], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Folder].
3 Select [Create folder].
[OK].
4 Select
 A new folder with the folder number
increased by one is created.
218
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
Selecting a Folder
Lowest file number
Number of images in folder
 Select a folder on the folder selection
screen, then press <0>.
 The folder where the captured
images will be saved is selected.
 Subsequently captured images will
be recorded into the selected folder.
Folder name
Highest file number
Folders
As with “100EOS5D” for example, the folder name starts with three digits
(the folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can
contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is
created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.224) is executed, a new
folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can
be created.
Creating Folders with a Computer
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format
“100ABC_D”. The first three digits are always the folder number from 100 to
999. The last five characters can be any combination of upper- and lowercase letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space
cannot be used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same
three-digit folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”)
even if the remaining five characters in each name are different.
219
3 Changing the File Name
The file name has four alphanumeric
characters followed by a four-digit
(Example) BE3B0001.JPG
image number (p.223) and extension.
The first four alphanumeric characters
are set upon factory shipment and unique to the camera. However, you
can change them.
With “User setting1”, you can change and register the four characters
as desired. With “User setting2”, if you register three characters, the
fourth character from the left will be appended automatically to indicate
the image size (image-recording quality).
Registering or Changing the File Name
1
Select [File name].
 Under the [51] tab, select [File
name], then press <0>.
2 Select [Change User setting*].
any alphanumeric
3 Enter
characters.
Character palette
220
 For User setting1, enter four
characters. For User setting2, enter
three characters.
 Press the <L> button to delete any
unnecessary characters.
3 Changing the File Name
Input mode
 Operate the <5>, <6>, or <9> to
move the and select the desired
character. Then press <0> to enter
it.
 By selecting [Az1], you can change
the input mode.
 To cancel the text entry, press the
<B> button, then select [OK].
the setting.
4 Exit
 After entering the correct number of
characters, press the <M> button,
then select [OK].
 The registered file name will be
saved.
the registered file name.
5 Select
 Select [File name], then press <0>.
Settings
 Select the registered file name, then
press <0>.
 If User setting2 is registered, select
“*** (the 3 characters registered) +
image size”.
221
3 Changing the File Name
The first character cannot be an underscore “_”.
User setting2
When you select the “*** + image size” registered with User setting2 and
take pictures, the image-recording quality character will be automatically
appended as the file name’s fourth character from the left. The meaning of
the image-recording quality characters is as follows:
“***L” = 73 / 83 / 1
“***M” = 74 / 84 / 41
“***S” = 7a/8a/61
“***T” = b
“***U” = c
When the image is transferred to a computer, you can refer to the fourth
character of the image file name to identify the image size (image-recording
quality) without opening the image. RAW or JPEG images can be
distinguished with the extension.
 If you cannot enter text in step 3, press the <Q> button and use the
character palette when the blue frame appears.
 The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.CR2” for RAW images,
and “.MOV” or “.MP4” for movies.
 When you shoot a movie with User setting2, the file name’s fourth
character will be an underscore “_”.
222
3 File Numbering Methods
The captured images are assigned a
sequential four-digit file number from 0001 (Example) BE3B0001.JPG
to 9999 and saved in one folder. You can
File numbering
change how the file number is assigned.
1
Select [File numbering].
 Under the [51] tab, select [File
numbering], then press <0>.
the file numbering method.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press <0>.
 With [Manual reset] selected,
selecting [OK] will reset the image
numbering to 0001.
Continuous
Continues the file numbering sequence even after the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
Even after you replace the card, create a folder, or switch the target
card (such as f9g), the file numbering continues in sequence up to
9999 for the images saved. This is useful when you want to save
images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or
in multiple folders into one folder on a computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue
from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the
folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is recommended
that you use a newly-formatted card each time.
File numbering after replacing the card
Card A (f)
File numbering after creating a folder
Card A
Card B (g)
100
0051
0052
101
0051
0052
Next sequential file number
223
3 File Numbering Methods
Auto Reset
Restarts the file numbering from 0001 each time the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card, create a folder, or switch the target card
(such as f9g), the file numbering continues in sequence from 0001
for the images saved. This is useful if you want to organize images by
cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue
from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the
folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from
0001, use a newly formatted card each time.
File numbering after replacing the card
Card A (f)
File numbering after creating a folder
Card A
Card B (g)
100
0051
0001
101
0051
0001
File numbering is reset
Manual Reset
Resets the file numbering to 0001 or starts from file number 0001
in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder
starts from 0001.
This is useful, for example, if you want to use different folders for the
images taken yesterday and the ones taken today. After the manual
reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset.
If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible
even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a
message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
224
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image
as Exif information.
1
Select [Copyright information].
 Under the [55] tab, select [Copyright
information], then press <0>.
the option to be set.
2 Select
 Select [Enter author’s name] or
[Enter copyright details], then press
<0>.
text.
3 Enter
 Operate the <5>, <6>, or <9> to


Character palette
Input mode


move the and select the desired
character. Then press <0> to enter
it.
You can enter up to 63 characters.
To delete a character, press the <L>
button.
By selecting [Aaz1@], you can
change the input mode.
To cancel the text entry, press the
<B> button, then select [OK].
the setting.
4 Exit
 After entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
 The information is saved.
225
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
Checking the Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright
info.] in step 2, you can check the
[Author] and [Copyright] information
that you entered.
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can
delete the [Author] and [Copyright] information.
If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed
entirely when you select [Display copyright info.].
 If you cannot enter text in step 3, press the <Q> button and use the
character palette when the blue frame appears.
 You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility
(EOS software, p.596).
226
5
GPS Settings
This chapter explains the camera’s built-in GPS
settings. The EOS 5D Mark IV (WG) can receive
satellite navigation signals from GPS satellites (USA),
GLONASS satellites (Russia), and Quasi-Zenith
Satellite System (QZSS) “Michibiki” (Japan).
 The GPS function is set to [Disable] by default.
 This manual uses the term “GPS” to refer to the satellite
navigation function.
When [GPS] is set to [Mode 1] (p.231), the camera will
continue to receive GPS signals at regular intervals
even after the camera’s power switch is set to <2>.
The battery will thereby drain faster and the number of
possible shots will decrease. If you will not use GPS,
setting [GPS] to [Disable] or [Mode 2] is recommended.
When using GPS function, be sure to check the region of use and
use the function in accordance with the laws and regulations of
the country or region. Be particularly careful when using GPS
outside your home country.
227
GPS Features
Geotagging Images
 Geotag information*1 (latitude,
longitude, elevation) and coordinated
universal time*2 can be appended to
images.
 Shooting locations of geotagged
images can be displayed on a map on
a computer.
*1: Certain travel conditions or GPS settings may cause inaccurate geotag
information to be added to images.
*2: Coordinated Universal Time, abbreviated as UTC, is essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time.
Logging the Route Traveled
You can use the GPS logging function to automatically record the route
the camera travels by logging location information at set intervals. The
location information for the route the camera has traveled can be
viewed on a map displayed on a computer.
* Certain traveling conditions, locations, or GPS settings may cause inaccurate
geotag information to be added to images.
Setting the Camera Time
The time information obtained from GPS signals can be set on the
camera.
The GPS information recorded to the images and movies may include
information that can personally identify yourself. Therefore, be careful when
giving geotagged still photos or movies to other people or displaying them
online to the public.
228
GPS Features
Viewing Images and Information on a Virtual Map
With Map Utility (EOS software, p.597), you can view the shooting
locations and the route traveled on a map displayed on a computer.
Map data ©2016 ZENRIN
229
GPS Precautions
 Countries and Regions Permitting GPS Function Use
Use of GPS function is restricted in some countries and regions, and
illegal use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To
avoid violating GPS function regulations, visit the Canon website to
check where the use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
GPS function use in other countries and regions.
 Model Number
EOS 5D Mark IV (WG) :
DS126601
(including GPS module model: ES300)
 In certain countries and regions, the use of GPS function may be
restricted. Therefore, be sure to use GPS function in accordance
with the laws and regulations of your country or region. Be
particularly careful when using GPS function outside your home
country.
 Be careful about using GPS function where the operation of
electronic devices is restricted.
 Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data in
your geotagged pictures or movies. Be careful when sharing these
geotagged images, movies or GPS log files with others, such as
when posting them online where many people can view them.
 GPS signal reception may take a longer time in some cases.
Hereby, Canon Inc., declares that this DS126601 is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Please contact the following address for the original Declaration of Conformity:
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
230
Acquiring GPS Signals
To acquire GPS signals, take the camera outside where the sky is
unobstructed. Face the top of the camera toward the sky while keeping
your hands, etc. away from the camera top.
When the signal acquisition conditions are good, it will take the camera
approx. 30 sec. to 60 sec. to acquire the GPS satellite signals after you
set [GPS] to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2]. Check that [r] is displayed on
the LCD panel, then shoot.
1
Select [GPS settings].
 Under the [54] tab, select [GPS
settings], then press <0>.
the mode.
2 Select
 Select [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
 [r] will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
 Mode 1
The camera will continue to receive GPS signals at regular intervals
even when the power switch is set to <1> or <2>.
 Mode 2
When the power switch is set to <1>, the camera will receive
GPS signals. When the power switch is set to <2>, the GPS
function will also turn off. However, if auto power off is in effect, the
camera will continue to receive GPS signals at regular intervals.
231
Acquiring GPS Signals
GPS Acquisition Status
The GPS acquisition status is indicated
by the [r] icon displayed on the
camera’s LCD panel.
Constant r: Signal acquired
Blinking r: Signal not acquired yet
When you shoot while [r] is
constantly displayed, the image will be
geotagged.
 When [Mode 1] is set, the camera will continue to receive GPS signals at
regular intervals even when the power switch is set to <2>.
Therefore, the battery will drain faster and fewer shots can be taken. If
you will not use the camera for a prolonged period, set to [Disable].
 When [Mode 2] is set, the camera will continue to receive GPS signals at
regular intervals even during auto power off. Therefore, if auto power off
is prolonged, the battery will drain faster and fewer shots can be taken. If
you will not use the camera for a prolonged period, set the power switch
to <2>.
 The built-in GPS antenna is located in front of the hot shoe on the right
when viewed from the back of the camera (p.28). The GPS signal can be
acquired while an external Speedlite is attached to the hot shoe, but the
acquisition sensitivity will slightly decrease.
 GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately) cannot be used.
232
Acquiring GPS Signals
Poor GPS Coverage
Under the following conditions, the GPS satellite signal will not be properly
acquired. As a result, the geotag information may not be recorded or
inaccurate geotag information may be recorded.
 Indoors, underground, in tunnels or forests, between buildings, or in
valleys.
 Near high-voltage power lines or mobile phones operating on the 1.5
GHz band.
 When the camera is left inside a bag, etc.
 When traveling a long distance.
 When traveling through different environments.
 Since GPS satellites move as time passes, satellite movement can
interfere with geotagging and cause missing or inaccurate location
information even in conditions other than the above. Additionally, the
location information may also include a different location information with
the route traveled even if the camera was used at just one location.
 The battery level may be low when you start using the camera due to the
effect of the GPS function. If necessary, recharge the battery or prepare
a charged, spare battery (sold separately).
 The camera can receive GPS signals even when shooting in the vertical
orientation.
233
Acquiring GPS Signals
Viewing GPS Information
1
Check the [GPS] setting.
 Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1]
or [Mode 2].
[GPS information display].
2 Select
 The GPS information will be
displayed.
the picture.
3 Take
 When you shoot after GPS signal
acquisition, the image will be
geotagged.
Generally, elevation is not as accurate as latitude and longitude due to the
nature of GPS.
 The <A> icon indicates signal conditions. When <C> is displayed, the
elevation is also recorded. Note that the elevation cannot be recorded
when <B> is displayed.
 UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) is essentially the same as Greenwich
Mean Time.
234
Acquiring GPS Signals
Geotagging Information
Play back the images and press the <B> button to display the
shooting information screen (p.398). Then tilt <9> up or down to check
the geotag information.
Latitude
Longitude
Elevation
UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)
 When you shoot a movie, the GPS information at the time when shooting
begins is recorded. Note that signal reception conditions are not
recorded.
 Shooting locations can be viewed on a map displayed on a computer,
using the Map Utility (EOS software, p.597).
235
Setting the Positioning Interval
The interval (time) to update the geotag information can be set.
Although updating the geotag information at shorter intervals will record
more accurate location information, it will reduce the number of possible
shots because it will drain the battery faster.
1
Check the [GPS] setting.
 Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1]
or [Mode 2].
2 Select [Position update intvl].
the desired update interval.
3 Set
 Select the desired update interval,
then press <0>.
 If you are in a location where the GPS acquisition condition is not good,
the number of possible shots will decrease.
 The nature of GPS may cause some inconsistency in update intervals.
236
Setting Time from GPS on the Camera
The time information obtained from GPS signals can be set on the
camera. The margin of error is approx. ±1 sec.
1
Check the [GPS] setting.
 Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1]
or [Mode 2].
2 Select [Auto time setting].
the desired setting.
3 Select
 Select [Auto update] or [Set now],
then press <0>.
 [Auto update] updates the time when
the camera’s power switch is on and
a GPS signal is received.
 If signals from at least five GPS satellites cannot be acquired, the time
cannot be auto updated. [Set now] will be grayed out and not selectable.
 Even if [Set now] can be selected, updating the time may not be
possible due to an unfavorable timing of the GPS signal acquisition.
 When [Auto time setting] is set to [Auto update], the date or time
cannot be manually set with [52: Date/Time/Zone].
 If you use Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E7 (Ver. 2/sold separately) and
do not want to change the time after implementing [Sync time between
cameras], set [Auto time setting] to [Disable] in step 2.
237
Logging the Route Traveled
When using the GPS logging function,
the geotag information of the route the
camera travels is automatically
recorded in the camera’s internal
memory.
With Map Utility (EOS software, p.597),
you can view the shooting locations
and the route traveled on a map
displayed on a computer.
Map data ©2016 ZENRIN
1
Check the [GPS] setting.
 Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1]
or [Mode 2].
2 Select [GPS Logger].
[Log GPS position] to
3 Set
[Enable].
 Select [Log GPS position], then
press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
 [x] will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
 With [GPS] set to [Mode 1], the GPS logging function will continue to
work even while the power switch is set to <2>.
 When [Mode 2] is set, setting the power switch to <2> will also turn
off the GPS logging function. However, the GPS logging function will
continue to work during auto power off.
238
Logging the Route Traveled
Geotag Information Logs
Geotag information for the route the camera travels is recorded at the
intervals set with [Position update intvl] (p.236). The log data is saved
in the camera’s internal memory by date. The table below shows how
many days’ worth of data can be saved.
Log Data Capacity by Positioning Interval
(Approx.)
Update Interval
Log Data
Update Interval
Log Data
Every 1 sec.
4.1 days
Every 30 sec.
100 days
Every 5 sec.
20 days
Every 1 min.
100 days
Every 10 sec.
41 days
Every 2 min.
100 days
Every 15 sec.
61 days
Every 5 min.
100 days
* Based on 1 day equivalent to eight hours worth of log data.
 The log data saved in the internal memory can be transferred as a
log file to a card (p.240).
 Log file names consist of the date and number (e.g. 16081800). A
log file is created for each day. If the time zone changes (p.51), a
new log file will be created.
 If the camera’s internal memory becomes full, the oldest log data will
be erased, and the newest log data will be saved.
Battery Consumption During Logging
When [GPS] is set to [Mode 1], the camera will continue to receive GPS
signals at regular intervals even after the camera’s power switch is set
to <2>. If [Mode 2] is set, the camera will continue to receive GPS
signals at regular intervals even during auto power off. The battery will
thereby drain faster and the number of possible shots will decrease.
Additionally, when [Log GPS position] is set to [Enable], shorter
update intervals will drain the battery more quickly.
When you are not traveling or when GPS signals are weak, setting
[GPS] to [Disable] is recommended.
239
Logging the Route Traveled
Downloading Log Data to a Computer
The log data in the camera’s internal memory can be downloaded to
a computer with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.596) or downloaded from
a card after transferring the data to the card.
When you use Map Utility (EOS software, p.597) to open a log file
saved on the computer, the camera’s travel route will be displayed on
a map.
 Importing the log data using EOS software
With the camera connected to a computer via the provided interface
cable, you can download the log data to the computer with EOS Utility
(EOS software). For details, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
 Transferring the log data to a card for downloading
 When [Transfer log data to card]
is selected, you can transfer the log
data in the internal memory as log
files to a CF card [f] or SD card [g].
Note that when log files are
transferred to a card, that log data is
erased from the camera’s internal
memory.
 The log files imported to the card will be stored in the “GPS” folder in
the “MISC” folder. The extension is “.LOG”.
 Selecting [Delete log data] will erase the log data saved in the
internal memory. Erasing the data may take approx. one minute.
240
Logging the Route Traveled
 When connecting the camera to a computer, use the provided interface
cable or one from Canon (p.525). When connecting the interface cable,
use the provided cable protector (p.38).
 The GPS antenna is located at the top of the camera body. For this
reason, even when carrying the camera, such as in a bag, try to keep the
top of the camera facing upwards, and do not place anything on top of it.
 Set the camera time and date as accurately as possible. Also, set correct
time zone and daylight saving time for the shooting location.
241
242
6
Advanced Operations
for Photographic Effects
In the <d>, <s>, <f>,
<a>, and <F> modes, you
can change various settings of
the camera as you desire to
obtain a wide variety of
shooting results, by selecting
the shutter speed and/or
aperture, adjusting the
exposure as you prefer, etc.
 A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in the following modes: <d>
<s> <f> <a> <F>.
 After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the
exposure settings will remain displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel for approx. 4 sec. (0) by the
metering timer function.
 For the functions settable in each shooting mode, see page 536.
Set the <R> switch to the left.
243
d: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.
* <d> stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <d>.
on the subject.
2 Focus
 Look through the viewfinder and aim
the AF point over the subject. Then
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the focus
indicator <o> in the viewfinder will
light up (in One-Shot AF mode).
 The shutter speed and aperture will
be set automatically and displayed in
the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
the display.
3 Check
 The standard exposure will be
obtained as long as the shutter speed
and aperture displays do not blink.
the picture.
4 Take
 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
244
d: Program AE
 If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number
blink, it indicates underexposure.
Increase the ISO speed or use flash.
 If the “8000” shutter speed and the highest f/number
blink, it indicates overexposure.
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold
separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the
lens.
Differences Between <d> and <A> Modes
In the <A> mode, many functions, such as the AF operation and metering
mode, are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can
set are limited. With <d> mode, only the shutter speed and aperture are set
automatically. You can freely set the AF operation, metering mode, and
other functions (p.536).
Program Shift
 In the Program AE mode, you can freely change the shutter speed and
aperture combination (Program) set automatically by the camera while
maintaining the same exposure. This is called Program shift.
 To shift the program, press the shutter button halfway, then turn the
<6> dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed.
 Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer
(0) ends (exposure setting display turns off).
 Program shift cannot be used with flash.
245
s: Shutter-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically
sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the
brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster
shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower
shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of
motion.
* <s> stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)
1
Frozen motion
(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
the desired shutter speed.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The aperture is set automatically.
the viewfinder display and
4 Check
shoot.
 As long as the aperture is not
blinking, the standard exposure will
be obtained.
246
s: Shutter-Priority AE
 If the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed.
 If the highest f/number blinks, it indicates
overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed.
Shutter Speed Display
The shutter speeds from “8000” to “4” indicate the denominator of the
fractional shutter speed. For example, “125” indicates 1/125 sec. , “0"5”
indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"” is 15 sec.
247
f: Aperture-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the
shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching
the subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher
f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower
f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus.
* <f> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).
Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)
1
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
the desired aperture.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The shutter speed is set automatically.
the viewfinder display and
4 Check
shoot.
 As long as the shutter speed is not
blinking, the standard exposure will
be obtained.
248
f: Aperture-Priority AE
 If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture (lower
f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a
higher ISO speed.
 If the “8000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a smaller aperture (higher
f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a
lower ISO speed.
Aperture Value Display
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The
f/number displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to
the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.
249
f: Aperture-Priority AE
Depth-of-Field PreviewN
The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when
the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.
Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the
LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.
Press the depth-of-field preview button
to stop down the lens to the current
aperture setting and check the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
 A higher f/number will make more of the foreground and background fall
within acceptable focus. However, the viewfinder will look darker.
 The depth-of-field effect can be clearly seen on the Live View image as
you change the aperture and press the depth-of-field preview button
(p.298).
 The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while the depth-of-field preview
button is being pressed.
250
a: Manual Exposure
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To
determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the
viewfinder or use a commercially-available exposure meter. This
method is called manual exposure.
* <a> stands for Manual.
Shutter speed
Aperture
1 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
2 Set the ISO speed (p.177).
the shutter speed and
3 Set
aperture.
 To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial. To set the aperture, turn
the <5> dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch to the left, then turn the <6>
or <5> dial.
Standard exposure index
on the subject.
4 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The exposure setting will be
displayed in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel.
 Check the exposure level mark <h> to see how far the current
exposure level is from the standard exposure level.
Exposure level mark
the exposure and take the
5 Set
picture.
 Check the exposure level indicator
and set the desired shutter speed and
aperture.
 If the exposure level exceeds ±3 stops from the standard exposure,
the end of the exposure level indicator will display <I> or <J>.
251
a: Manual Exposure
Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto
If the ISO speed is set to A (AUTO) for <a> manual exposure
shooting, you can set exposure compensation (p.255) as follows:
 [z2: Expo.comp./AEB]
 Under [83: Custom Controls], with [
: Expo comp (hold btn,
turn
)] or [
: Expo comp (hold btn, turn
)] (p.506).
 Quick Control (p.64)
 If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to obtain the
standard exposure with the set shutter speed and aperture. Therefore,
you may not obtain the desired exposure effect. In such a case, set the
exposure compensation.
 If flash is used when ISO Auto is set, exposure compensation will not be
applied even if an exposure compensation amount is set.
 Under [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark [X] for
[Disabled in M or B modes] is removed, Auto Lighting Optimizer can be
set even in the <a> mode (p.201).
 When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed.
 If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared with
when the <A> button was pressed.
 If exposure compensation (p.255) was applied in <d>, <s>, or <f>
mode, and then the shooting mode is switched to <a> with ISO Auto
set, the exposure compensation amount already set will still be
maintained.
 With ISO Auto set and [81: Exposure level increments] set to [1/2stop], any 1/2-stop exposure compensation will be implemented with the
ISO speed (1/3 stop) and shutter speed. However, the shutter speed
displayed will not change.
252
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.
In the <A> mode, evaluative metering is set automatically.
1
Press the <n> button (9).
the metering mode.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
q: Evaluative metering
w: Partial metering
r: Spot metering
e: Center-weighted average
metering
q: Evaluative metering
General-purpose metering mode suited even for
backlit subjects. The camera adjusts the exposure
automatically to suit the scene.
w: Partial metering
Effective where there are much brighter lights
around the subject due to backlight, etc. Partial
metering covers approx. 6.1% of the viewfinder
area at the center.
253
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
r: Spot metering
Effective when metering a specific part of the
subject or scene. Spot metering covers approx.
1.3% of the viewfinder area at the center. The spot
metering circle will be displayed in the viewfinder.
e: Center-weighted average metering
The metering is averaged for the entire scene with
the viewfinder center weighted more heavily.
With <q> (Evaluative metering), the exposure setting will be locked when
you press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved (in One-Shot AF
mode). In the <w> (Partial metering), <r> (Spot metering), and <e>
(Center-weighted average metering) modes, the exposure is set at the
moment the picture is taken. (Pressing the shutter button halfway does not
lock the exposure.)
254
O Setting the Desired Exposure CompensationN
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken
(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation can be set in the <d>, <s>, and <f>
shooting modes. Although you can set the exposure compensation up
to ±5 stops in 1/3-stop increments for viewfinder shooting, the exposure
compensation indicator in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel can
display the setting only up to ±3 stops. If you want to set the exposure
compensation setting beyond ±3 stops, use the Quick Control (p.64) or
follow the instructions for [z2: Expo.comp./AEB] on page 257.
If the <a> mode and ISO Auto are both set, see page 252 to set the
exposure compensation.
1
Increased exposure for a
brighter image
Decreased exposure for a
darker image
Check the exposure.
 Press the shutter button halfway
(0) and check the exposure level
indicator.
the exposure compensation
2 Set
amount.
 While looking at the viewfinder or
LCD panel, turn the <5> dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch to the left, then turn the <5>
dial.
 For exposure compensation, the
<O> icon will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
the picture.
3 Take
 To cancel exposure compensation,
set the exposure level indicator <h/N>
to the standard exposure index (<a>/
<C>).
255
O Setting the Desired Exposure CompensationN
 For Live View and movie shooting, the exposure compensation can be
set only up to ±3 stops.
 If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.201) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
 The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you
set the power switch to <2>.
 After setting the exposure compensation amount, you can set the
<R> switch to the right to prevent the exposure compensation
amount from changing inadvertently.
 If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the
exposure level indicator will display <I> or <J>.
256
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N
By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically, the camera
brackets the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three
consecutive shots. This is called AEB.
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.
1
Select [Expo.comp./AEB].
 Under the [z2] tab, select
[Expo.comp./AEB], then press
<0>.
the AEB range.
2 Set
 Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB
AEB range
range. If you turn <5>, you can set
the exposure compensation amount.
 Press <0> to set it.
 When you exit the menu, the AEB
range will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
the picture.
3 Take
 Three bracketed shots will be taken
Standard exposure
Decreased exposure
according to the drive mode set in this
sequence: Standard exposure,
decreased exposure, and increased
exposure.
 AEB will not be automatically
canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step
2 to turn off the AEB range display.
Increased exposure
257
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N
 During AEB shooting, <A> will blink in the viewfinder.
 If the drive mode is set to <u> or <B>, press the shutter button three
times for each shot. When <o>, <i>, or <M> is set and you hold
down the shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be
taken consecutively and the camera will automatically stop shooting.
When <Q> or <k> is set, the three bracketed shots will be taken
consecutively after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.
 You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.
 If the AEB range exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the exposure level
indicator will display <I> or <J>.
 AEB cannot be used with flash, bulb exposures, or when Multi Shot
Noise Reduction or HDR Mode is set.
 AEB will be canceled automatically when you set the power switch to
<2> or when the flash is fully charged.
258
A Lock the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock)N
You can lock the exposure when the area of focus is to be different from
the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at
the same exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure,
then recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is
effective for shooting backlit subjects, etc.
1
Focus on the subject.
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The exposure setting will be
displayed.
the <A> button (0).
2 Press
 The <A> icon lights up in the
viewfinder to indicate that the
exposure setting is locked (AE lock).
 Each time you press the <A> button,
the current exposure setting is locked.
and take the picture.
3 Recompose
 If you want to take more pictures
while maintaining the AE lock, keep
holding down the <A> button and
press the shutter button to take
another picture.
AE Lock Effects
Metering Mode
(p.253)
q*
wre
AF Point Selection Method (p.106, 107)
Automatic Selection
Manual Selection
AE lock is applied at the AF
AE lock is applied at the
point that achieved focus.
selected AF point.
AE lock is applied at the center AF point.
* When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is implemented with
the exposure weighting centered on the center AF point.
AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.
259
F: Long (Bulb) Exposures
In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the
shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter
button. This photographic technique is called “bulb exposure”. Use bulb
exposures for night scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects
requiring long exposures.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <F>.
the desired aperture.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or the
viewfinder, turn the <6> or <5>
dial.
the picture.
3 Take
 The exposure will continue for as long
Elapsed exposure time
as you keep the shutter button
pressed completely.
 The elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the LCD panel.
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 Long exposures produce more noise than usual.
 If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed will be ISO 400 (p.179).
 For a bulb exposure, if you use both the self-timer and mirror lockup
instead of the bulb timer, keep pressing the shutter button completely
(self-timer delay time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter
button during the self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release
sound, but no picture will be taken. If you use the bulb timer under the
same shooting conditions, you need not keep holding down the shutter
button completely.
260
F: Long (Bulb) Exposures
 With [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise
generated during long exposures (p.204).
 For bulb exposures, using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended. You
can also use mirror lockup (p.276) in combination.
 You can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-80N3 or
Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (each sold separately, p.279).
 You can also use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.279) for
bulb exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button,
the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button
again to stop the bulb exposure.
H Bulb TimerN
You can preset the bulb exposure’s exposure time. With the bulb timer,
you need not keep holding down the shutter button during the bulb
exposure. This reduces camera shake.
The bulb timer can be set only in the <F> (Bulb) shooting mode. It
cannot be set (or will not function) in any other shooting mode.
1
Select [Bulb timer].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Bulb
timer], then press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press the
<B> button.
261
F: Long (Bulb) Exposures
the desired exposure time.
3 Set
 Select the hour, minute, or second.
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Set the desired number, then press
<0> (Returns to <s>).
[OK].
4 Select
 The set time will be displayed on the
menu screen.
 When you exit the menu, <H>
will be displayed on the LCD panel.
the picture.
5 Take
 Press the shutter button completely,
Elapsed exposure time
Bulb timer
and the bulb exposure will start and
continue until the set time elapses.
 During bulb timer shooting, <H>
will blink.
 To cancel the timer setting, set
[Disable] in step 2.
 While the bulb timer is operating, if you press the shutter button
completely and release it, the bulb exposure will stop.
 If you keep pressing the shutter button completely after the exposure
starts, the bulb exposure will continue even after the set exposure time
elapses. (The bulb exposure will not stop automatically when the set
exposure time elapses.)
 Doing any of the following will cancel the bulb timer (reverts to
[Disable]): Set the power switch to <2>, replace the battery, replace
the card, switch to movie shooting, or change the shooting mode to other
than <F>.
262
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
You can shoot still photos with clipped highlights and shadows reduced
for a high dynamic range of tones even in high-contrast scenes. HDR
shooting is effective for landscape and still-life shots.
With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures (standard
exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured
consecutively for each shot and then merged together
automatically. The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
1 Press the <b> button.
the HDR mode.
2 Select
 Select [w], then press <0>.
 The HDR mode screen will appear.
[Adjust dyn range].
3 Set
 Select the desired dynamic range
setting, then press <0>.
 Selecting [Auto] will have the
dynamic range set automatically
depending on the image’s overall
tonal range.
 The higher the number, the wider the
dynamic range will be.
 To exit HDR shooting, select [Disable
HDR].
[Effect].
4 Set
 Select the desired effect, then press
<0>.
 You can also set HDR shooting with [z3: HDR Mode].
263
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
Effects
 Natural
For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and
shadow details would otherwise be lost. Clipped highlights and
shadows will be reduced.
 Art standard
While the clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced more than
with [Natural], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation flatter to
have the picture look like a painting. The subject outlines will have
bright (or dark) edges.
 Art vivid
The colors are more saturated than with [Art standard], and the low
contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect.
 Art bold
The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and
the picture looks like an oil painting.
 Art embossed
The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are
decreased to make the picture look flat. The picture looks faded and
old. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.
Art standard
Art vivid
Art bold
Saturation
Standard
High
Higher
Low
Outline
emphasis
Standard
Weak
Strong
Stronger
Brightness
Standard
Standard
Standard
Dark
Flat
Flat
Flat
Flatter
Tone
Art embossed
Each effect will be applied based on the characteristics of the Picture Style
currently set (p.183).
264
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
[Continuous HDR].
5 Set
 Select either [1 shot only] or [Every
shot], then press <0>.
 With [1 shot only], HDR shooting will
be canceled automatically after the
shooting ends.
 With [Every shot], HDR shooting
continues until the setting in step 3 is
set to [Disable HDR].
[Auto Image Align].
6 Set
 For handheld shooting, select
[Enable]. When using a tripod, select
[Disable], then press <0>.
the images to be saved.
7 Set
 To save all three images and the
merged HDR image, select [All
images], then press <0>.
 To save only the HDR image, select
[HDR img only], then press <0>.
265
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
the picture.
8 Take
 HDR shooting is possible with
viewfinder shooting and Live View
shooting.
 When you press the shutter button
completely, three consecutive images
will be captured, and the HDR image
will be recorded to the card.
 If the image-recording quality is set to RAW, the HDR image will be
recorded in 73 quality. If the image-recording quality is set to
RAW+JPEG, the HDR image will be recorded in the JPEG quality set.
 HDR shooting is not possible with expanded ISO speeds (L, H1, H2).
HDR shooting is possible within ISO 100 - ISO 32000 (varies depending
on the settings of [Minimum] and [Maximum] under [Range for stills]).
 The flash will not fire during HDR shooting.
 HDR shooting will automatically have the following set to [Disable]:
[Distortion correction] under [z1: Lens aberration correction],
[z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], and [z3: Highlight tone priority].
 AEB cannot be set.
 If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave
afterimages.
 In HDR shooting, 3 images are captured with different shutter speeds set
automatically. Therefore, even in the <s> and <a> shooting modes,
the shutter speed will be shifted based on the shutter speed you set.
 To prevent camera shake, a high ISO speed may be set.
 You can set the camera to display <z> in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel for when the HDR mode is set (p.489).
266
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
 When shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable],
AF point display information (p.402) and Dust Delete Data (p.460) will
not be appended to the image.
 If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to
[Enable], image periphery will be slightly trimmed and resolution will be
slightly lowered. Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to
camera shake, etc., auto image alignment may not take effect. Note that
when shooting with excessively bright (or dark) exposure settings, auto
image alignment may not work properly.
 If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to
[Disable], the 3 images may not be properly aligned and the HDR effect
may become smaller. Using a tripod is recommended.
 Auto image alignment may not work properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
 The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced
correctly. Irregular colors, irregular exposure or noise may appear.
 HDR shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural
color reproduction of the illuminated areas.
 With HDR shooting, the images will be merged, then saved to the card,
so it may take some time. Therefore, it will take a longer time to record
the HDR image to the card than with normal shooting. During the
processing of the images, “buSY” will be displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD panel, and you cannot take another picture until the
processing is completed.
 If you set HDR shooting and then switch to movie shooting, the HDR
shooting setting may be canceled (the [Adjust dyn range] setting may
be changed to [Disable HDR]).
267
P Multiple ExposuresN
You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image. With
Live View shooting (p.297), you can see in real time how the exposures
are merged when you shoot multiple-exposure images.
1 Press the <b> button.
Multiple exposure.
2 Select
 Select [P], then press <0>.
 The multiple exposure setting screen
will appear.
[Multiple exposure].
3 Set
 Select [On:Func/Ctrl] or
[On:ContShtng], then press <0>.
 To exit shooting multiple exposures,
select [Disable].
 On: Func/Ctrl (Function and control priority)
Useful when you want to shoot multiple exposures while checking
the result as you proceed. During continuous shooting, the
continuous shooting speed will decrease greatly.
 On: ContShtng (Continuous shooting priority)
Geared for continuous multiple-exposure shooting of a moving
subject. Continuous shooting is possible, but the following
operations are disabled during shooting: menu viewing, image
review after image capture, image playback, and undo last image
(p.274). Also, during Live View shooting, the image displayed will not
be the final merged image.
Note that only the multiple-exposure image will be saved. (The
single exposures merged in the multiple-exposure image will not be
saved.)
You can also set multiple exposure with [z3: Multiple exposure].
268
P Multiple ExposuresN
[Multi-expos ctrl].
4 Set
 Select the desired multiple-exposure
control method, then press <0>.
 Additive
The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively.
Based on the [No. of exposures], set a negative exposure
compensation. Follow the basic guide below to set the exposure
compensation amount.
Exposure Compensation Setting Guide by Number of
Exposures
Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures:
-2 stops
 Average
Based on the [No. of exposures], negative exposure compensation
is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot
multiple exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s
background will be automatically controlled to obtain the standard
exposure.
 Bright/Dark
The brightness (or darkness) of the base image and the images to
be added are compared at the same position, and then the bright (or
dark) part will be left in the picture. Depending on the overlapping
colors, the colors may be mixed depending on the brightness (or
darkness) ratio between the compared images.
the [No. of exposures].
5 Set
 Select the number of exposures, then
press <0>.
 You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures.
269
P Multiple ExposuresN
the images to be saved.
6 Set
 To save all the single exposures and
the merged multiple-exposure image,
select [All images], then press <0>.
 To save only the merged multipleexposure image, select [Result
only], then press <0>.
[Continue Mult-exp].
7 Set
 Select either [1 shot only] or
[Continuously], then press <0>.
 With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure
shooting will be canceled
automatically after the shooting ends.
 With [Continuously], multipleexposure shooting continues until the
setting in step 3 is set to [Disable].
the first exposure.
8 Shoot
 When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, the
Remaining number
of exposures
270
captured image will be displayed.
 The <P> icon will blink.
 You can check the remaining
exposures in brackets [ ] displayed in
the viewfinder or on the screen.
 Pressing the <x> button enables
you to view the captured image
(p.274).
P Multiple ExposuresN
subsequent exposures.
9 Shoot
 When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, the
merged multiple-exposure image will
be displayed.
 Live View shooting with [On:Func/
Ctrl] set, the multiple-exposure
images merged so far will be
displayed. By pressing the <B>
button, you can display only the Live
View image.
 Multiple-exposure shooting will end
when the set number of exposures
are taken. With continuous shooting,
if you keep holding down the shutter
button, the shooting will stop (or
pause) after the set numbers of
exposures are taken.
 When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, you can press the <x> button to view the
multiple exposures taken so far or delete the last single exposure
(p.274).
 The shooting information for the last shot will be recorded and appended
to the multiple-exposure image.
271
P Multiple ExposuresN
 The image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed
noise reduction, color space, etc. set for the first single exposure will also
be set for the subsequent exposures.
 During multiple-exposure shooting, the settings will be automatically
switched to [Disable] for the following: all the items of [z1: Lens
aberration correction], [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], and [z3:
Highlight tone priority].
 If [z3: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for
shooting.
 With [On:Func/Ctrl] and [Additive] set, the noise, irregular colors,
banding, etc. of the image displayed during shooting may differ from the
multiple-exposure image recorded in the end.
 With multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more
noticeable the noise, irregular colors, and banding will be.
 If [Additive] is set, the image processing after taking the multiple
exposures will take time. (The access lamp will light up longer.)
 If you perform Live View shooting with [Additive] set, the Live View
function will stop automatically when the multiple-exposure shooting
ends.
 In step 9, the brightness and noise of the multiple-exposure image
displayed during Live View shooting will be different from those of the
final multiple-exposure image recorded.
 If [On:ContShtng] is set, let go of the shutter button after shooting the
set number of exposures.
 Doing any of the following will cancel the multiple-exposure shooting:
Setting the power switch to <2>, replacing the battery, replacing the
card, or switching to movie shooting.
 During multiple-exposure shooting, [Clean nowf] or [Clean
manually] under [53: Sensor cleaning] cannot be selected.
 If you switch the shooting mode to <A> or <w>, <x>, or <y> during
shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will end.
 If you connect the camera to a computer, multiple-exposure shooting will
not be possible. If you connect the camera to a computer during
shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will end.
272
P Multiple ExposuresN
Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the Card
You can select a 1 image recorded on the card as the first single
exposure. The image data of the selected 1 image will remain intact.
You can only select 1 images. You cannot select 41/61 or
JPEG images.
1
Select [Select image for multi.
expo.].
 The images on the card will be
displayed.
the first image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be used as the first single
exposure, then press <0>.
 Select [OK].
 The file number of the selected image will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen.
the picture.
3 Take
 When you select the first image, the number of remaining
exposures as set with [No. of exposures] will decrease by 1. For
example, if [No. of exposures] is 3, you can shoot two
exposures.
 The following cannot be selected as the first single exposure: Images
shot with [z3: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable], images whose
[z5: Aspect ratio] is set to any setting other than [3:2] (p.310), or
images having cropping information (p.491).
 [Disable] will be applied for [z1: Lens aberration correction] and
[z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] regardless of the settings of the 1
image selected as the first single exposure.
 The ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, color
space, etc. set for the first 1 image will also be applied for the
subsequent images.
 If Picture Style is [Auto] for the 1 image selected as the first 1
image, [Standard] will be applied for shooting.
 You cannot select an image taken with another camera.
273
P Multiple ExposuresN
 You can also select a 1 multiple-exposure image as the first single
exposure.
 If you select [Deselect img], the image selection will be canceled.
Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting
When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set and you
have not finished shooting the set
number of exposures, you can press the
<x> button to check the current
exposure level, overlap alignment, and
overall effect of the merged multipleexposure image. (Not possible when
[On:ContShtng] is set.)
If you press the <L> button, the
operations possible during multipleexposure shooting will be displayed.
Operation
Description
q Undo last image
Deletes the last image you shot (shoot another
image). The number of remaining exposures
will increase by 1.
W Save and exit
If [Save source imgs: All images] is set, all of
the single exposures and the merged multipleexposure image will be saved before exiting.
If [Save source imgs: Result only] is set, only
the multiple-exposure image merged so far will
be saved before exiting.
r Exit without saving
Multiple-exposure shooting will end without
saving the images shot.
2 Return to previous screen
The screen before you pressed the <L> button
will reappear.
During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multipleexposure images.
274
P Multiple ExposuresN
FAQ
 Are there any restrictions on the image-recording quality?
All JPEG image-recording quality settings can be selected. If 41
or 61 is set, the merged multiple-exposure image will be saved
as a 1 image.
Image Quality Setting
Single Exposures
Merged Multiple-Exposure
JPEG
JPEG
JPEG
1
1
1
41/61
41/61
1
1+JPEG
1+JPEG
1+JPEG
41/61+JPEG
41/61+JPEG
1+JPEG
 Can I merge images recorded on the card?
With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the first single
exposure from the images recorded on the card (p.273). Note that
you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.
 Are multiple exposures possible with Live View shooting?
You can shoot multiple exposures with Live View shooting (p.297).
However, if [On:ContShtng] is set, the captured images will not be
displayed as a multiple exposure.
 What file numbers are used for saving merged multiple-exposures?
If it is set to save all images, the merged multiple-exposure image file
number will be the serial number coming after the file number of the final
single exposure used to create the merged multiple-exposure image.
 Will auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure shooting?
As long as [52: Auto power off] is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the power will turn off automatically after approx. 30 min.
If the auto power off takes effect, multiple-exposure shooting will
end, and multiple-exposure settings will be canceled.
Before starting the multiple-exposure shooting, the auto power off
will take effect at the time as set with the camera, and multipleexposure settings will be canceled.
275
2 Mirror LockupN
Camera vibrations caused by the mirror’s reflex action when the picture
is taken is called “mirror shock”. Mirror lockup keeps the mirror up
before and during exposure to reduce blur caused by camera
vibrations. Useful when shooting close-ups (macro photography), using
a super telephoto lens, shooting at slow shutter speeds, etc.
1
Select [Mirror lockup].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Mirror
lockup], then press <0>.
2 Select [Enable].
on the subject, then press
3 Focus
the shutter button completely.
 The mirror will swing up.
4
Press the shutter button
completely again.
 The picture is taken and the mirror
goes back down.
276
2 Mirror LockupN
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 When shooting with mirror lockup in very bright light, such as at the
beach or a ski slope on a sunny day, take the picture promptly after
mirror lockup is stabilized.
 During mirror lockup, shooting function settings and menu operations are
disabled.
 When [Enable] is set, single shooting will take effect even if the drive
mode is set to continuous.
 You can also use the self-timer with mirror lockup.
 If approx. 30 sec. elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back
down automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely locks up the
mirror again.
 When shooting with mirror lockup, using a tripod and Remote Switch RS80N3 or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (each sold separately) is
recommended (p.279).
 You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.279) with mirror
lockup. Setting the remote controller to a 2-sec. delay is recommended.
277
Using the Eyepiece Cover
When you take a picture without looking through the viewfinder, such as
when you use the self-timer, bulb exposure, or a remote switch, stray
light entering the viewfinder may cause the picture to look dark
(underexposed). To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.37)
attached to the camera strap.
Note that attaching the eyepiece cover is not necessary in Live View
shooting or movie shooting.
1
Detach the eyecup.
 While grasping both sides of the
eyecup, slide it upward to detach it.
the eyepiece cover.
2 Attach
 Slide the eyepiece cover down into
the eyepiece groove to attach it.
 After you finish shooting, detach the
eyepiece cover and attach the
eyecup.
278
Using a Remote Switch
You can connect any EOS accessory equipped with an N3-type terminal
such as the Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote Controller TC80N3 (each sold separately) to shoot with the camera (p.525).
To operate the accessory, refer to its Instruction Manual.
1 Open the terminal cover.
the plug to the remote
2 Connect
control terminal.
 Connect the plug as shown in the
illustration.
 To disconnect the plug, grasp the
silver part and pull it out.
R Remote Control Shooting
With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately), you
can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet
away from the camera (when you are facing the front
of the camera). You can either shoot immediately or
with a 2-sec. delay.
1 Focus on the subject.
the lens’s focus mode switch
2 Set
to <MF>.
 You can also shoot with <f>.
3 Press the <o> button (9).
279
R Remote Control Shooting
the self-timer/remote
4 Select
controller.
 Look at the LCD panel or in the
viewfinder and turn the <5> dial to
select <Q> or <k>.
the remote controller’s
5 Press
transmit button.
Remote
control
sensor
 Point the remote controller toward the
camera’s remote control sensor, then
press the transmit button.
 The self-timer lamp lights up and the
picture is taken.
 Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by
triggering the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the camera away from
such light sources.
 If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera and
operate it, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter
inadvertently.
 If flash light is emitted from a flash on another camera around this
camera, it may cause camera malfunction by triggering the shutter
inadvertently. Do not expose the remote control sensor to flash light from
a flash on another camera.
 You can also use Remote Controller RC-1 and RC-5.
 Remote control shooting is also possible with devices such as an EXseries Speedlite equipped with a remote-release function (sold
separately).
280
H Interval Timer Shooting
With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and the number
of shots. The camera will repeat taking one shot with the set interval
until the set number of shots are taken.
1
Select [Interval timer].
 Under the [z4] tab (the [z2] tab in
<A> mode), select [Interval timer],
then press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press the
<B> button.
the shooting interval and
3 Set
number of shots.
 Select the number to be set (hours:
minutes: seconds / number of shots).
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Set the desired number, then press
<0> (Returns to <s>).
 Interval
Settable from [00:00:01] to [99:59:59].
 No. of shots
Settable from [01] to [99]. If you set [00], the camera will keep
shooting until you stop the interval timer.
281
H Interval Timer Shooting
Shooting
interval
Number of
shots
[OK].
4 Select
 The interval timer settings will be
displayed on the menu screen.
 When you exit the menu, <H>
will be displayed on the LCD panel.
Interval timer
the picture.
5 Take
 First shot is taken and shooting
continues according to the interval
timer settings.
 During interval timer shooting,
<H> will blink.
 After the set number of shots are
taken, the interval timer shooting will
stop and be automatically canceled.
 Using a tripod is recommended.
 Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
 After the interval timer shooting starts, you can still press the shutter
button completely to take a picture as usual. However, approx. 5 sec.
before the next interval timer shooting, the shooting function settings,
menu operation, image playback, and other operations will be
suspended, and the camera will be ready to shoot.
 If a picture is being taken or an image is being processed when the next
shot is scheduled on the interval timer, the shot set for that time will be
skipped. The camera will thereby shoot fewer shots than the number set
for interval timer shooting.
 Auto power off operates with the interval timer. The power will
automatically turn on approx. 1 min. before the next shot.
 Interval timer shooting can also be combined with AEB, WB bracketing,
multiple exposures, and HDR mode.
 You can stop the interval timer shooting by selecting [Disable] or turning
the power switch to <2>.
282
H Interval Timer Shooting
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 If the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>, the camera will not shoot
when focus is not achieved. Setting it to <MF> and focusing manually is
recommended.
 Live View shooting, movie shooting, or bulb exposures cannot be
performed with interval timer.
 For prolonged interval timer shooting, using the household power outlet
accessories (sold separately, p.530) is recommended.
 If a shutter speed longer than the shooting interval, such as a long
exposure, is set, the camera cannot shoot with the set interval. The
camera will thereby shoot fewer still photos than the number set for
interval timer shooting. Also, the number of shots may decrease when
the shutter speed and the shooting interval are nearly the same.
 If the image recording time on the card is longer than the set shooting
interval due to the shooting functions set, card performance, etc., some
of the shots may not be taken with the set intervals.
 If you use flash with interval timer shooting, set an interval longer than
the flash’s recycling time. If the interval is too short, the flash may not
fire.
 If the shooting interval is too short, the camera may not take a picture or
may capture an image without autofocusing.
 Interval timer shooting will be canceled and reset to [Disable] if you do
any of the following: Set the power switch to <2>, display the Live
View shooting or movie shooting screen, set the shooting mode to <F>,
<w>, <x>, or <y>, or use EOS Utility (EOS software, p.596).
 After interval timer shooting starts, you cannot use remote control
shooting (p.279) or remote-release shooting with an EOS-dedicated,
external Speedlite.
 If your eye will not remain on the viewfinder eyepiece during interval
timer shooting, attach the eyepiece cover (p.278). If stray light enters the
viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
283
284
7
Flash Photography
This chapter explains how to shoot with external EXseries Speedlites (sold separately) and how to set
Speedlite settings on the camera’s menu screen.
285
D Flash Photography
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites
Using an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash
photography easy.
For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all
the features of EX-series Speedlites.
To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions on the camera’s
menu screen, see pages 289-295.
 Flash exposure compensation
In the same way as normal exposure compensation, flash output
can be adjusted. You can set flash exposure compensation up to
±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
Press the camera’s <m> button, then turn the <5> dial while
looking in the viewfinder or at the LCD panel.
 FE lock
This enables you to attain an appropriate flash exposure for
a specific part of the subject. Aim the viewfinder center over
the subject, press the camera’s <B> button, then compose
the shot and take the picture.
286
D Flash Photography
If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.201) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased flash exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
If it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus, the EOS-dedicated, external
Speedlite will automatically emit the AF-assist beam as necessary.
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series
 With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> manual exposure or
<f> aperture-priority AE and adjust the aperture setting before
shooting.
 When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the
manual flash mode.
287
D Flash Photography
Non-Canon Flash Units
 Sync Speed
The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at
1/200 sec. and slower speeds. With large studio flash units, the flash
duration is longer than that of a compact flash unit and varies
depending on the model. Be sure to check before shooting if flash
sync is properly performed by test shooting at a sync speed of
approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec.
 PC Terminal
 The camera’s PC terminal can be
used with flash units having a sync
cord. The terminal has locking
threads to prevent the cord from
falling off.
 The camera’s PC terminal has no
polarity. You can connect any sync
cord regardless of its polarity.
 Cautions for Live View Shooting
If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z6:
Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.312). The flash will not be fired if it
is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
 If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to
another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and
malfunction may result.
 Do not connect to the camera’s PC terminal any flash unit with an output
voltage of 250 V or more.
 Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit to the camera’s hot shoe. It may
not be fired.
A flash unit attached to the camera’s hot shoe and a flash unit connected to
the PC terminal can both be used at the same time.
288
3 Setting the Flash FunctionN
With an EX-series Speedlite having compatible flash function settings,
you can use the camera’s menu screen to set the Speedlite’s functions
and Custom Functions. Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn
on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions.
For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual.
1
Select [External Speedlite
control].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [External
Speedlite control], then press <0>.
 The external Speedlite control screen
will appear.
the desired item.
2 Select
 Select the menu option to be set, then
press <0>.
Flash Firing
To enable flash photography, set
[Enable]. To enable only the AF-assist
beam to be emitted, set [Disable].
E-TTL II Flash Metering
For normal flash exposures, set it to
[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the
flash exposure will be averaged for the
entire metered scene. Depending on the
scene, flash exposure compensation
may be necessary. This setting is for
advanced users.
289
3 Setting the Flash FunctionN
Flash Sync. Speed in Av Mode
You can set the flash-sync speed for
flash photography in the <f> aperturepriority AE mode.

: Auto
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200
sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync is
also possible.

: 1/200-1/60sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.
It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,
the background may come out dark.

: 1/200 sec. (fixed)
The flash sync speed is fixed at 1/200 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/200-1/60sec.
auto]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out
darker than with [1/200-1/60sec. auto].
If [1/200-1/60sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] is set, high-speed sync is not
possible in the <f> mode.
290
3 Setting the Flash FunctionN
Flash Function Settings
The screen display and setting options will vary depending on the
Speedlite model, current flash mode, Speedlite’s Custom Function
settings, etc.
For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual.
Sample display
Wireless functions/
Flash ratio control
Flash mode
Shutter
synchronization
Flash zoom
(Flash coverage)
Flash exposure
bracketing
Flash exposure
compensation
 Flash mode
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.
[E-TTL II flash metering] is the standard
mode of EX-series Speedlites for
automatic flash shooting.
[Manual flash] is for setting the
Speedlite’s [Flash output level]
yourself.
Regarding other flash modes, refer to the
Instruction Manual of a Speedlite
compatible with the functions.
291
3 Setting the Flash FunctionN
 Wireless functions / Flash ratio control
Wireless (multiple) flash shooting is
possible with radio or optical
transmission.
For details on wireless flash, refer to the
Instruction Manual of a Speedlite
compatible with wireless flash shooting.
With a macro flash (MR-14EX II, etc.)
compatible with flash function settings,
you can set the flash ratio between flash
tubes or flash heads A and B, or use
wireless flash with additional
receiver units.
For details on flash ratio control, refer to
the macro flash’s Instruction Manual.
 Flash zoom (Flash coverage)
With Speedlites having a zooming flash
head, you can set the flash coverage.
Normally, set this to [AUTO] so that the
camera will automatically set the flash
coverage to match the lens focal length.
292
3 Setting the Flash FunctionN
 Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [First-curtain
synchronization] so that the flash fires
immediately after the exposure starts.
If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the flash will be fired right
before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter
speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night
with a more natural feel. When second-curtain synchronization is set
together with [ETTL II], the flash will be fired twice in a row: once when
you press the shutter button completely and once right before the end
of the exposure.
If [High-speed synchronization] is set, the flash can be used at all
shutter speeds. This is effective when you want to shoot with
background blur (open aperture) in locations such as outdoors in
daylight.
 Flash exposure compensation
You can set flash exposure
compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop
increments.
For details, refer to the Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual.
 Flash exposure bracketing
While changing the flash output
automatically, three shots will be taken.
For details, refer to the Instruction
Manual of a Speedlite equipped with
flash exposure bracketing.
293
3 Setting the Flash FunctionN
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25
sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain
synchronization will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain
synchronization] is set.
 With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings,
you can only set the following: [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], and
[Flash exposure compensation] under [Flash function settings].
([Shutter synchronization] can also be set with certain EX-series
Speedlites.)
 If flash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite, you cannot set
the flash exposure compensation with the camera. If it is set with both
the camera and Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.
Flash Custom Function Settings
For details on the Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
(sold separately) Instruction Manual.
1
Select [Flash C.Fn settings].
the desired functions.
2 Set
 Select the number, then press <0>.
 Select the setting, then press <0>.
With an EX-series Speedlite, the Speedlite will always fire at full output if the
[Flash metering mode] Custom Function is set to [TTL flash metering]
(autoflash).
294
3 Setting the Flash FunctionN
Clearing Flash Function Settings / Flash C.Fn Settings
1
Select [Clear settings].
the settings to be cleared.
2 Select
 Select [Clear flash settings] or
[Clear all Speedlite C.Fn’s], then
press <0>.
 On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK]. Then the flash settings or
Custom Function settings will all be
cleared.
The Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled on the
camera’s [External Speedlite control] screen. Set it directly on the
Speedlite.
295
296
8
Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
You can shoot while viewing the
image on the camera’s LCD
monitor. This is called “Live View
shooting”.
Live View shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <A>.
 If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the
LCD monitor, camera shake may cause blurred images.
Using a tripod is recommended in such cases.
Remote Live View Shooting
With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.596) installed on your computer,
you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely
while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.
297
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
1
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image.
2 Display
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 The Live View image will be displayed
in the brightness level closely
matching that of the actual image to
be captured.
the shooting mode.
3 Select
 Turn the Mode Dial to select the
shooting mode.
on the subject.
4 Focus
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method (p.316).
 You can also tap on the screen to
select the face or subject (p.327).
the picture.
5 Take
 Press the shutter button completely.
 The picture is taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
 When the playback display ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
 Press the <0> button to exit the
Live View shooting.
298
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Enabling Live View Shooting
Set [z5: Live View shoot.] (the [z3]
tab in <A> mode) to [Enable].
Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
Possible shots
Approx. 300 shots
Approx. 280 shots
 The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N and
CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
 With Battery Grip BG-E20 (sold separately) loaded with two LP-E6N battery
packs, the number of possible shots will be doubled.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the total continuous Live View
shooting time will be as follows: At room temperature (23°C/73°F): Approx. 2
hr. 40 min., At low temperatures (0°C/32°F): Approx. 2 hr. 30 min.
Continuous Shooting Display
For <o> High-speed continuous shooting during Live View shooting
with the image-recording quality set to JPEG or 1 (except 41 and
61), holding down the shutter button will display (played back) the
captured images continuously. When the continuous shooting ends
(shutter button is returned to halfway position), the Live View image will
be displayed.
Depending on the shooting conditions such as when an external Speedlite is
used or shooting long exposures, the captured images may not be
displayed (played back) continuously.
299
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 “General Live View Shooting Cautions” are on pages 331-332.
 The image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with image-recording quality
set to JPEG 73 and aspect ratio set to 3:2).
 You can set exposure compensation up to ±3 stops by setting the
<R> switch to the left and turning the <5> dial (except in the
<A> mode).
 To check the depth of field, press the depth-of-field preview button.
 If you shoot with the image-recording quality set to 41 or 61,
“BUSY” will be displayed and shooting will be disabled temporarily.
 You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.
 When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot
will be taken. Also, the time it takes to take the picture after you press the
shutter button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder
shooting.
 If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn
off automatically after the time set in [52: Auto power off] (p.76). If [52:
Auto power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end
automatically after approx. 30 min. (camera power remains on).
 With the HDMI cable HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display the
Live View image on a TV set (p.432). Note that no sound will be output. If
the picture does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [53: Video
system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the
video system of your TV set).
 You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.279) for Live
View shooting.
300
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Information Display
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will change.
Battery level
Maximum burst
Possible shots/Seconds
remaining on self-timer
HDR shooting/
Multiple exposures/
Dual Pixel RAW
shooting/
Multi Shot Noise
Reduction
Shooting mode/
Scene icon
AF method
AF operation
Drive mode
Temperature warning
Number of remaining multiple exposures
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Electronic level
Histogram display
Recording and playback/
Playback card
Cards
Quick Control button
Image-recording quality
White balance/
White balance correction
Metering mode
Picture Style
Switch to
automatic AF
point selection
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Exposure simulation
Touch shutter
AE lock
Wi-Fi function
Shutter speed
Eye-Fi card transmission
status
Aperture
Flash ready/Flash off/
High-speed sync
Exposure compensation
Magnify button
AEB/FEB
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
GPS acquisition status
Exposure level indicator
Flash exposure compensation
 The display will show only the settings currently applied.
301
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Warnings
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature contact
burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or
very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.
 The histogram can be displayed when [z5: Expo. simulation] is set to
[Enable] (p.311).
 You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button
(p.82). Note that if the AF method is set to [u+Tracking] or if the camera
is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level cannot
be displayed.
 When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image
is displayed at the brightness level closely matching that of the actual
image to be captured.
 If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at
a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of lowor bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect
the exposure setting. Note that the noise may be more noticeable than
the actual image recorded.
 Exposure simulation (p.311) will not work with bulb or flash shooting,
Multi Shot Noise Reduction, or the HDR mode. The <g> icon and
histogram will be displayed in gray. The image will be displayed on the
LCD monitor at the standard brightness. The histogram may not be
properly displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.
302
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Scene Icons
In the <A> shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and
sets everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene
type is indicated on the upper left of the screen.
Subject
Portrait*1
Movement
Background
Non-portrait
Nature and
Outdoor
Scene
Close*2
Movement
Background
Color
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky
Included
Light blue
Backlit
*3
Sunset
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark
With
Tripod
Dark blue
*4*5
*3
*4*5
*3
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an extension
tube or close-up lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match
the actual scene.
303
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
*3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.
*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply:
The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on
a tripod.
*5:Displayed with any of the lenses below:
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
Image Stabilizer lenses released in or after 2012.
*4+*5:If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow down.
Final Image Simulation
Final image simulation is a function that shows the Live View image with
the effects of the current settings for Picture Style, white balance, and
other shooting functions applied.
The Live View image will automatically reflect the function settings listed
below. However, it may be slightly different from the resulting image.
Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting
 Picture Style
* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be
reflected.











White balance
White balance correction
Metering mode
Exposure (with [z5: Expo. simulation: Enable] set)
Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Distortion correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Highlight tone priority
Aspect ratio (Image area confirmation)
304
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
B Button Display Options
You can set the information to be displayed on the image for when you
press the <B> button during Live View shooting or movie shooting.
Select [zbutton LV display
options].
 Under the [53] tab, select
[zbutton LV display options],
then press <0>.
 Live View info switch setting
1
Select [Live View info switch
setting].
a number.
2 Select
 The numbers indicate the number of
times to press the <B> button.
 Select a number for the displayed
information you want to change, then
press the <B> button.
 To remove a number’s checkmark
[X], press <0>. Note that you
cannot remove the [X] for all four
display options.
The default settings are shown below.
1
2
3
4
I
Information / Number
Basic shooting info
k
k
k
–
J
Detailed shooting info
–
k
k
–
K
On-screen buttons
k
k
k
–
L
Histogram
–
–
k
–
M
Electronic level
–
–
k
–
305
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
the options.
3 Edit
 Select what you want to be displayed
and press <0> to add a checkmark
[X].
 For the information you do not want to
be displayed, press <0> to remove
the checkmark [X].
 Select [OK] to register the setting.
 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as necessary.
 Histogram display
• Brightness/RGB
The histogram (p.402) to be displayed when you press the <B>
button can be either the [Brightness] or [RGB] histogram.
Under [Histogram disp], select
[Brightness/RGB] and select
[Brightness] or [RGB].
• Display size
You can change the display size of the histogram.
Under [Histogram disp], select [Display
size] and select [Large] or [Small].
 Reset
In step 1, if you select [Reset], the [53: zbutton LV display
options] setting will be cleared.
306
Shooting Function Settings
B/q/R/f/y/i/A/P/w Settings
When the Live View image is displayed, if you press the <n>,
<o>, <m>, or <b> button, the setting screen will appear on
the LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the
respective shooting function.
 By pressing the <n> button and then the <B> button, you
can set white balance shift and white balance bracketing.
 After you press the <b> button and select <P> or <w>, the
menu screen for Multiple exposure or HDR mode will appear.
With Live View shooting, the <B> and <M> drive modes cannot be set.
Also, the continuous shooting mode set for viewfinder shooting will not be
applied to Live View shooting.
When you set w (Partial metering) or r (Spot metering), a metering circle
will be displayed at the center of the screen.
307
Shooting Function Settings
Q Quick Control
In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, and <F> modes, you can set the AF
method, AF operation, Drive mode, Metering mode, Recording/
playing back card and image quality, White balance, Picture Style,
and Auto Lighting Optimizer.
In the <A> mode, only the functions in bold above can be set.
1
2
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The settable functions will be
displayed.
Select a function and set it.
Use <9> to select a function.
The setting of the selected function is displayed on the screen.
Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it.
To set the RAW image-recording quality, press <0>.
Press the <B> button for the following: To select the card for
recording and playback, to set the white balance shift or white
balance bracketing, or to set Picture Style parameters.
 To set Auto white balance, select [Q], then press <0>.
 To return to Live View shooting, press <0> or the <Q> button.
 You can also select [2] to return to Live View shooting.





With [AF operation] set to [Servo AF], you cannot select 41 or 61
when setting a RAW quality for [Recording quality].
308
3 Menu Function Settings
z5
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <A>, menu
options exclusive to the Live View
shooting will appear under the [z5] and
[z6] tabs (the [z3] tab in <A>
mode).
The settable functions on this menu screen apply only to Live View
shooting. They do not work with viewfinder shooting (settings are
disabled).
 Live View shooting
You can set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].
 AF method
You can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone Single]. See pages 316-322 for the AF method.
 Touch Shutter
You can set touch shutter to [Enable] or [Disable]. Just by tapping
on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the picture
automatically. For details, see page 327.
 Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you
compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the
subject.
309
3 Menu Function Settings
 Aspect ratioN
The image’s aspect ratio can be set to [3:2], [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1].
The area surrounding the Live View image is masked in black when
the following aspect ratios are set: [4:3] [16:9] [1:1].
JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio. RAW images
will always be saved with the [3:2] aspect ratio. Since the aspect
ratio information is appended to the RAW image, the image can be
created in the respective aspect ratio when you process the RAW
image with the camera or Digital Photo Professional software
(p.596). If you playback the RAW image with the camera, frame lines
indicating the aspect ratio (image area) will be displayed.
Image
Quality
3
4
a
b
c
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)
3:2
4:3
16:9
1:1
6720x4480
5952x4480*
6720x3776*
4480x4480
(30.1 megapixels) (26.7 megapixels) (25.4 megapixels) (20.1 megapixels)
4464x2976
3968x2976
4464x2512*
2976x2976
(13.3 megapixels) (11.8 megapixels) (11.2 megapixels) (8.9 megapixels)
3360x2240
2976x2240*
3360x1888*
2240x2240
(7.5 megapixels) (6.7 megapixels) (6.3 megapixels) (5.0 megapixels)
1920x1280
1696x1280*
1920x1080
1280x1280
(2.5 megapixels) (2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)
720x480
640x480
720x408*
480x480
(350,000 pixels) (310,000 pixels) (290,000 pixels) (230,000 pixels)
 The asterisked image-recording quality settings do not match the
respective aspect ratio exactly.
 The photo image area displayed for the asterisked aspect ratio may be
slightly different from the actual photo image area. Check the captured
images on the LCD monitor when shooting.
 The picture will be taken at the [3:2] aspect ratio setting for the multipleexposures.
310
3 Menu Function Settings
 Exposure simulationN
Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness
(exposure) of the actual image will look.
• Enable (g)
The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual
brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure
compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.
• During e
Normally, the image is displayed at the standard brightness to
make the Live View image easy to see (E). The image will be
displayed with a brightness (exposure) close to that of the actual
image to be captured only while you hold down the depth-of-field
preview button (g).
• Disable (E)
The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live
View image easy to see. Even if you set exposure compensation,
the image is displayed at the standard brightness.
311
3 Menu Function Settings
z6N
 Silent LV shootingN
• Mode 1
Mechanical sound during shooting is suppressed, compared with
viewfinder shooting. Continuous shooting is also possible.
• Mode 2
When the shutter button is pressed completely, only one shot will
be taken. While you keep holding down the shutter button, the
camera operation will be suspended. Then when you return to the
shutter button’s halfway position, the camera operation will
resume. The release sound at the moment of shooting can thereby
be minimized. Even if continuous shooting is set, only a single shot
will be taken.
• Disable
With the drive mode set to <o> and [AF operation] set to
[One-Shot AF], you can shoot up to the maximum continuous
shooting speed of approx. 7.0 shots/sec.
Be sure to set it to [Disable] if you use a TS-E lens for shifting
or tilting the lens or if you use an extension tube. If [Mode 1] or
[Mode 2] is set, the standard exposure may not be obtained, or an
irregular exposure may result.
312
3 Menu Function Settings
 With [Mode 2] set, continuous shooting will not work even if you set the
drive mode to <o> or <i>.
 If you use flash with the flash mode set to E-TTL II/E-TTL autoflash,
shutter release will be performed by the same internal operation
mechanism as with viewfinder shooting. Therefore, shooting while
suppressing the mechanical sound will not be possible (regardless of the
[Silent LV shoot.] setting).
 When using a non-Canon flash unit, set it to [Disable]. The flash will not
be fired if it is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
 If [Mode 2] is set and you use a remote controller (p.279), the operation
will be the same as with [Mode 1].
 Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
Selecting any of the items below will cancel Live View shooting. To start Live
View shooting again, press the <0> button.
• [z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning], [55: Clear all camera
settings], or [55: zfirmware ver.].
313
Selecting the AF OperationN
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting
conditions or subject. In the <A> mode, [One Shot AF] is set
automatically.
1
Press the <o> button.
the AF operation.
2 Select
 Turn the <6> dial to select the
desired AF operation, then press
<0>.
X: One-Shot AF
K: Servo AF
 Settable only for Live View shooting (not settable for movie shooting).
 If focus cannot be achieved, the AF point will turn orange. If this occurs,
the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed
completely. Recompose the shot and try to focus again. Or, see
“Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” (p.324).
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus only once.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green.
 The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button
halfway, allowing you to recompose the image before taking the picture.
 For flash photography, the continuous shooting speed will become
slower.
If [z1: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is
achieved.
314
Selecting the AF OperationN
Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold
down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on
the subject continuously.
 When the drive mode is set to <o> for high-speed continuous
shooting, the maximum continuous shooting speed will be approx.
4.3 shots/sec. The pictures will be taken with priority given to the
continuous shooting speed. With the <i> low-speed continuous
shooting setting, “Subject-tracking priority” will be used for shooting.
 For flash photography, the continuous shooting speed will become
slower.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue.
 The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
 When [AF method] is set to [u+Tracking] or [Flexizone - Multi],
focusing will be continuous as long as the area frame can track the
subject.
 Depending on the lens used, the distance to the subject, and the
subject’s speed, the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus.
 Zooming during continuous shooting may throw off the focus. Zoom first,
then recompose and shoot.
 When [Servo AF] is set, the image-recording quality cannot be set to
41 or 61. If 41 or 61 is set, the image will be recorded in
1 quality.
 When [Servo AF] is set and [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is set
(p.202), [High ISO speed NR] will automatically switch to [Standard].
 If [Servo AF] is set, pressing the button assigned for the function will not
take effect if you set 41 or 61 image-quality for the [One-touch
image quality setting] or [One-touch image quality (hold)] (p.507)
with [83: Custom Controls].
With Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
315
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
Selecting the AF Method
You can set the AF method to [u+Tracking] (p.317), [FlexiZone Multi] (p.319), or [FlexiZone - Single] (p.321) to suit the shooting
conditions and subject.
If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens’s focus mode switch to
<MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.329).
Select the AF method.
 Under the [z5] tab (the [z3] tab in
<A> mode), select [AF method].
 Select the desired AF method, then
press <0>.
 When the Live View image is
displayed, you can press the
<o> button to select the AF
operation (p.314).
 The explanations on pages 317-322 assume that [AF operation] is set
to [One Shot AF] (p.314). With [Servo AF] (p.315) set, the AF point will
turn blue when focus is achieved.
 Regarding the touch shutter (AF and shutter release by tapping on the
screen), see page 327.
316
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
u(face)+Tracking: c
The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the
AF point <p> also moves to track the face.
1
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
an AF point.
2 Select
 When a face is detected, the area
Area frame
frame will be displayed and <p> will
appear over the face to be focused
on.
 If multiple faces are detected, <q>
will be displayed. Use <9> to move
<q> over the face you want to
focus on.
 You can also tap on the LCD monitor
screen to select the face or subject. If
you tap on a subject other than a
human face, the AF point will be
switched to < >.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
 If no faces can be detected or if you
do not tap anything on the screen, the
camera will switch to FlexiZone Multi (p.319).
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
317
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.298).
 Focusing on a subject other than a human face
• Tap on the subject (or spot) where you want to focus.
• Press <9> or <0> and the AF point < > will appear on the
screen. Then use <9> to move the AF point over the target
subject.
• Once the AF point < > achieves focus, it will track the subject
even if the subject moves or if you change the composition.
 If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be
possible. Adjust the focus manually (p.329) so that the face can be
detected, then perform AF.
 An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
 Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the
picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
 The <p> may cover only part of the face.
 AF is not possible with a face or subject along the periphery. Aim the
area frame over the subject and focus.
 The size of the AF point changes depending on the subject.
318
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
FlexiZone - Multi: o
You can use up to 63 AF points for wide-area focusing (automatic
selection). This wide area can also be divided into 9 zones for focusing
(zone selection).
1
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
Area frame
the AF point.N
2 Select
 Pressing <9> or <0> will toggle
Zone frame
between automatic selection and
zone selection. In the <A> mode,
automatic selection is set
automatically.
 Use <9> to select the zone. To
return to the center zone, press <9>
or <0> again.
 You can also tap on the LCD monitor
screen to select a zone. When a zone
is selected, tap [w] on the screen
to switch to automatic selection.
319
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the area
frame will turn orange.
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.298).
 If the camera does not focus the desired target subject with automatic
selection, switch the AF method to zone selection or [FlexiZone Single] (p.321) and refocus.
 With Live View shooting, the number of AF points will differ depending on
the [z5: Aspect ratio] setting. When the aspect ratio is [3:2], [4:3], or
[16:9], there will be 63 AF points and 9 zones. For [1:1], 49 AF points
and 9 zones.
 For movie shooting, the number of AF points and zones will differ
depending on the [Movie recording size] setting. With Lw
shooting, there will be 63 AF points and 9 zones. For H shooting, 15 AF
points and 3 zones.
320
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
FlexiZone - Single: d
The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you
want to focus on a particular subject.
the Live View image.
1 Display
 Press the <0> button.
AF point
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 The AF point < > will appear.
 If [Movie servo AF] is set to
[Enable], the AF point will be
displayed larger.
the AF point.
2 Move
 Use <9> to move the AF point to
where you want to focus. (It cannot
be moved to the edge of the screen.)
 Using <9> or <0> will return the
AF point to the screen center.
 You can also tap on the LCD monitor
screen to move the AF point.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
321
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.298).
322
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
Notes for AF
AF Operation
 Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway
will focus again.
 The image brightness may change during and after the AF
operation.
 Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take
longer to focus or the continuous shooting speed may decrease.
 If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,
the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,
exit Live View shooting and perform AF under the actual light source
under which you are shooting.
 If you cannot achieve focus with AF, set the lens’s focus mode switch to
<MF> and focus manually (p.329).
 If you shoot the subject at the periphery and it is slightly out of focus,
recompose to move the subject (and AF point or zone) toward the screen
center, focus again, then take the picture.
 The external Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam. However, if an
EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used,
the LED light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary.
 With certain lenses, it may take more time to achieve focus with
autofocus, or accurate focusing may not be achieved.
323
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
 Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat
surfaces or when highlight or shadow details are clipped.
 Subjects in low light.
 Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the
horizontal direction.
 Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,
computer keyboards, etc.).
 Fine lines and subject outlines.
 Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps
changing.
 Night scenes or points of light.
 The image flickers under fluorescent or LED lighting.
 Extremely small subjects.
 Subjects at the edge of the picture.
 Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with a highly
reflective body, etc.).
 Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal
in a cage, etc.).
 Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still
due to camera shake or subject blur.
 Performing AF when the subject is very far out of focus.
 Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
 A special effect filter is used.
 Noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
324
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
Magnified View
In the [FlexiZone - Multi] and
[FlexiZone - Single] modes, either press
the <u> button or tap on [d] displayed
on the bottom right of the screen. You
can magnify the image by approx. 5x or
10x and check the focus.
Magnified view is not possible with
[u+Tracking].
 To move the AF point or select a zone, operate <9> or tap on the
spot you want to magnify.
 Either press the <u> button or tap on [d] to magnify the image.
Each time you press the <u> button or tap on [d], the
magnification ratio changes.
 When [FlexiZone - Multi] is set, the image will be magnified at the
center of the zone frame (or image center with automatic selection).
When [FlexiZone - Single] is set, the image will be magnified at the
AF point.
 At 100% (approx. 1x) magnification, operate <9> or tap on the
screen to move the magnifying frame. Pressing <9> or <0> will
return the magnifying frame to the screen center.
 Either press the <u> button or tap on [d] to magnify the area
covered by the magnifying frame.
 When the image is magnified by approx. 5x or 10x, you can change
the magnified area by operating <9> or tapping on the triangle on
the screen top, bottom, left, or right.
 When you press the shutter button halfway, the normal view will
return for [FlexiZone - Multi]. For [FlexiZone - Single], AF will
proceed with the magnified view.
 With Servo AF and magnified view, pressing the shutter button
halfway will return to the normal view for focusing.
325
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
 If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view and
perform AF.
 If you perform AF in the normal view and then the view is magnified,
accurate focus may not be achieved.
 AF speed differs between normal view and magnified view.
 When in magnified view, Movie Servo AF (p.380) will not work.
 During magnified view, achieving focus becomes more difficult due to
camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
326
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter
Just by tapping on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the
picture automatically.
1
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
the touch shutter.
2 Enable
 Tap [y] on the screen’s bottom left.
Each time you tap on the icon, it will
toggle between [y] and [x].
 [x] (Touch shutter: Enable)
The camera will focus on the spot you
tap on, then the picture will be taken.
 [y] (Touch shutter: Disable)
You can tap on a spot to perform
focusing on the spot. Press the
shutter button completely to take the
picture.
on the screen to shoot.
3 Tap
 Tap on the face or subject on the
screen.
 On the point you tap, the camera will
focus (Touch AF) with the AF method
that was set (p.316-322).
 When [x] is set, the AF point turns
green when focus is achieved, then
the picture is taken automatically.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
turns orange and the picture cannot
be taken. Tap on the face or subject
on the screen again.
327
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter
 Even if you set the drive mode to <o> or <i>, the camera will still
shoot in single shooting mode.
 Even if [AF operation] is set to [Server AF], tapping on the screen will
focus on the image with [One-Shot AF].
 Tapping on the screen in magnified view will not focus or take the picture.
 In the <A> mode, if [FlexiZone - Multi] or [yTouch shutter:
Disable] is set, focusing cannot be performed by tapping on the screen.
 If you shoot by tapping on the screen with [z1: Image review] set to
[Hold], you can press the shutter button halfway to take the next shot.
Note that under [83: Custom Controls], if [V Shutter butt. halfpress] is set to [Metering start] or [AE lock (while button pressed)],
the picture will be taken without performing AF.
 If you use [83: Custom Controls] to assign a button with [ONE
SHOTzAI SERVO/SERVO] or the function that activates the metering
timer (p.495), touch shutter shooting cannot be performed when you hold
down the respective button.
 You can also set the touch shutter with [z5: Touch Shutter] (the [z3]
tab in <A> mode).
 To shoot with bulb exposure, tap on the screen twice. The first tap on the
screen will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the bulb
exposure. Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping on the
screen.
328
MF: Focusing Manually
You can magnify the image and focus precisely with MF (manual focus).
1
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <MF>.
 Turn the lens focusing ring to focus
roughly.
the magnifying frame.
2 Display
 Press the <u> button or tap on [d]
on the lower right of the screen.
 The magnifying frame will appear.
Magnifying frame
the magnifying frame.
3 Move
 Either operate <9> or tap on the
spot you want to magnify to move the
magnifying frame to where you want
to focus.
 Pressing <9> or <0> will return
the magnifying frame to the screen
center.
the image.
4 Magnify
 Each time you press the <u> button
or tap on [d] on the lower right of
the screen, the display will change in
the following sequence:
Normal view 9 1x 9 5x 9 10x
AE lock
Magnified area position
Magnification (Approx.)
 While in magnified view, you can
operate <9> or tap on the triangle
displayed on the top, bottom, left, or
right of the screen to scroll around the
magnified image.
329
MF: Focusing Manually
manually.
5 Focus
 While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
 After achieving focus, press the <u>
button to return to the normal view.
the picture.
6 Take
 Check the exposure, then press the
shutter button completely to take the
picture (p.298).
 In magnified view, the exposure is locked. (Shutter speed and aperture
will be displayed in red.)
 Even with manual focusing, you can use the touch shutter to take a
picure.
330
General Live View Shooting Cautions
Image Quality
 When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
 Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in
the image.
 If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period, the
camera’s internal temperature may rise, and image quality may
deteriorate. Always exit Live View shooting when you are not shooting.
 If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is
high, image quality may deteriorate. Exit Live View shooting and wait a
few minutes before shooting again.
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
 If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live
View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red
<E> icon will appear.
 The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. It is recommended that you temporarily exit Live View
shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again.
 The red <E> icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Exit the Live View shooting or
turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.
 Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period
will cause the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not
shooting, always turn off the camera.
 If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot
with a high ISO speed or long exposure may deteriorate even before the
white <s> icon is displayed.
Shooting Results
 In magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in
red. If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come
out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.
 Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be captured
with the image area of the normal view.
331
General Live View Shooting Cautions
Live View Image
 Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect
the brightness of the captured image.
 Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed
Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image
recorded will have less noise. (The image quality of the Live View image
is different from that of the recorded image.)
 If the light source (illumination) within the image changes, the screen
may flicker. If this happens, exit Live View shooting and resume Live
View shooting under the actual light source.
 If you point the camera in a different direction, it may throw off the Live
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness
level stabilizes before shooting.
 If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image
will correctly show the bright area.
 In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a bright setting, noise
or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image. However, the
noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image.
 When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more
pronounced than in the actual image.
Custom Functions
 During Live View shooting, certain Custom Functions will not work
(certain settings become invalid). For details, see page 480.
Lens and Flash
 If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may decrease the number of
possible shots. When the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as
when using a tripod, it is recommended that you set the IS switch to
<2>.
 The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when
using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode
released in and after the second half of 2011.
 FE lock and modeling flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used.
332
9
Shooting Movies
Movie shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <k>.
 Before shooting movies, see page 356 and make sure
the card is able to record movies at the desired movierecording quality setting.
 If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera
shake can cause blurred movies. Using a tripod is
recommended in such cases.
Full HD 1080
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with HighDefinition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning
lines).
333
k Shooting Movies
/
Autoexposure Shooting
When the shooting mode is set to <A>, <d>, or <F>, autoexposure
control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness.
the Mode Dial to <A>, <d>,
1 Set
or <F>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Before shooting a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (p.316, 329).
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method.
the movie.
4 Shooting
 Press the <0> button to start
Recording movies
Built-in microphone
334
shooting a movie.
 While the movie is being shot, the
“o” mark will be displayed on the
upper right of the screen.
 Sound will be recorded by the built-in
microphone.
 To stop shooting the movie, press the
<0> button again.
k Shooting Movies
Shutter-priority AE
When the shooting mode is <s>, you can manually set the shutter
speed for movie shooting. The ISO speed and aperture will be set
automatically to suit the brightness and obtain the standard exposure.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
the desired shutter speed.
3 Set
 While looking at the LCD monitor,
turn the <6> dial.
 The settable shutter speeds depend
on the frame rate. See page 343.
Shutter speed
and shoot the movie.
4 Focus
The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.334).
 Changing the shutter speed during movie shooting is not recommended
since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
 When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx.
1/25 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed,
the less smooth the subject’s movement will look.
 The minimum shutter speed for shooting movies at a high frame rate will
be 1/125 sec. for NTSC and 1/100 sec. for PAL.
 If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
335
k Shooting Movies
Aperture-priority AE
When the shooting mode is <f>, you can manually set the aperture
for movie shooting. The ISO speed and shutter speed will be set
automatically to suit the brightness and obtain the standard exposure.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
the desired aperture.
3 Set
 While looking at the LCD monitor,
turn the <6> dial.
Aperture
and shoot the movie.
4 Focus
The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.334).
Changing the aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since
variations in the exposure, due to the drive of the lens aperture, will be
recorded.
336
k Shooting Movies
ISO Speed in the <A> Mode
L: Full HD movie/w: High frame rate movie shooting
 The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 25600.
H: 4K movie shooting
 The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO
12800.
ISO Speed in the <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F> Modes
L: Full HD movie/w: High frame rate movie shooting
 The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 25600.
 In [Range for movies] under [z2: ISO speed settings], if you set
[Maximum] to [H2 (102400)] (p.379), the maximum limit of the
automatic ISO speed setting range will be expanded to H2
(equivalent to ISO 102400). Note that even if you set the [Maximum]
and [Minimum] to a narrower range than the default ISO range (ISO
100 - ISO 25600), it will not take effect.
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.206), the
automatic ISO speed setting range will be ISO 200 - ISO 25600.
H: 4K movie shooting
 The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 12800.
 Under [z2: ISO speed settings], if you set [Range for H]’s
[Maximum] setting to [H2 (102400)] (p.379), the maximum limit of
the automatic ISO speed setting range will be expanded to H2
(equivalent to ISO 102400). Note that even if you set the [Maximum]
and [Minimum] to a narrower range than the default ISO range (ISO
100 - ISO 12800), it will not take effect.
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.206), the
automatic ISO speed setting range will be ISO 200 - ISO 12800.
 For movie shooting, the ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent
to ISO 50).
 When switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the
ISO speed settings again before shooting movies.
337
k Shooting Movies
Notes for <A>, <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F> Modes
 In the <A> mode, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera
is displayed on the upper left of the screen (p.339).
 You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the <A> button
(except in the A mode, p.259). After applying AE lock during movie
shooting, you can cancel it by pressing the <S> button. (AE lock setting
is retained until you press the <S> button.)
 You can set exposure compensation up to ±3 stops by setting the
<R> switch to the left and turning the <5> dial (except in the
<A> mode).
 In the <A>, <d>, and <F> modes, the ISO speed, shutter speed, and
aperture will not be recorded in the movie’s Exif information.
 During movie shooting in the <A>, <d>, <s>, <f>, or <F>
modes, this camera supports the Speedlite’s function to turn on the LED
light automatically in low-light conditions. (However, no icon indicating
that the LED light is ON is displayed on the information display screen
illustrated on page 344.) For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the
EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light.
338
k Shooting Movies
Scene Icons
During movie shooting in the <A> mode, an icon representing the
scene detected by the camera will be displayed, and the shooting will
be performed to suit the scene.
Subject
Portrait*1
Background
Non-Portrait
Nature and
Outdoor Scene
Close*2
Background
Color
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky Included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset
*3
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark blue
Dark
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an extension
tube or close-up lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.
For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match
the actual scene.
339
k Shooting Movies
Manual Exposure Shooting
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for
movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for
advanced users.
1 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
the ISO speed.
3 Set
 Press the <m> button.
 The ISO speed setting screen will
appear on the LCD monitor.
 Turn the <6> dial to set it.
 For details on the ISO speed, see the
next page.
the shutter speed and
4 Set
aperture.
Shutter speed
 Press the shutter button halfway and
check the exposure level indicator.
 To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial. To set the aperture, turn
the <5> dial.
 The settable shutter speeds depend
on the frame rate. See page 343.
and shoot the movie.
5 Focus
 The procedure is the same as steps 3
Aperture
340
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.334).
k Shooting Movies
ISO Speed in the <a> Mode
L: Full HD movie/w: High frame rate movie shooting
 With [AUTO] (A), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO
100 - ISO 25600. In [Range for movies] under [z2: ISO speed
settings], if you set [Maximum] to [H2 (102400)] (p.379), the
maximum limit of automatic ISO speed setting range will be
expanded to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400). Note that even if you
set the [Maximum] and [Minimum] to a narrower range than the
default ISO range (ISO 100 - ISO 25600), it will not take effect.
 You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 25600 in
1/3-stop increments. If you set [Maximum] in [Range for movies] to
[H2 (102400)], the maximum limit of the manual ISO speed setting
range will be expanded to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400). Note that
you can also set the [Maximum] and [Minimum] to a range
narrower than the default range (ISO 100 - ISO 25600).
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.206),
automatic and manual setting range of ISO speed will be ISO 200 ISO 25600.
H: 4K movie shooting
 With [AUTO] (A), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO
100 - ISO 12800. Under [z2: ISO speed settings] in [Range for
H], if you set [Maximum] to [H2 (102400)] (p.379), the maximum
limit of the automatic ISO speed setting range will be expanded to
H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400). Note that even if you set the
[Maximum] and [Minimum] to a narrower range than the default
ISO range (ISO 100 - ISO 12800), it will not take effect.
 You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 12800 in
1/3-stop increments. If you set [Maximum] in [Range for H] to [H2
(102400)], the maximum limit of the manual ISO speed setting range
will be expanded to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400). Note that you
can also set the [Maximum] and [Minimum] to a range narrower
than the default range (ISO 100 - ISO 12800).
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.206), the
automatic and manual ISO speed setting range will be ISO 200 ISO 12800.
341
k Shooting Movies
 For movie shooting, the ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent
to ISO 50).
 When switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the
ISO speed settings again before shooting movies.
 During movie shooting, avoid changing the shutter speed or aperture.
Doing so may record the changes in the exposure or create more noise
at high ISO speeds.
 When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx.
1/25 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed,
the less smooth the subject’s movement will look.
 The minimum shutter speed for shooting movies at a high frame rate will
be 1/125 sec. for NTSC and 1/100 sec. for PAL.
 If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
 In step 4, if you cannot set the shutter speed or aperture, set the
<R> switch to the left and turn the <6> or <5> dial.
 Under [83: Custom Controls], if [
: Expo comp (hold btn, turn
)] or [
: Expo comp (hold btn, turn
)] is set (p.506), you can
set exposure compensation while ISO Auto is set.
 When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed. After locking the ISO speed during movie shooting, you can
cancel it by pressing the <S> button. (ISO speed lock is maintained
until you press the <S> button.)
 If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.344)
compared to when the <A> button was pressed.
 With the camera ready to shoot in the <a> mode, pressing the <B>
button displays the histogram.
342
k Shooting Movies
Settable Shutter Speeds
The settable shutter speeds in the <s> shutter-priority AE and <a>
manual exposure shooting modes vary depending on the frame rate of
the movie-recording quality.
(sec.)
Shutter Speeds
Frame
Rate
Normal Movie
Shooting
2
1/4000 - 1/125
3
1/4000 - 1/100
8
1/4000 - 1/60
7
1/4000 - 1/50
6
1/4000 - 1/30
HDR Movie Shooting
<d> <f> <F> <a>
Modes
5
B
1/4000 - 1/25
4
<s> Mode
-
1/1000 - 1/60*
1/4000 - 1/60
1/1000 - 1/50
1/4000 - 1/50
-
* <d> <f> <F>: 1/1000 - 1/100
Still Photo Shooting
Still photos cannot be taken during movie shooting. To take still
photos, stop the movie shooting and take still photos using viewfinder
shooting or Live View shooting.
343
k Shooting Movies
Information Display
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
Movie shooting mode/
High Frame Rate movie/
Time-lapse movie/
Scene icons
: Autoexposure (A)
: Autoexposure (d/F)
: Shutter-priority
: Aperture-priority
: Manual exposure
: High Frame Rate movie
a : Time-lapse movie
Movie shooting remaining time*/Elapsed time
Battery level
Temperature warning
Time code
Histogram (a mode)
Writing indicator
Recording movies
Recording and
playback/
Playback card
White balance/
White balance
correction
AF method
Movie recording size
Frame rate
Picture Style
Movie recording
method/Compression
rate
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
HDR movie
GPS acquisition
status
Audio recording level
(Manual)
Headphone
volume
Magnify button
ISO speed
Movie Servo AF
AE lock
Highlight tone priority
Movie-recording format
Shutter speed
Wi-Fi function
Eye-Fi card transmission status
Exposure compensation amount
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Attenuator
Aperture
Audio recording level indicator
(Manual)
Wind filter
Exposure level indicator
* Applies to a single movie clip.
 The display will show only the settings currently applied.
344
k Shooting Movies
 When the [AF method] is [FlexiZone - Multi] or [FlexiZone - Single],
you can press the <B> button to display the electronic level (p.82).
 You can set what is displayed when you press the <B> button
(p.305).
 If [AF method] is set to [u+Tracking] or if the camera is connected to a
TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level will not be displayed.
 The electronic level, grid lines, or histogram cannot be displayed during
movie shooting. (The display will disappear when you start shooting a
movie.)
 When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will
change to the elapsed time.
345
k Shooting Movies
Cautions for Movie Shooting
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 If you shoot something that has fine detail, moire or false colors may
result.
 Under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.], even if [Record func.] is set
to [Rec. to multiple] (p.167), the movie cannot be recorded to both the
CF card [f] and SD card [g]. Note that if [Rec. separately] or [Rec. to
multiple] is set, the movie will be recorded to the card set for [Playback].
 If <Q> or <Qw> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during
movie shooting, the white balance may also change.
 If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie image
may flicker.
 If you perform AF with a USM lens during movie shooting in low light,
horizontal banding noise may be recorded in the movie. The same type
of noise may occur if you focus manually with certain lenses equipped
with an electronic focusing ring.
 Shooting a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform
zooming during movie shooting. Zooming during movie shooting may
result in recording of changes in exposure or mechanical sound of the
lens, or images may be out of focus.
 During movie shooting, if you perform AF, any of the following may occur:
The focus is temporarily greatly thrown off, changes in movie brightness
is recorded, the movie recording stops momentarily, and the mechanical
sound of the lens is recorded.
 During movie shooting, you cannot magnify the image even if you press
the <u> button.
 Be careful not to cover the built-in microphone (p.334) with your fingers,
etc.
 If you connect or disconnect the HDMI cable during movie shooting, the
movie shooting will end.
346
k Shooting Movies
Warnings
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature contact
burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or
very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.
 “General Movie Shooting Cautions” are on pages 391-392.
 If necessary, also read “General Live View Shooting Cautions” on
pages 331-332.
Notes for Movie Shooting
 Under the [z4] and [z5] tabs (the [z2] and [z3] tabs in <A>
mode), you can set the movie shooting settings (p.380).
 Each time you shoot a movie, a new movie file is created on the card.
 The movie screen coverage for 4K, Full HD or HD movies is approx.
100%.
 You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.
 With [
/k] or [q/k] selected under [z5: V btn function], you
can press the shutter button completely to start or stop the movie
shooting (p.386).
 Monaural sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphone (p.334).
 Stereo sound recording (p.363) is also possible by connecting the
Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) to the camera’s
external microphone IN terminal (p.29) as the external microphone is
given the priority.
 Most external microphones equipped with a 3.5 mm diameter mini plug
can be used.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the possible movie shooting
time will be as follows: At room temperature (23°C/73°F), approx. 1 hr.
30 min., at low temperatures (0°C/32°F) approx. 1 hr. 20 min. (With
[z4: Movie Servo AF: Disable] and L 6/5/B/4X set.)
 The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting when using a
(super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode, released in
and after the second half of 2011.
347
k Shooting Movies
Final Image Simulation
Final image simulation is a function that shows the movie as it will look
with the current settings for Picture Style, white balance and other
shooting functions applied.
During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically show the
effects of the settings listed below.
Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting
 Picture Style
* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be
reflected.









White balance
White balance correction
Exposure
Depth of field (except during time-lapse movie shooting)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Highlight tone priority
HDR movie
348
Shooting Function Settings
B/i/A Settings
If you press the <n>, <m>, or <b> button with the image
displayed on the LCD monitor, the setting screen will appear on the
LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the
respective function.
 During manual-exposure shooting (p.340), you can press the
<m> button to set the ISO speed.
 By pressing the <n> button and then the <B> button, you
can set white balance shift.
 You cannot set the AF operation, drive mode, metering mode, flash
exposure compensation, HDR mode, or multiple exposures.
349
Shooting Function Settings
Q Quick Control
In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, and <F> modes, AF method,
Movie recording size, Recording level (manual setting only), Sound
volume (headphones), Card selection, White balance, Picture Style,
Auto Lighting Optimizer, and HDR movie shooting can be set.
In the <A> mode, only the functions in bold above can be set.
1
2
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The settable functions will be
displayed.
Select a function and set it.
Use <9> to select a function.
The setting of the selected function is displayed on the screen.
Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it.
To set the white balance shift or Picture Style parameters, press
the <B> button.
 To set Auto white balance, select [Q], then press <0>.
 To return to movie shooting, press <0> or the <Q> button.




 When [High Frame Rate] is set to [Enable] under [z4: Movie rec
quality], the sound-recording level option will not be displayed. Also, the
movie-recording size cannot be set.
 With [z5: Time-lapse movie] set to [Enable], if you press the <Q>
button, the recording-level will not be displayed.
During movie shooting, you can press the <Q> button to set the soundrecording level (manual setting only) and sound volume (headphones).
350
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
With [z4: Movie rec quality] (or the
[z2] tab in the <A> mode), you can
set the movie recording format, movie
recording size (size, frame rate, video
format/compression method), and other
functions.
The frame rate displayed on the [Movie
rec. size] screen switches automatically
depending on the [53: Video system]
setting (p.549).
The card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording movies
vary depending on the movie-recording quality. Before shooting
movies, see page 356 to check the performance requirements of the
card.
MOV/MP4
You can select the movie’s recording format.
MOV
The movie will be recorded in the
MOV format (file extension “.MOV”).
Convenient for editing with a
computer.
MP4
The movie will be recorded in the MP4 format (file extension
“.MP4”). This file format is compatible with a much larger range of
playback systems than with MOV files.
When [MP4] is set, [High Frame Rate] cannot be set.
351
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
Movie Recording Size
You can select the movie’s size, frame rate, and compression method.
 Image Size
H 4096x2160
The movie will be recorded in 4K
quality. The aspect ratio is approx.
17:9. To shoot H65/
4J movies, use a high-speed
CF card supporting UDMA 7
(p.356).
L 1920x1080
The movie will be recorded in Full High-Definition (Full HD)
quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.
w 1280x720
High Frame Rate movies (p.358) will be recorded in highdefinition (HD) quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.
 Frame Rate (fps:frame per second)
2 119.9fps/8 59.94fps/6 29.97fps
For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan,
South Korea, Mexico, etc.). For 2, see page 358.
3 100.0fps/7 50.00fps/5 25.00fps
For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,
Australia, etc.). For 3, see page 358.
4 23.98fps/B 24.00fps
Mainly for motion pictures. For B, see page 357.
4 (23.98fps) can be selected when [53: Video system] is set to [For
NTSC].
352
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
 4K movie shooting
Shooting 4K movies requires a high-performance card. For details
on card requirements for movie shooting, see “Cards that Can
Record Movies” on page 356.
Shooting 4K movies or High Frame Rate movies greatly increases
the processing load. Compared with normal movie shooting, the
camera’s internal temperature may increase faster or may
become higher. If the red E icon appears during movie shooting,
it indicates that the card may be hot. Stop the movie shooting and
let the camera cool down before removing the card. (Do not
remove the card right away.)
From a 4K movie, you can select any desired frame to save it as
an approx. 8.8 megapixel (4096x2160) JPEG still image to the
card (p.427).
To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the
camera before shooting movies is recommended (p.73).
 Movie-recording coverage
The respective area of the image sensor shown below is used for 4K
movies and Full HD and HD movies.
L Full HD
wHD
H4K
353
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
 For 4K movie shooting, [z3: High ISO speed NR] will not take effect.
Therefore, noise may be more noticeable depending on the shooting
conditions.
 If you change the [53: Video system] setting, also set the movierecording size again.
 Movies shot in 4K, L8/7, or at a high frame rate may not be
played back properly on other devices due to the heavy data processing
load during playback.
 The frame rate displayed on the movie recording size screen switches
depending on whether [53: Video system] is set to [For NTSC] or [For
PAL].
 You cannot shoot Standard Definition (VGA) movies.
 If you change the movie size from Full HD or HD to 4K, the image area of
the movie shooting will be shifted to the telephoto end.
 The 4K movie coverage is different from that of the EOS-1D C and EOS1D X Mark II.
 The color sampling recorded will be as follows: 4K: YCbCr 4:2:2 (8-bit),
Full HD/HD: YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit). The color matrix will be as follows: 4K:
Rec. ITU-R BT.601, and Full HD/HD: Rec. ITU-R BT.709.
354
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
 Movie recording method/Compression rate
J MJPG
Selectable when the movie recording format is [MOV]. Motion
JPEG is used to compress the movie for recording. Without any
compression between frames, each frame is compressed at a time
and recorded. The compression rate is therefore low. Also, since
the image size is large with 4K quality, the file size will be large.
W ALL-I (For editing/I-only)
Selectable when the movie recording format is [MOV].
Compresses each frame at a time for recording. Although the file
size is larger than with IPB (Standard), the movie is better suited in
editing.
X IPB (Standard)
Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording.
Since the file size is smaller than with ALL-I (For editing), movie
shooting time will be longer (with a card of the same capacity).
IPB (Light)
Selectable when the movie recording format is [MP4]. Since the
movie is recorded at a bit rate lower than with IPB (Standard), the
file size will be smaller than with IPB (Standard) and the playback
compatibility will be higher. Of the four movie-recording methods,
this one provides the longest possible shooting time (with a card of
the same capacity).
355
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
Cards that Can Record Movies
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a reading/writing
speed (required card performance) shown in the table or higher than
the standard specification. Test the card by taking a few movies in the
desired quality (p.351) and make sure the card can properly record the
movie.
Movie Recording Quality
H
L
w
CF Card
SD card
65B4
J
UDMA 7
UHS-I
100 MB/sec. or faster 90 MB/sec. or faster
87
W
UDMA 7
60 MB/sec. or faster
UHS-I Speed
Class 3 or higher
87
X
30 MB/sec. or faster
SD Speed
Class 10 or higher
65B4
W
30 MB/sec. or faster
UHS-I Speed
Class 3 or higher
65B4
HDR movies
X
10 MB/sec. or faster
SD Speed
Class 6 or higher
65
V
10 MB/sec. or faster
SD Speed
Class 4 or higher
23
W
UDMA 7
60 MB/sec. or faster
UHS-I Speed
Class 3 or higher
 Before shooting 4K movies, format the card (p.73).
 If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may not
be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card with a
slow reading speed, the movie may not be played back properly.
 For bit rates, see page 580. When shooting movies, use a high
performance card with the writing speed well exceeding the bit rate.
 When movies cannot be recorded normally, format the card and try
again. If formatting the card does not resolve the problem, refer to the
card manufacturer’s website.
356
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
The camera is not compatible with UHS-II SDHC/SDXC cards. (Compatible
with UHS-I.) With a UHS-II SDHC/SDXC card, high-speed transfer via UHS-I
may not be possible, depending on the card specification.
 To optimize the use of the card, formatting the card with the camera
before shooting movies is recommended (p.73).
 To check the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s website.
24.00p
Records the movie at a frame rate of 24.00 fps.
When [Enable] is set, you can select the
movie-recording quality as follows:
HBJ, LBW, or
LBX.
If you have set [Movie rec. size] and
then set [24.00p] to [Enable], set the
[Movie rec. size] again.
Cautions for [24.00p: Enable]
 When [MP4] is set, [Movie rec. size] cannot be set. LBX will
be set.
 [High Frame Rate] (p.358) cannot be set.
 [53: Video system] cannot be set.
 [54: HDMI frame rate] (p.390) cannot be set. The movie image will be
output at 1080/24.00p via HDMI. If you connect the camera to a TV set
etc. not compatible with the 1080/24.00p signal via HDMI, the movie
image may not be displayed.
 If you set it back to [Disable], [54: HDMI frame rate] will be set to
[Auto].
 Even if you set it back to [Disable], the movie recording size will not
revert to the original setting. Set the movie recording size again.
357
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
High Frame Rate
At HD quality, you can shoot movies at a high frame rate of 119.9 fps or
100.0 fps. Good for shooting movies to be played back in slow motion.
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 7 min. 29 sec.
The movie will be recorded as w2
W D or w3 W D.
Movie Servo AF will not work for high
frame rate movie shooting. Also, during
high frame rate movie shooting, AF will
not work.
High Frame Rate movies do not record
sound.
If the time code is displayed during movie shooting, it will count up 4
sec. for each sec. in real time.
Since the High Frame Rate movie will be recorded as a 29.97 fps/25.00
fps movie file, it will be played back in slow motion at 1/4 speed.
Cautions for [High Frame Rate: Enable]
 When [Count up] is set to [Free run] under [z5: Time code] (p.365),
the time code will not be recorded.
 [MOV/MP4], [Movie rec. size], and [24.00p] cannot be set.
 Even if you set it back to [Disable], the movie recording size will not
revert to the original setting. Set the movie recording size again.
 If you shoot a High Frame Rate movie under fluorescent or LED lighting,
the movie image may flicker.
 When you start or stop High Frame Rate movie shooting, the movie
image will not be updated temporarily (frame stops momentarily). Be
aware of this when using an external recording device to record the
movie from the HDMI video output.
 During the High Frame Rate movie shooting, the frame rate of the movie
image displayed on the LCD monitor is different from the frame rate of
the movie image being recorded.
 Headphones cannot be used. (You cannot listen to the sound.)
358
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
In MOV Format
Movie Recording
Quality
(Approx.)
Total Possible Recording Time on Card
File Size
8 GB
32 GB
128 GB
2 min.
8 min.
34 min.
3587 MB/min.
1298 MB/min.
H: 4K
65B4 J
L: Full HD
87
W
5 min.
23 min.
94 min.
87
X
17 min.
69 min.
277 min.
440 MB/min.
65B4 W
11 min.
46 min.
186 min.
654 MB/min.
65B4 X
33 min.
135 min.
541 min.
225 MB/min.
HDR movie shooting
33 min.
135 min.
541 min.
225 MB/min.
6 min.
26 min.
105 min.
1155 MB/min.
w: HD
23
W
In MP4 Format
Movie Recording
Quality
(Approx.)
Total Possible Recording Time on Card
8 GB
32 GB
128 GB
File Size
L: Full HD
X
17 min.
70 min.
283 min.
431 MB/min.
65B4 X
35 min.
140 min.
563 min.
216 MB/min.
87
HDR movie shooting
35 min.
140 min.
563 min.
216 MB/min.
65
86 min.
347 min.
1391 min.
87 MB/min.
V
An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie shooting
to stop before the total recording time shown in the table (p.391).
359
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
 Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting
without interruption.
 Using CF cards up to 128 GB and SD/SDHC cards formatted
with the camera
If you use the camera to format a CF card with 128 GB or less in
capacity or an SD/SDHC card, the camera will format it in FAT32.
With a FAT32-formatted card, if you shoot a movie and the file size
exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created automatically.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file
individually. Movie files cannot be played back automatically in
consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next
movie and play it back.
 Using CF cards exceeding 128 GB and SDXC cards formatted
with the camera
If you use the camera to format a CF card with more than 128 GB in
capacity or an SDXC card, the camera will format it in exFAT.
When using an exFAT-formatted card, even if the file size exceeds 4
GB during movie shooting, the movie will be saved as a single file
(rather than being split into multiple files).
360
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
 When downloading movie files exceeding 4GB to a computer, use either
the EOS Utility (p.594) or a card reader (p.595). Movie files exceeding
4GB will not be downloaded if you perform image download with the
function of a computer (OS).
 Deleting any of the movie files created as a movie shot at one time
exceeding 4GB will make it impossible for EOS MOVIE Utility (p.597) to
play back the movie files consecutively or to merge and save them as a
single movie file.
Using EOS MOVIE Utility, you can automatically merge multiple MOV
format movie files split at 4 GB each and save them as a single movie file.
 Movie Shooting Time Limit
 When shooting movies other than High Frame Rate movies
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If
the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by
pressing the <0> button. (The movie will be recorded as a new
movie file.)
 When shooting High Frame Rate movies
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 7 min. 29 sec. If
the movie shooting time reaches 7 min. 29 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically. You can start shooting a High Frame Rate
movie again by pressing the <0> button. (The movie will be
recorded as a new movie file.)
361
3 Setting the Sound Recording
You can shoot movies while recording
sound with the built-in monaural
microphone or an external stereo
microphone. You can also freely adjust
the sound-recording level.
Set the sound recording with [z4:
Sound recording] (the [z2] tab in
<A> mode).
Sound Recording/Sound Recording Level
Auto
Manual
Disable
: The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto
level control will operate automatically in response to the
sound level.
: For advanced users. You can adjust the sound-recording
level to one of 64 levels.
Select [Rec. level] and turn the <5> dial while looking at
the level meter to adjust the sound-recording level. Look
at the peak hold indicator, and adjust so that the level
meter sometimes lights up on the right of the “12” (-12 dB)
mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the sound
will be distorted.
: Sound will not be recorded. Also, sound will not be output
for the HDMI output (p.387).
High Frame Rate movies do not record sound. Also, [z4: Sound
recording] cannot be set.
362
3 Setting the Sound Recording
Wind Filter/Attenuator
Wind filter
Attenuator
: When [Enable] is set, it reduces the wind noise when
recording outdoors. This feature works only when you
use the built-in microphone for movie shooting. Note
that [Enable] reduces low bass sounds, so set it to
[Disable] when there is no wind. It will record a more
natural sound than with [Enable].
: Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by
loud noises. Even if [Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or
[Manual] for shooting, sound distortion may still result
if there is a very loud sound. In such a case, setting it
to [Enable] is recommended.
 Using a microphone
Normally, the built-in microphone records monaural sound.
Stereo sound recording is possible by connecting an external stereo
microphone equipped with a miniature stereo plug (3.5 mm
diameter) to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal (p.29) as
the external microphone is given the priority. Using the Directional
Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended.
 Using headphones
By connecting headphones (commercially-available) equipped with
a 3.5 mm diameter mini plug to the camera’s headphone terminal
(p.29), you can listen to the sound during movie shooting. If you are
using an external stereo microphone, you can listen to the sound in
stereo. To adjust the headphones’ sound volume, press the <Q>
button and select <n>. Then turn <5> to adjust the volume
(p.350).
You can also use headphones during movie playback.
363
3 Setting the Sound Recording
 If you use the Wi-Fi (wireless communication) function with an external
microphone, the sound noise may be recorded. During sound recording,
using the wireless communication function is not recommended.
 When connecting an external microphone or headphones to the camera,
be sure to insert the plug all the way in.
 The camera’s built-in microphone will also record the operation sound
and mechanical sound of the camera during shooting. Use the
Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) to reduce these
sounds in the movie.
 Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal.
 When using headphones for audio, noise reduction will not be applied to
the headphone output. Because of this, what you hear will differ from the
actual audio recorded with the movie.
 When listening to the sound with headphones, do not change the
[Sound recording] settings. Doing so may cause a sudden increase in
the sound level and hurt your ears.
 In the <A> mode, [Sound recording] can be set to [On] or [Off]. If [On]
is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted automatically (same as
with [Auto]), but the wind filter function will not take effect.
 When the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the
sound will also be output (except when [Sound rec.: Disable] is set).
 The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be
adjusted.
 Audio is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
364
3 Setting the Time Code
The time code is a time reference
recorded automatically to synchronize
the movie during movie shooting. It is
recorded at all times in the following
units: hours, minutes, seconds, and
frames. It is mainly used during movie
editing.
Use [z5: Time code] (the [z3] tab in
<A> mode) to set the time code.
Count Up
Rec run
Free run
: The time code counts up only while you are shooting a
movie. The time code will continue in the sequence of the
movie files captured.
: The time code counts up whether you are shooting a
movie or not.
Start Time Setting
You can set the time code’s initial point (start time).
Manual input setting: You can freely set the hour, minute, second, and
frames.
Reset
: The time set with [Manual input setting] and
[Set to camera time] is reset to “00:00:00.” or
“00:00:00:” (p.368).
Set to camera time : Sets hours, minutes, and seconds to match the
camera’s internal clock. “Frames” will be set to “00”.
 If you shoot a High Frame Rate movie with [Free run] set, the time code
will not be appended.
 If [Free run] is set and you change the time, zone, or daylight saving
time (p.51), the time code will be affected.
 If you play back an MP4 movie with a device other than the camera, the
time code may not be displayed properly.
365
3 Setting the Time Code
Movie Recording Count
You can select what to display on the movie shooting screen.
Rec time
Time code
: Displays the elapsed time from the start of the movie
shooting.
: Displays the time code during movie shooting.
Movie Playback Count
You can select what to display on the movie playback screen.
Rec time
Time code
: Displays the recording time and playback time during
movie playback.
: Displays the time code during movie playback.
With [Time code] set:
During movie shooting
During movie playback
 Regardless of the [Movie rec count] setting, the time code will always
be recorded to the movie file (except for High Frame Rate movies with
[Free run] set).
 The [Movie play count] setting under [z5: Time code] switches in
tandem with the [x3: Movie play count] setting. Changing either
setting will automatically change the other.
 “Frames” are not displayed for movie shooting or during movie playback.
366
3 Setting the Time Code
HDMI
 Time code
The time code can be appended to a movie that is output via HDMI.
Enable: Appends time code to HDMI video output. When [Enable]
is set, [Rec Command] will be displayed.
Disable: Time code not appended to HDMI video output.
 Record command
When a video output via HDMI is recorded by an external recording
device, the camera’s movie shooting start and stop can sync with the
recording by an external recording device.
Enable: The movie shooting start and stop sync with the recording
by an external recording device.
Disable: The recording start and stop are controlled by the external
recording device.
 During High Frame Rate movie shooting, when outputting a movie via
HDMI with [Count up] in [Time code] set to [Free run], the time code
will not be appended to the HDMI video output.
 To check whether your external recording device is compatible with the
[Time code] or [Rec Command], consult the manufacturer of the
external recording device.
 Even if you set [Time code] to [Disable], time code may be appended to
the movie depending on the specifications of the external recording
device. For specifications of time code for HDMI input, consult the
manufacturer of the external recording device.
367
3 Setting the Time Code
Drop Frame
If the frame rate is set to 2 (119.9 fps), 8(59.94 fps), or 6(29.97
fps), the time code’s frame count causes a discrepancy between the
actual time and time code. When [Enable] is set, this discrepancy is
corrected automatically. This correction function is called “drop frame.”
This is for advanced users editing movies.
Enable : The discrepancy is corrected automatically by skipping time
code numbers (DF: Drop frame).
Disable : The discrepancy is not corrected (NDF: Non-drop frame).
The time code will be displayed as follows:
Enable (DF)
: 00:00:00. (Playback time: 00:00:00.00)
Disable (NDF) : 00:00:00: (Playback time: 00:00:00:00)
If the frame rate is 3(100.0 fps), 7(50.00 fps), 5(25.00 fps),
B(24.00 fps), or 4(23.98 fps), the drop frame will not work. (If 3/
7/5/B/4 is set or if [53: Video system] is set to [For PAL],
[Drop frame] will not be displayed.)
368
Shooting HDR Movies
You can shoot movies with clipped highlights reduced for a high
dynamic range of tones even in high-contrast scenes.
You can set the HDR movie with the Quick Control screen if [Movie
rec. size] is set to L6X (NTSC) or L5X (PAL) under
[z4: Movie recording quality]. HDR movie shooting is possible either
when the movie-recording format is set to MOV or MP4.
1
Check [Movie rec. size].
 Check that [Movie rec. size] under
[z4: Movie recording quality] is
set to L6X or L5X.
the <Q> button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
[4].
3 Select
 Tilt <9> up or down to select [4]
(HDR Movie Shooting) displayed on
the lower right of the screen.
[5] (Enable).
4 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select [5]
(Enable).
 For recording time and file sizes, see
the table on page 359.
an HDR movie.
5 Shoot
 Shoot the movie in the same way as
normal movie shooting.
369
Shooting HDR Movies
 For HDR movie shooting, the ISO speed auto and manual setting ranges
are ISO 100 - ISO 25600. Expanded ISO speeds cannot be set.
 For the shutter speeds, see page 343.
 In the <s> mode, the minimum ISO speed will be ISO 400.
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], HDR movie shooting
cannot be set.
 With HDR movie shooting, the image may still flicker even when an
appropriate shutter speed has been set.
 Since multiple frames are merged to create an HDR movie, certain parts
of the movie may look distorted. During handheld shooting, camera
shake may make the distortion look more noticeable. Using a tripod is
recommended. Note that even if a tripod is used for shooting,
afterimages or noise may become more noticeable when the HDR movie
is played back frame-by-frame or in slow-motion compared to normal
playback.
 If [z5: Time-lapse movie] is set to [Enable], HDR movie shooting will
not be possible.
 If you change the HDR movie shooting setting, the color and brightness
of the image may drastically change for a moment. Also, the movie
image will not be updated temporarily (frame stops momentarily). Be
aware of this when using an external recording device to record the
HDMI video output.
370
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
Still photos shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically
to create a time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows how a subject
changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual time it took. It
is effective for a fixed-point observation of changing scenery, growing
plants, celestial motion, etc.
Time-lapse movies are recorded in MOV, L 6 W (NTSC) or L
5 W (PAL). The frame rate will be switched automatically
according to the [53: Video system] setting (p.549).
1 Select the shooting mode.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
[Time-lapse movie].
3 Select
 Under the [z5] tab (the [z3] tab in
<A> mode), select [Time-lapse
movie], then press <0>.
 If the [Only available when movie
shooting is activated] message
appears, press the <0> button,
then repeat step 3.
[Enable].
4 Select
 Select [Enable], then press the
<B> button.
371
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
the shooting interval and
5 Set
number of shots.
Time required
Playback time
 Check the [k: Time required] and
[3: Playback time] displayed at the
bottom of the screen to set the
shooting interval and number of
shots.
 Select the number to be set (hours:
minutes: seconds / number of shots).
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Set the desired number, then press
<0> (Returns to <s>).
 Shooting Interval
Settable from [00:00:01] to [99:59:59].
 Number of shots
Settable from [0002] to [3600]. Set one digit at a time. If 3600 is set,
the time-lapse movie will be approx. 2 min. for NTSC and approx. 2
min. 24 sec. for PAL.
[OK].
6 Select
 The screen in step 3 will reappear.
the settings.
7 Check
 With [Time-lapse movie] selected on
the screen in step 3, press <0>.
 The current settings will be displayed.
372
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
 Time required
Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the
set interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.
 Playback time
Indicates the movie recording time (time required to play back the
movie) to create the time-lapse movie in L6W (NTSC) or
L5W (PAL) from the still photos taken with the set intervals.
 Card- time left
The total time available for recording time-lapse movies on the card
based on its remaining capacity.
the menu.
8 Exit
 Press the <M> button to turn off
the menu screen.
the message.
9 Read
 Read the message and select [OK].
test shots.
10 Take
 Set the exposure and shooting
functions, and press the shutter
button halfway to focus as you do
with Live View shooting.
 Press the shutter button completely to
start taking test shots. The test
images will be recorded to the card.
 If there are no problems with the test
shots, go to the next step.
 To take test shots again, repeat this
step.
373
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
the <0> button.
11 Press
 The camera will be ready to start
shooting a time-lapse movie.
 To return to step 9, press the <0>
button again.
the time-lapse movie.
12 Shoot
 Press the shutter button halfway to
Shots remaining
Time-lapse movie
374
check the focus and exposure.
 Press the shutter button completely to
start shooting the time-lapse movie.
 AF will not work during time-lapse
movie shooting. The exposure setting
for the first shot will be applied to
subsequent shots.
 During time-lapse movie shooting,
nothing will be displayed on the LCD
monitor. <a> will blink on the LCD
panel.
 Since the electronic shutter is used
for shooting, the reflex mirror and
shutter make no mechanical sound
during time-lapse movie shooting.
 When the set number of shots are
taken, the time-lapse movie shooting
will stop and be automatically
canceled.
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
 Using a tripod is recommended.
 Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
 Regardless of the [z4: Movie recording quality] setting, the timelapse movie will be recorded in L 6 W (NTSC) or L 5 W
(PAL).
 To cancel the time-lapse movie shooting before it is completed, either
press the shutter button completely or press the <0> button ([Disable]
is set). The time-lapse movie shot so far will be recorded on the card.
 You can play back the shot time-lapse movie with this camera the same
way that you play back normal movies.
 If the time required for shooting is more than 24 hours but not more than
48, “2 days” will be indicated. If three or more days are required, the
number of days will be indicated in 24-hour increments.
 Even if the time-lapse movie’s playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie
file will still be created. For [Playback time], “00:00:00” will be displayed.
 If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet
accessories (sold separately, p.530) is recommended.
 In the <A> mode, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera
is displayed on the upper left of the screen (p.303).
375
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 With time-lapse movie set to [Enable], you cannot set [z4: Movie rec.
quality], [53: Video system], or other settings.
 If the camera is connected to a computer with the interface cable, or if an
HDMI cable is connected to the camera, you cannot select [Enable].
 The maximum ISO speed will be ISO 12800 in the <d>, <s>, <f>,
and <F> modes, and in <a> mode with ISO Auto set.
 Bulb exposure cannot be performed. If the shooting mode is <F>, the
operation will be the same as with the <d> mode.
 Movie Servo AF will not function.
 If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or slower, the exposure of the movie may
not be displayed properly (may differ from that of the resulting movie).
 Do not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie shooting. Zooming the
lens may cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change, or
the lens aberration correction not to function properly.
 When shooting a time-lapse movie under a flickering light, noticeable image
flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures may be recorded.
 The image displayed during time-lapse movie shooting and the resulting
movie may look different (in terms of flicker, depth of field, etc.).
 If you move the camera from left to right (panning) or shoot a moving
subject during time-lapse movie shooting, the image may look extremely
distorted.
 During time-lapse movie shooting, auto power off will not take effect.
Also, you cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function
settings, play back images, etc.
 Sound and time code are not recorded for time-lapse movies.
 Single shooting setting is applied to time-lapse movie shooting
regardless of the drive mode setting.
 The shooting function settings for the first shot will be applied to
subsequent shots.
 If a shutter speed longer than the shooting interval, such as a long
exposure, is set, the camera cannot shoot with the set interval. Also,
shooting may not be performed when the shutter speed and the shooting
interval are nearly the same.
 If the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may
shorten the recording time of the created time-lapse movie.
376
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
 If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the interval between
shots due to the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the
shots may not be taken with the set intervals.
 The captured images are not recorded as still photos. Even if you cancel
the time-lapse movie shooting after only one shot is taken, it will be
recorded as a movie file.
 If the card does not have enough free space to record the set number of
shots, [Playback time] will be displayed in red. Although the camera can
continue shooting, the shooting will stop when the card becomes full.
 If you connect the camera to a computer with the interface cable
provided with the camera and use EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z5:
Time-lapse movie] to [Disable]. If it is set to [Enable], the camera
cannot communicate with the computer.
 During time-lapse movie shooting, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will not
operate.
 If the power switch is set to <2> or the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is operated, time-lapse movie shooting will be terminated
and the setting is switched to [Disable].
 Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.
 Shooting-ready state of the time-lapse movie is canceled and the setting
is switch to [Disable] with any of the following operations:
• Selecting [z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning], [55:
Clear all camera settings], or [55: zFirmware ver.].
• Selecting <w>, <x>, or <y> shooting modes.
 When time-lapse movie shooting ends, the settings are cleared
automatically, and the camera returns to normal movie shooting. Note
that if you have set the slow shutter speed for time-lapse movie shooting
and the settings are automatically cleared, the shutter speed may be
automatically changed to a speed within the settable range for normal
movie shooting.
 If you start time-lapse movie shooting while the white <s> (p.344) is
displayed, the image quality of the time-lapse movie may deteriorate. It is
recommended that you start time-lapse movie shooting after the white
<s> disappears (camera’s internal temperature decreases).
377
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
You can shoot time-lapse movies with a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N
as shown in the table below (approx. time from start of shooting until the
battery becomes exhausted). The possible shooting time will vary
depending on the shooting conditions.
Total Possible Time for Time-lapse Movie Shooting
(Approx.)
Room Temperature Low Temperatures
Time-lapse Movie Shooting
(23°C / 73°F)
(0°C / 32°F)
Shooting interval: 1 sec.
3 hr. 50 min.
3 hr. 40 min.
Shooting interval: 10 sec.
5 hr. 20 min.
5 hr. 10 min.
You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.279) to start and
stop the time-lapse movie shooting. Set [z5: Remote control] to [Enable].
When Using Remote Controller RC-6
Camera Status/Remote
<2> (2-sec. delay)
Control Setting
Test-shooting screen
Shooting-ready
During time-lapse movie
shooting
378
To shooting-ready
<o> (Immediate
shooting)
Shoots still photo
To test-shooting
screen
Starts shooting
Ends shooting
Ends shooting
3 Menu Function Settings
z2
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <k>, the
settings for [z2: ISO speed settings]
will be switched to [ISO speed], [Range
for movies], and [Range for H].
 ISO Speed Settings
ISO speed
In the <a> mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can
also select ISO Auto. You can also use the <i> button for these
settings.
Range for movies
For Full HD movie shooting and High Frame Rate (HD) movie
shooting, you can set the automatic and manual ISO speed setting
ranges (minimum and maximum limits). The default setting is ISO
100 - ISO 25600. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 to
H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and the maximum limit within ISO
200 to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).
Range for H
For 4K movie shooting, you can set the automatic and manual ISO
speed setting ranges (minimum and maximum limits). The default
setting is ISO 100 - ISO 12800. You can set the minimum limit
within ISO 100 to H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and the maximum
limit within ISO 200 to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).
 For Full HD and HD shooting, ISO 32000 is the expanded ISO speed.
For 4K movie shooting, ISO 16000, 20000, 25600, and 32000 are the
expanded ISO speed. When you set them, [H] will be displayed.
 For [z2: ISO speed settings] in still photo shooting (viewfinder or Live
View shooting), see page 180.
379
3 Menu Function Settings
z4
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <k>, the [z4]
and [z5] tabs will be displayed as the
menu options exclusive to movie
shooting (the [z2] and [z3] tabs in
<A> mode).
 Movie Servo AF
With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject
continuously during movie shooting. The default setting is [Enable].
When [Enable] is set:
The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you
are not pressing the shutter button halfway.
If you want to keep the focus at a specific point or if you do not
want the lens mechanical sound to be recorded, you can
temporarily stop Movie Servo AF as follows.
• Tap on the [ ] icon on the lower left of the screen.
• If you assign a button to [Pause Movie Servo AF] (p.504) under
[83: Custom controls], you can pause Movie Servo AF by
pressing that button. When you press the button again, Movie
Servo AF will resume.
• If you assign a button to [AF stop] (p.501), you can pause the
Movie Servo AF while holding down that button. When you let go
of the button, Movie Servo AF will resume.
While Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie shooting
after operations such as pressing the <M> or <x> button or
changing the AF method, Movie Servo AF will resume.
When [Disable] is set:
Press the shutter button halfway or press the <p> button to
focus.
380
3 Menu Function Settings
Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]
 Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
• A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera.
• With a higher f/number
• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page
324.
 Since this drives the lens continuously, it will consume battery power and
shorten the movie shooting time (p.359).
 With certain lenses, the mechanical sound of the lens for focusing may
be recorded. If this happens, you can use the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) to reduce the mechanical sound of
the lens to be recorded.
 Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnified view.
 During movie shooting, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the
camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie
image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image
magnification).
 If you want to set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> during Movie
Servo AF, first set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to
<A>.
381
3 Menu Function Settings
 AF method
You can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone Single]. See page 316 for the AF method.
 Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you
compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the
subject.
Note that the grid is not displayed during movie shooting.
 Movie recording quality
You can set the movie-recording format (MOV or MP4), movierecording size, 24.00p, and High Frame Rate movie shooting. For
details, see page 351.
 Sound recording
You can set sound-recording functions. For details, see page 362.
382
3 Menu Function Settings
 Movie Servo AF SpeedN
You can set the Movie Servo AF’s AF
speed and its operation conditions.
This function is settable when [Movie
Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [AF
method] is set to [FlexiZone - Single].
Additionally, the function is enabled
when using a lens supporting slow focus
transition during movie shooting*.
When active : [Always on] sets the AF adjustment speed to take effect
at all times for movie shooting (before and during movie
shooting). [During shooting] sets the AF adjustment
speed to take effect only during movie shooting.
AF speed
: You can adjust the AF speed (focus transition speed)
from standard speed to slow (one of seven levels) or
fast (one of two levels) to obtain the desired effect for
movie creation.
* Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie shooting
USM and STM lenses released in and after 2009 are compatible. For
details, refer to Canon website.
Setting [AF method] to [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Multi] gives the
same effect as [AF speed] set to [Standard (0)].
383
3 Menu Function Settings
 Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivityN
You can change the Movie Servo AF’s
tracking sensitivity to one of seven
levels. This affects the responsiveness of
AF tracking sensitivity when the subject
strays from the AF points, such as during
panning or when an obstacle cuts across
the AF points.
This function is settable when [Movie
Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [AF
method] is set to [FlexiZone - Single].
Locked on: -3/-2/-1
This setting makes the camera less inclined to track a different subject if
the AF point loses the original subject. The closer the setting is to the
minus (-) symbol, the less the camera is inclined to track a different
subject. It is effective when you want to prevent the AF points from
rapidly tracking something that is not the intended subject during
panning or when an obstacle cuts across the AF points.
Responsive: +1/+2/+3
This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject that
covers the AF point. The closer the setting is to the plus (+) symbol, the
more responsive the camera is. It is effective when you want to keep
tracking a moving subject as its distance from the camera changes or to
rapidly focus on another subject.
Setting [AF method] to [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Multi] gives the
same effect as setting [0].
384
3 Menu Function Settings
z5
 Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
 Time code
You can set the time code. For details, see page 365.
385
3 Menu Function Settings
 V button function
You can set the functions performed by
pressing the shutter button halfway or
completely during movie shooting.
Setting
/–
q/–
/k
q/k
Pressing halfway
Pressing completely
Metering and AF
No function
Metering only
No function
Metering and AF
Starts/stops movie
shooting
Metering only
Starts/stops movie
shooting
If [
/k] or [q/k] is set, besides pressing the <0> button,
you can start or stop the movie shooting by pressing the shutter
button completely or by using Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer
Remote Controller TC-80N3 (each sold separately, p.279).
 Even if you set [z5: V btn function] to [q/-] or [q/k], AF will work
in time-lapse movie shooting by pressing the shutter button halfway.
 During movie shooting, the [z5: V btn function] setting overrides any
function assigned to the shutter button with [83: Custom Controls].
 Time-lapse movie
You can shoot time-lapse movies. For details, see page 371.
386
3 Menu Function Settings
 HDMI display
This function enables you to select the
display option while recording HDMI
video output with an external recording
device. The movie will be output in Full
HD quality (1920x1080). The default
setting is [a].
When [a] is set:
• When outputting a movie via HDMI, the camera’s LCD monitor
will be off.
• The shooting information, AF points, etc., will be displayed on
the HDMI video output. However, if you press the <B>
button while watching the external monitor connected to an
external recording device, you can see the video output without
the information.
• Without having an HDMI connection, even if you press the
<B> button while watching the camera’s LCD monitor, the
output will still display the information.
• To record a video without an information overlay, check that no
shooting information or AF point is being displayed on the
external monitor, etc. Setting [awithout info] is recommended.
When [awithout info] is set:
• When outputting a movie via HDMI, the camera’s LCD monitor
will be off.
• The HDMI output will include only the movie image (shooting
information, AF points, etc., will not be displayed).
When [A+a] is set:
• While displaying the movie on the LCD monitor, you can display
the movie as an HDMI output.
• Even if you play back images or display a menu, the images or
menu will not be displayed on the HDMI output device.
387
3 Menu Function Settings
How to prolong the HDMI output
To continue the HDMI output for longer than 30 min., select [a] or
[awithout info], then set [52: Auto Power Off] to [Disable] (p.76).
 HDMI output in 4K quality is not possible. (Even if [Movie rec. size] is set
to H, the movie will be output in Full HD quality.)
 HDMI output with no information will not display the card’s remaining
capacity, battery level, internal temperature warning (p.391), or other
warnings on the HDMI output device’s screen. Be particularly careful
when setting [awithout info]. When [A+a] is set, you can see the
warnings displayed on the camera’s LCD monitor.
 When you are not shooting a movie, the power will turn off automatically
after the set time for [52: Auto power off] elapses. If you select
[A+a] and set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable], the HDMI output
will stop if you do not operate the camera for 30 min. (movie shooting will
be cancelled).
 With [awithout info] set and you press the buttons such as <n>
or <m>, the setting screen may be displayed in the HDMI video
output. While recording a movie to an external recording device,
operating the buttons is not recommended.
 Depending on the viewing environment, the brightness and color of the
movie shot with the camera may look different from that of the HDMI
video output recorded by an external recording device.
 By pressing the <B> button, you can change the information
displayed on the screen.
 A time code can be appended to the HDMI video output (p.367).
 Sound will also be output for the HDMI output (except when [Sound
rec.: Disable] is set).
388
3 Menu Function Settings
 Remote control shooting
When [Enable] is set, you can start or stop movie shooting using
Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.279).
Set the RC-6’s release mode switch to <2>, then press the transmit
button. If the switch is set to <o> (immediate release), the [V btn
function] setting will be applied.
389
3 Menu Function Settings
54
 HDMI frame rate
For HDMI output, you can set the frame rate to [Auto], [59.94i/
50.00i], [59.94p/50.00p], or [23.98p]. Set the frame rate that is
compatible with the commercially-available, external recording
device you will use to record the movie via HDMI output.
 When [24.00p] under [z4: Movie rec quality] is set to [Enable], you
cannot set [54: HDMI frame rate]. The movie will be output at 1080/
24.00p via HDMI.
 The HDMI output during High Frame Rate movie shooting will not output
the movie at 119.9p/100.0p.
 HDMI output with the High Frame Rate setting will have the 59.94p/
50.00p movie image according to the [54: HDMI frame rate] setting.
 The selectable frame rates vary depending on the [53: Video system]
setting.
 If the picture does not appear on the HDMI output device, set the [53:
Video system] correctly to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the
video system of the output device).
 If the manually-set frame rate is not compatible with the external
recording device, the frame rate will be set automatically.
 If [54: HDMI frame rate]’s [59.94i] or [59.94p] is used with the movierecording size of 4(23.98 fps), the “2-3 pulldown” process will be
performed.
390
General Movie Shooting Cautions
Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icon
 If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie
shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a red <E> icon will
appear.
 The red <E> icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
 Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause
the <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, always turn
off the camera.
Recording and Image Quality
 If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie
shooting time depending on the shooting conditions. When the Image
Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is
recommended that you set the IS switch to <2>.
 With autoexposure shooting or shutter-priority AE, if the brightness
changes during movie shooting, the movie image may freeze
momentarily. In such a case, shoot movies with aperture-priority AE or
manual exposure.
 If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. The movie will be recorded almost
exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
 In low light, noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. The movie
will be recorded almost exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
 If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may
deteriorate or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support
MOV/MP4 format).
391
General Movie Shooting Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
 If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level
indicator may appear on the right of the screen during
movie shooting. It indicates how much data has not
yet been written to the card (remaining capacity of the
internal buffer memory). The slower the card, the
faster the indicator will climb upward. If the indicator
Indicator
becomes full, movie shooting will stop automatically.
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will
either not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward. First,
shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.
 If the indicator indicates that the card is full and movie shooting stops
automatically, the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded
properly.
 If the card’s writing speed is slow (due to fragmentation) and the indicator
appears, formatting the card may make the writing speed faster.
Restrictions on MP4-format Movies
Note that generally, the following restrictions apply to MP4-format movies.
 Sound will not be recorded for approx. the last two frames.
 When you play back movies on Windows, movie images and sound may
become slightly out of synchronization.
392
10
Image Playback
This chapter explains how to play back and erase the
captured images (still photos/movies), how to view them
on a TV screen, and other playback-related functions.
Images shot and saved with another device
The camera may not be able to properly display images captured
with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their
file names changed.
393
x Image Playback
Single-Image Display
1
Play back the image.
 Press the <x> button.
 The last image captured or played
back will appear.
an image.
2 Select
 To play back images starting with the
last image captured, turn the <5>
dial counterclockwise. To play back
images starting with the first captured
image, turn the dial clockwise.
 Each time you press the <B>
button, the information display will
change.
No information
Basic information
display
Shooting information display
394
x Image Playback
the image playback.
3 Exit
 Press the <x> button to exit the
image playback and return to
shooting-ready state.
If [84: Add cropping information] is set to an option other than [Off]
(p.491), the captured images will show the lines indicating the image area
when played back.
Shooting Information Display
With the shooting information screen displayed (p.394), you can tilt
<9> up or down to switch the shooting information displayed at the
screen bottom as follows. For details, see pages 398-400.
Detailed information
IPTC information
Lens / Histogram information
GPS information
White balance information
Lens aberration correction information 2
Picture Style information 1
Lens aberration correction information 1
Picture Style information 2
Color space / Noise reduction information
395
x Image Playback
3 Grid Display
In single-image display and two-image
display (p.408), you can overlay the grid
on the image playback.
With [33: Playback grid], you can
select [3x3 l], [6x4 m], or [3x3+diag
n].
This function is convenient for checking
the image’s vertical or horizontal tilt as
well as composition.
The grid is not displayed during movie playback.
396
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Information for Still Photos
 Basic information display
Eye-Fi transfer completed
Wi-Fi function
Wi-Fi signal strength/
Eye-Fi status
Battery level
Rating
Protect images
Cards
Folder number File numbering
Playback number/
Total images
recorded
Image-recording
quality/Edited images/
Cropping/Frame Grab
Shutter speed
Aperture
Exposure compensation amount
Highlight tone priority
ISO speed
 If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information
may not be displayed.
 It may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on
other cameras.
397
B: Shooting Information Display
 Shooting information display
• Detailed information
Exposure compensation amount
Aperture
Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
Shooting date and
time
Shutter speed
ISO speed
Shooting mode/
Multiple exposures/
Frame Grab
Highlight tone priority
White balance
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
White balance correction
amount
AF Microadjustment
Scroll bar
Metering mode
File size
Flash exposure compensation/
Bounce/HDR shooting/
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Image-recording quality/
Dual Pixel RAW/Edited images/
Cropping
Picture Style/Settings
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image file size will be
displayed.
* Lines indicating the image area will be displayed for images taken with the
aspect ratio set (p.310) and with RAW or RAW+JPEG set for image quality.
* <U> will be displayed for images shot with Dual Pixel RAW shooting.
* Lines indicating the image area will be displayed for images with cropping
information appended (p.491).
* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, <0> will be
displayed.
* < > will be displayed for images shot with bounce shooting.
* <w> and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be displayed for images
shot with HDR shooting.
* <P> will be displayed for images shot with multiple-exposure shooting.
* <M> will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
* <u> will be displayed for images created and saved by performing RAW image
processing, resizing, cropping, and frame-grabbing.
* For images cropped and then saved, <N> will be displayed.
398
B: Shooting Information Display
• Lens / Histogram information
Histogram display
(Brightness)
Lens name
Histogram display
(RGB)
Focal length
• White balance information
• Picture Style information 1
• Picture Style information 2
Frame-grab images from 4K movies saved as still photos (p.427) will not
display certain shooting information screens.
399
B: Shooting Information Display
• Color space /
Noise reduction information
• Lens aberration
correction information 1
• Lens aberration
correction information 2
• GPS information
• IPTC information
Latitude
Longitude
Elevation
UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)
If the GPS information is not recorded or the IPTC information is not
appended to the image, the GPS information screen or IPTC information
screen will not be displayed.
400
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Movie Information Display
Movie playback
Aperture
Shutter speed
ISO speed
Movie shooting mode/
High Frame Rate
movie
Movie-recording format
Movie recording size
Frame rate
•
•
•
•
<y/
< /
< /
< /
File size
Recording time/Time code
Movie recording method/
Compression rate
/ / >: Shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed are not displayed.
>: Aperture and ISO speed are not displayed.
>: Shutter speed and ISO speed are not displayed.
> + ISO Auto: ISO speed is not displayed.
During movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and
[Threshold] of [Picture Style]’s [Sharpness].
 Highlight Alert
When [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable], overexposed,
clipped highlights will blink. To obtain more detailed gradation in the
blinking areas where you want the gradation to be faithfully
reproduced, set the exposure compensation to a negative amount
and shoot again.
401
B: Shooting Information Display
 AF Point Display
When [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable], the AF point that
achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF point
selection is set, multiple AF points may be displayed.
 Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and
overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color
saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [33:
Histogram disp].
• [Brightness] Display
Sample Histograms
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of
the image’s brightness level. The horizontal axis
indicates the brightness level (darker on the left and
Dark image
brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates
how many pixels exist for each brightness level. The
more pixels there are toward the left, the darker the
image. The more pixels there are toward the right,
Normal brightness
the brighter the image. If there are too many pixels on
the left, the shadow detail will be lost. If there are too
many pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be
Bright image
lost. The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By
checking the image and its brightness histogram, you
can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.
• [RGB] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color’s
brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue). The horizontal
axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the left and brighter
on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for
each color brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the
darker and less prominent the color. The more pixels there are toward the
right, the brighter and denser the color. If there are too many pixels on the
left, the respective color information will be lacking. If there are too many
pixels on the right, the color will be too saturated with no gradation. By
checking the image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation
and gradation condition, as well as white balance inclination.
402
x Searching for Images Quickly
H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)
Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or
100 images on one screen.
1
Press the <u> button.
 During image playback or when the
camera is ready to shoot, press the
<u> button.
 [6u] will be displayed on the lower
right of the screen.
to the index display.
2 Switch
 Turn the <6> dial counterclockwise.
 The 4-image index display will
appear. The selected image is
highlighted with an orange frame.
 Turning the <6> dial further
counterclockwise will switch the
display from 9 images, 36 images,
and to 100 images. If you turn the dial
clockwise, it will rotate through 100,
36, 9, 4, and single-image display.




an image.
3 Select
 Operate <9> or the <5> dial to move
the orange frame and select the image.
 Press the <u> button to turn off the
[6u] icon, then turn the <6> dial
to display the image(s) on the next or
previous screen.
 Press <0> in the index display to
display the selected image in the
single-image display.
403
x Searching for Images Quickly
I
Jumping through Images (Jump Display)
In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through
the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.
1
Select [Image jump w/6].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Image
jump w/6], then press <0>.
the jump method.
2 Select
 Select the jump method, then press
<0>.
d: Display images one by one
e: Jump 10 images
f: Jump 100 images
g: Display by date
h: Display by folder
i: Display movies only
j: Display stills only
P: Display protected images only
k: Display by image rating (p.415)
Turn the <6> dial to select. If
you browse images with 9
selected, all the rated images will
be displayed.
404
x Searching for Images Quickly
by jumping.
3 Browse
 Press the <x> button to play back
Jump method
images.
 In the single-image display, turn the
<6> dial.
 You can browse by the method that
was set.
Playback position
 To search images by shooting date, select [Date].
 To search images by folder, select [Folder].
 If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [Movies] or
[Stills] to display one or the other.
 If the jump method is set to [Protect] or [Rating] but no images are
protected or have ratings, you cannot use the <6> dial to browse
through images.
405
u Magnifying Images
You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD
monitor.
1
Magnified area position
Magnify the image.
 The image can be magnified as
follows: 1. During image playback
(single-image display), 2. During the
image review after image capture,
and 3. From the shooting-ready state.
 Press the <u> button.
 The magnified view will appear. The
magnified area and [6u] will be
displayed on the lower right of the
screen.
 The image magnification increases
as you turn the <6> dial clockwise.
You can magnify the image up to
approx. 10x.
 The image magnification decreases
as you turn the <6> dial
counterclockwise. In the case of 1
and 3 only, turning the dial further will
display the index display (p.403).
around the image.
2 Scroll
 Use <9> to scroll around the
magnified image.
 Press the <u> button or <x>
button to exit the magnified view.
 In the case of 1 and 3 only, you can turn the <5> dial to view another
image while maintaining the magnified view.
 A movie cannot be magnified.
406
u Magnifying Images
3 Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio and Position
Under the [33] tab, when you select
[Magnificatn (apx)], you can set the
initial magnification ratio and position for
the magnified view.
 1x (no magnification)
The image is not magnified. The magnified view will start with the
single-image display.
 2x, 4x, 8x, 10x (magnify from center)
The magnified view starts at the image center at the selected
magnification.
 Actual size (from selected point)
The recorded image’s pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%. The
magnified view starts at the AF point that achieved focus. If the
photo is taken with manual focus, the magnified view starts at the
image center.
 Same as last magnification (from center)
The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the
magnified view with the <x> or <u> button. The magnified view
starts at the image center.
For images taken with [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Single] (p.316), or
with [Distortion correction] set to [Enable] (p.209), the magnified view will
start at the image center even if [Actual size (from selected pt)] is set.
407
X Comparing Images (Two-Image Display)
You can compare two images side by side on the LCD monitor. In the
two-image display, you can use magnified view or jump display as well
as protection, rating and erasure of images.
1
Set the two-image display.
 During image playback, press the
<X> button.
 The two-image index display will
appear. The selected image is
highlighted with an orange frame.
the images to be
2 Select
compared.




 Pressing <0> switches the orange
frame between the two images.
 Turn the <5> dial to select an image.
 Repeat this procedure to select the
other image to be compared.
If the left and right images are the same, the [
] icon will appear
on the upper left of both images.
By pressing the <Q> button, you can set the same magnification
and magnified area for both images. (The magnification settings will
match those of the image not highlighted with an orange frame.)
By holding the <x> button, you can display the image highlighted
with the orange frame as a single image.
To return to the previous display, press the <X> button.
You cannot start movie playback in the two-image display.
By pressing the <B> button, you can change the information display.
408
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen
The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can touch with your
fingers for various playback operations. First, press the <x> button
to play back images.
Browsing Images
Swipe with one finger.
 With single-image display, touch the
LCD monitor with one finger. You
can browse to the next or previous
image by swiping your finger to the
left or right.
Swipe to the left to see the next
(newer) image, or swipe to the right to
see the previous (older) image.
 With index display, also touch the
LCD monitor with one finger. You can
browse to the next or previous screen
by swiping your finger up or down.
Swipe up to see the next (newer)
images or swipe down to see the
previous (older) images.
When you select an image, the
orange frame will appear. Tap on the
image again to display it as a single
image.
Jumping through Images (Jump Display)
Swipe with two fingers.
Touch the LCD monitor with two fingers.
When you swipe two fingers to the left or
right, you can jump through images with
the method set in [Image jump w/6]
under the [x2] tab.
409
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen
Reducing Image (Index Display)
Pinch two fingers.
Touch the screen with two fingers spread
apart, and pinch your fingers together on
the screen.
 Each time you pinch your fingers, the
image will shrink. If you pinch the
single-image display, it will change to
the 4-image index display.
 When you select an image, the
orange frame will appear. Tap on the
image again to display it as a single
image.
Magnifying Image
Spread two fingers apart.
Touch the screen with two fingers
together, then spread your fingers apart
on the screen.
 As you spread your fingers, the
image will be magnified.
 The image can be magnified up to
approx. 10x.
 You can scroll around the image by
dragging your fingers.
 If you do this on a 4-image index
display, it will change into the singleimage display.
 Tapping on the [2] icon will return to
the single-image display.
Touch operations on the camera’s LCD monitor are also possible while
playing back images on a TV set connected to your camera (p.432).
410
b Rotating the Image
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.
1
Select [Rotate image].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Rotate
image], then press <0>.
the image to be rotated.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be rotated.
 You can also select an image in the
index display (p.403).
the image.
3 Rotate
 Each time you press <0>, the
image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90° 9 270° 9 0°.
 To rotate another image, repeat steps
2 and 3.
 If you set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.444) before taking vertical
shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.
 If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during
image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
 A movie cannot be rotated.
411
K Protecting Images
You can protect important images from being accidentally erased by the
camera’s erase function.
3 Protecting a Single Image
1
Select [Protect images].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Protect
images], then press <0>.
[Select images].
2 Select
 An image is displayed.
Image protection icon
the image to be protected.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be protected.
 You can also select an image on the
index display (p.403).
the image.
4 Protect
 Press <0> to protect the selected
image. The <K> icon will appear at
the top of the screen.
 To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The <K> icon will
disappear.
 To protect another image, repeat
steps 3 and 4.
412
K Protecting Images
3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [31:
Protect images], all the images in the
folder or on the card will be protected.
To cancel the image protection, select
[Unprotect all images in folder] or
[Unprotect all images on card].
If you format the card (p.73), the protected images will also be erased.
 Movies can also be protected.
 Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the
protection.
 If you erase all the images (p.441), only the protected images will
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images
all at once.
 When [All images on card] or [Unprotect all images on card] is
selected, the images will be protected or unprotected on the card
selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under [51: Record
func+card/folder sel.].
413
K Protecting Images
Protecting Images with the <c> Button
During image playback, you can use the <c> button to protect an
image.
1
Select [m btn function].
 Under the [53] tab, select [m btn
function], then press <0>.
2 Select [Protect].
the image to be protected.
3 Select
 Press the <x> button to play back
images.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be protected.
 You can also select an image on the
index display (p.403).
the image.
4 Protect
 When you press the <c> button,
the image will be protected and the
<K> icon will appear.
 To cancel the image protection, press
the <c> button again. The <K>
icon will disappear.
 To protect another image, repeat
steps 3 and 4.
414
Setting Ratings
You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of the five rating
marks: l/m/n/o/p. This function is called rating.
Rating Images with the <c> Button
1
Select the image to be rated.
 Press the <x> button to play back
images.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be rated.
 You can also select an image on the
index display (p.403).
the image.
2 Rate
 Each time you press the <c>
button, the rating mark will change:
l/m/n/o/p/None.
 To rate another image, repeat steps 1
and 2.
 If [53: m btn function] is set to [Protect], change it to [Rating].
 If you press the <Q> button when [Rating] is selected in [53: m btn
function], you can set the rating marks that can be selected when you
press the <c> button.
415
Setting Ratings
3 Set Ratings with the Menu
1
Select [Rating].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Rating],
then press <0>.
the image to be rated.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be rated.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the dial clockwise.
the image.
3 Rate
 Press <0>, and a blue highlight
frame will appear as shown in the
screenshot.
 Turn the <5> dial to select a rating,
then press <0>.
 When you set a rating mark to the
image, the total number of the images
displayed beside the rating mark will
be counted up.
 To rate another image, repeat steps 2
and 3.
A total of up to 999 images of a given rating can be displayed. If there are
more than 999 images with a given rating, [###] will be displayed.
416
Setting Ratings
Taking Advantage of Ratings
 With [32: Image jump w/6], you can display only the images having
a specific rating.
 With [32: Slide show], you can play back only the images having a
specific rating.
 Depending on the computer’s OS, you can see each file’s rating as part
of the file information display or in the provided, standard image viewer
(JPEG images only).
417
Q Quick Control for Playback
During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set the following:
[J: Protect images], [b: Rotate image], [9: Rating], [R: RAW
image processing (1 images only)], [S: Resize (JPEG image only)],
[N: Cropping (JPEG images only)], [ : Highlight alert], [ : AF point
display], [e: Image jump w/6], and [q: Send images to
smartphone*].
For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.
* Not selectable if [Built-in wireless settings]’s [Wi-Fi/NFC] is set to [Disable] under
[54: Communication settings].
1
Press the <Q> button.
 During image playback, press the
<Q> button.
 The Quick Control options will
appear.
an item and set it.
2 Select
 Tilt <9> up or down to select a
function.
 The setting of the selected function is
displayed at the bottom.
 Turn the <5> dial to set it.
 For RAW image processing, Resize,
and Cropping, press <0> and set
the function. For details, see “RAW
image processing” (p.446), “Resize”
(p.452), or “Cropping” (p.454).
 To cancel, press the <M> button.
the setting.
3 Exit
 Press the <Q> button to exit the
Quick Control.
418
Q Quick Control for Playback
To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.444). If [51:
Auto rotate] is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be
recorded to the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.
 Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the
single-image display, and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing
the <Q> button again will return to the index display.
 For images taken with another camera, the options you can select may
be restricted.
419
k Enjoying Movies
The three main ways to play back and enjoy movies are as follows:
Playback on a TV Set
(p.432)
By connecting the camera to a TV set
with HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately), you can play back the
camera’s still photos and movies on the
TV set.
 When the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, even 4K
movies will be played back in Full HD quality (they cannot be played
back in 4K quality).
 Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN port, the camera
cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.
 Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB
cable, movies and still photos cannot be played back or saved.
Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor
(p.422)
You can play back movies on the
camera’s LCD monitor.
You can also edit out the movie’s first
and last scenes, select a desired frame
from a 4K movie and save it as a still
photo, and play back the still photos and
movies on the card in an automatic slide
show.
A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played
back with the camera.
420
k Enjoying Movies
Playback and Editing with a Computer
The movie files recorded on the card can
be transferred to a computer and played
back or edited with pre-installed or
general-purpose software compatible
with the movie’s recording format.
 To play back or edit a movie with commercially-available software, use
software compatible with MOV-format and MP4-format movies. For
details on commercially-available software, contact the software
manufacturer.
 MOV-format movies can also be played back with EOS MOVIE Utility
(EOS software, p.597).
421
k Playing Back Movies
1
Play back the image.
 Press the <x> button to play back
images.
a movie.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
movie to be played back.
 In the single-image display, the
<s1> icon displayed on the
upper left indicates a movie.
 In the index display, perforations at
the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As movies cannot be played
back from the index display, press
<0> to switch to the single-image
display.
the single-image display, press
3 In<0>.
 The movie playback panel will appear
at the bottom of the screen.
back the movie.
4 Play
 Turn the <5> dial to select [7]
(Play), then press <0>.
 The movie will start playing back.
 You can pause the movie playback by
Speaker
pressing <0>. Press it again to
resume the playback.
 You can adjust the sound volume during movie playback by turning
the <6> dial.
 For more details on the playback procedure, see the next page.
 Before listening to a movie through headphones, turn down the volume
to avoid hurting your ears.
 The camera may not be able to play back movies shot with another camera.
422
k Playing Back Movies
Movie Playback Panel
Operation
Playback Description
7 Play
Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.
8 Slow motion
Adjusts the slow motion speed by turning the <5>
dial. The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper
right of the screen.
5 First frame
Displays the movie’s first frame.
3 Previous frame
Displays the previous frame each time you press
<0>. Holding down <0> will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame
Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press
<0>. Holding down <0> will fast forward the movie.
4 Last frame
Displays the movie’s last frame.
X Edit
Displays the editing screen (p.425).
Frame Grab
Selectable when a 4K movie is played. You can grab
the frame displayed on the screen and save it as a still
photo (JPEG image, p.427).
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Playback time (minutes:seconds with [Movie play
count: Rec time] set)
hh:mm:ss.ff (DF)
hh:mm:ss:ff (NDF)
Time code (hours:minutes:seconds:frames with
[Movie play count: Time code] set)
9 Volume
Adjusts the volume of the built-in speaker (p.422) or
headphones by turning the <6> dial.
32
Returns to the single-image display by pressing the
<M> button.
423
k Playing Back Movies
Playback with the Touch Screen
Tap [7] at the center of the
screen.
 The movie will start playing back.
 To display the movie playback panel,
tap <s1> on the upper left of the
screen.
 To pause the movie while it is playing
back, tap on the screen. The movie
playback panel will also appear.
Playing High Frame Rate Movies
HD movies shot at a high frame rate (119.9 fps or 100.0 fps) will be
played back at 1/4-speed slow motion (29.97 fps or 25.00 fps). No
sound will be played back because no sound is recorded when shooting
High Frame Rate movies. Note that each second of playback time and
the time code count up equals to 1/4 sec. in real time.
 If you connect the camera to a TV set to play a movie (p.432), adjust the
sound volume with the TV set. (Turning the <6> dial will not change
the sound volume.)
 If you detach or attach the lens, the card’s writing speed is slow, or the
movie file contains corrupted frames during movie playback, the movie
playback will stop.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the continuous playback time
at room temperature (23°C/73°F) will be approx. 2 hr. 30 min. (with the
following settings: L 6/5/B/ 4X).
 By connecting commercially-available headphones equipped with
a 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini plug to the camera’s headphone
terminal (p.29), you can listen to the movie sound (p.363).
424
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.
increments.
1
On the movie playback screen,
select [X].
 The movie editing panel will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
the part to be edited out.
2 Specify
 Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or
[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.
 Tilt <9> to the left or right to see the
previous or next frames. Holding
down the key will fast forward or fast
rewind the frames. Turn the <5> dial
for frame-by-frame playback.
 After deciding which part to edit out,
press <0>. The portion highlighted
in white on the top of the screen is
what will remain.
the edited movie.
3 Check
 Select [7] and press <0> to play
back the edited movie.
 To change the editing part, go back to
step 2.
 To cancel the editing, press the
<M> button, then select [OK] on
the confirmation dialog.
425
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
the edited movie.
4 Save
 Select [W], then press <0>.
 The save screen will appear.
 To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.
 On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK] to save the edited movie and
return to the movie playback screen.
X
 Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position
indicated by [ ] on the top of the screen), the actual position where the
movie is edited may differ from the position you specified.
 If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
 When the battery level is low, movie editing is not possible. Use a fullycharged battery.
 Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.
 You cannot edit a movie when the camera is connected to a computer.
426
Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies
From a 4K movie, you can select any desired frame to save it as an
approx. 8.8 megapixel (4096x2160) still photo (JPEG image). This
function is called “Frame Grab (4K frame capture)”.
1
Play back the image.
 Press the <3> button to play back
images.
a 4K movie.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial and select a 4K
quality movie.
 On the shooting information screen
(p.401), the 4K movie is indicated
with the [H] icon.
 With the index display, press <0> to
switch to the single-image display.
the single-image display, press
3 In<0>.
 The movie playback panel will appear
at the bottom of the screen.
a frame to grab.
4 Select
 Use the movie playback panel to
select the frame to grab as a still
photo.
 For details on using the movie
playback panel, see page 423.
[ ].
5 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select [
],
then press <0>.
427
Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies
the frame.
6 Save
 Select [OK] to save the frame
displayed on the screen as a still
photo (JPEG image).
 Check the destination folder and
image file number.
the image to be displayed.
7 Select
 Select [View original movie] or
[View extracted still image].
 The selected image will be displayed.
 Frame grabbing is not possible with Full HD movies or 4K movies shot
with a different camera.
 Frame grabbing is not possible if the camera is connected to a computer.
428
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
1
Number of images to be
played back
Select [Slide show].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Slide
show], then press <0>.
the images to be played
2 Select
back.
 Select the desired option on the
screen, then press <0>.
All images/Movies/Stills/Protect
 Turn the <5> dial to select one of
the following: [jAll images]
[kMovies] [zStills] [JProtect].
Then press <0>.
Date/Folder/Rating
 Turn the <5> dial to select one of
the following: [iDate] [nFolder]
[9Rating].
 When <zH> is highlighted,
press the <B> button.
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Date
Folder
Rating
429
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Item
Playback Description
jAll images
All the still photos and movies on the card will be played
back.
iDate
Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date
will be played back.
nFolder
Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played
back.
kMovies
Only the movies on the card will be played back.
zStills
Only the still photos on the card will be played back.
JProtect
Only the protected still photos and movies on the card will be
played back.
9Rating
Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will
be played back.
the playback as desired.
3 Set
 Select [Set up], then press <0>.
 Set the [Display time] and [Repeat]
settings for still photos.
 After completing the settings, press
the <M> button.
Display time
Repeat
The images on the card selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under
[51: Record func+card/folder sel.] will be played back.
430
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
the slide show.
4 Start
 Select [Start], then press <0>.
 After [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
the slide show.
5 Exit
 To exit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the <M>
button.
 To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be
displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume
the slide show.
 During the automatic playback of still images, you can press the <B>
button to switch the display format (p.394).
 During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the
<6> dial.
 During auto playback or pause, you can turn the <5> dial to view
another image.
 During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.
 The display time may differ depending on the image.
 To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 432.
431
Viewing Images on a TV Set
By connecting the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable (sold separately),
you can play back the camera’s still photos and movies on the TV set. For
the HDMI cable, HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended.
If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [53: Video
system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the
video system of your TV set).
1
Connect the HDMI cable to the
camera.
 With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo
facing the front of the camera, insert it
into the <D> terminal.
the HDMI cable to the TV
2 Connect
set.
 Connect the HDMI cable to the TV
set’s HDMI IN port.
on the TV set and switch the
3 Turn
TV set’s video input to select the
connected port.
the camera’s power switch to
4 Set
<1>.
the <x> button.
5 Press
 The image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
 The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected TV set.
 By pressing the <B> button, you
can change the display format.
 To play back movies, see page 422.
432
Viewing Images on a TV Set
 When the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, even 4K
movies will be played back in Full HD quality (they cannot be played
back in 4K quality).
 Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot
be adjusted with the camera.
 Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
TV set, turn off the camera and TV set.
 Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
 Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
 Certain TV sets may not display the images due to incompatibility.
Using HDMI CEC TV Sets
If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible
with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback
operations.
* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that
you can control them with one remote control unit.
1
Select [Ctrl over HDMI].
 Under the [33] tab, select [Ctrl over
HDMI], then press <0>.
2 Select [Enable].
the camera to a TV set.
3 Connect
 Use an HDMI cable to connect the
camera to the TV set.
 The TV set’s input will switch
automatically to the HDMI port
connected to the camera. If it does not
switch automatically, use the TV set’s
remote control to select the HDMI IN
port the cable is connected to.
433
Viewing Images on a TV Set
the camera’s <x> button.
4 Press
 An image will appear on the TV
screen and you can use the TV set’s
remote control for playback.
an image.
5 Select
 Point the remote control toward the
TV set and press the / button to
select an image.
the remote control’s Enter
6 Press
button.
Still photo playback menu
 The menu appears and you can
perform the playback operations
shown on the left.
 Press the remote control’s /
: Return
button to select the desired option,
: 9-image index
then press the Enter button. For a
: Play movie
slide show, press the / button to
: Slide show
select an option, then press the Enter
: Display shooting info
button.
: Rotate
 If you select [Return] and press the
Enter button, the menu will disappear
and you can use the / button to
select an image.
Movie playback menu
During the two-image display (p.408), playback with the TV set’s remote
control is not possible. To use the TV’s remote control for playback, first
press the <X> button to return to the single-image display.
 Certain TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection.
For details, refer to the TV set’s Instruction Manual.
 Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not be
operated properly. In such a case, set [33: Ctrl over HDMI] to
[Disable], and use the camera to control the playback operation.
434
a Copying Images
You can copy the images recorded on one card (save duplicates) to the
other card.
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
 If you are copying images between cards and the copy target card is
formatted in FAT32 (p.74), movie files exceeding 4 GB recorded on the
exFAT-formatted copy source card cannot be copied.
 Movie files exceeding 4 GB can be copied between cards when both
Card1 (f) and Card2 (g) are formatted in exFAT.
3 Copying a Single Image
1
Select [Image copy].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Image
copy], then press <0>.
[Sel.Image].
2 Select
 Check the copy source card’s
number, the target card’s number and
its remaining capacity.
 Select [Sel.Image], then press <0>.
The copy source is the card selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under
[51: Record func+card/folder sel.].
435
a Copying Images
Lowest file number
Number of images in folder
the folder.
3 Select
 Select the folder containing the image
you want to copy, then press <0>.
 Check the images displayed on the
right to select the desired folder.
 The images in the selected folder will
be displayed.
Folder name
Highest file number
Total images selected
the images to be copied.
4 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select an image
to be copied, then press <0>.
 The [X] icon will appear on the upper
left of the screen.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the dial clockwise.
 To select another image to be copied,
repeat step 4.
the <c> button.
5 Press
 After selecting all the images to be
copied, press the <c> button.
[OK].
6 Select
 Check the card where the images will
be copied to, then select [OK].
436
a Copying Images
the target folder.
7 Select
 Select the target folder to which you
want to copy the images, then press
<0>.
 To create a new folder, select [Create
folder].
[OK].
8 Select
 Check the information of the source
card and target card, then select
[OK].
 The copying will start and the
progress will be displayed.
 When the copying is completed, the
result will be displayed. Select [OK] to
return to the screen in step 2.
3 Copying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can copy all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
Under [x1: Image copy], when you
select [Sel.n] or [All images], you can
copy all the images in the folder or on a
card.
437
a Copying Images
 If an image is being copied to a target folder/card which has an image
with the same file number, the following will be displayed: [Skip image
and continue] [Replace existing image] [Cancel copy]. Select the
copying method, then press <0>.
• [Skip image and continue]: Any images having the same file number
will be skipped and not copied.
• [Replace existing image]: Any images having the same file number
(including protected images) will be
overwritten.
If an image with a print order (p.471) is overwritten, you will have to set
the print order again.
 If [Sel.n] or [All images] is selected and the folder or card has a movie
file exceeding 4 GB that cannot be copied to the target, a message will
appear. Only the still photos and the movie files not exceeding 4 GB will
be copied.
 The image’s print order information, image transfer information, or photo
book order information will not be retained when the image is copied.
 Shooting is not possible during the copying process. Select [Cancel]
before shooting.
 The file name of the copied image will be the same as the original
image’s file name.
 If [Sel.Image] is set, you cannot copy images in multiple folders at once.
Select images in each folder to copy them folder by folder.
438
L Erasing Images
You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or
erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.412) will not be erased.
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no
longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images
from being erased accidentally, protect them. Erasing a RAW+JPEG
image will erase both the RAW and JPEG images.
Erasing a Single Image
1
Select the image to be erased.
 Press the <x> button to play back
images.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be erased.
the <L> button.
2 Press
 The Erase menu will appear.
the image.
3 Erase
 Select [Erase], then press <0>. The
image displayed will be erased.
Setting [84: Default Erase option] to [[Erase] selected] makes it faster to
erase images (p.492).
439
L Erasing Images
3 Checkmarking [X] Images to Be Erased in a Batch
By adding checkmarks <X> to the images to be erased, you can erase
multiple images at once.
1
Select [Erase images].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Erase
images], then press <0>.
[Select and erase images].
2 Select
 An image is displayed.
the images to be erased.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be erased, then press
<0>.
 A checkmark [X] will be displayed on
the upper left of the screen.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
 To select another image to be erased,
repeat step 3.
the image.
4 Erase
 Press the <L> button, then press
[OK].
 The selected images will be erased at
once.
440
L Erasing Images
3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When [31: Erase images] is set to [All
images in folder] or [All images on
card], all the images in the folder or on
the card will be erased.
 To erase all images including protected images, format the card (p.73).
 When [All images on card] is selected, the images in the card selected
under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.] with [Record/play] or
[Playback] will be erased.
441
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness
The LCD monitor’s brightness is adjusted automatically for optimum
viewing depending on the ambient light level. You can also set the
brightness level of automatic adjustment (brighter or darker), or adjust
the brightness manually.
1
Select [LCD brightness].
 Under the [52] tab, select [LCD
brightness], then press <0>.
[Auto] or [Manual].
2 Select
 Turn the <6> dial to make the
selection.
the brightness.
3 Adjust
 While referring to the gray chart, turn
the <5> dial, then press <0>.
 You can adjust the brightness level to
one of three levels with [Auto], and to
one of seven levels with [Manual].
Automatic adjustment
Manual adjustment
With [Auto] set, be careful not to obstruct the round, external light sensor
(p.29) on the lower left of the Quick Control Dial with your finger, etc.
 To check the image’s exposure, referring to the histogram is
recommended (p.402).
 During playback, pressing the <U> button will display the screen in step 2.
 The last image played back will appear for the screen in step 2.
442
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Setting the LCD Monitor Color Tone
You can change the LCD monitor’s color tone from standard tone to
warm or cool tone.
1
Select [LCD color tone].
 Under the [52] tab, select [LCD
color tone], then press <0>.
the desired color tone.
2 Select
 While looking at the image on the
LCD monitor, select an option (1, 2, 3,
or 4), then press <0>.
 You can select [1: Warm tone], [2:
Standard], [3: Cool tone 1], or [4:
Cool tone 2].
The last image played back is displayed on the screen in step 2.
443
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images
Images shot in vertical orientation are rotated
automatically to the proper orientation for viewing,
so they will not be displayed in horizontal
orientation when played back on the camera’s LCD
monitor or viewed on a computer screen. You can
change the setting of this feature.
1
Select [Auto rotate].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Auto
rotate], then press <0>.
the display orientation.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 OnzD
The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both
the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.
 OnD
The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the computer.
 Off
The vertical image is not automatically rotated.
Auto rotation will not work with vertical images captured while auto rotation
was [Off]. They will not rotate even if you later switch it to [On] for playback.
 The image displayed immediately after shooting will not be automatically
rotated.
 If a picture is taken while the camera is pointing up or down, automatic
rotation to the proper orientation for viewing may not be performed
correctly.
 If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the computer screen,
it means the software you are using does not support image rotation for
display. Using the EOS software is recommended.
444
11
Post-Processing
Images
This chapter explains RAW image processing, JPEG
image resizing, and JPEG image cropping.
 A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in the following modes: <d>
<s> <f> <a> <F>.
 The camera may not be able to process images taken with
another camera.
 Post-processing images as described in this chapter cannot be
performed when the camera is connected to a computer via an
interface cable.
445
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
You can process 1 images with the camera and save them as JPEG
images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can apply different
processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it.
Note that 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the
camera. Use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.596) to
process those images.
1
Select [RAW image processing].
 Under the [31] tab, select [RAW
image processing], then press
<0>.
 1 images will be displayed.
the image to be processed.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to process.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
the desired processing
3 Set
conditions.
 Press <0> to make the RAWprocessing options appear in a while
(p.449).
 Use <9> to select an option, then
turn the <5> or <6> dial to switch
the setting.
 The displayed image will reflect such
settings as “Brightness adjustment”,
“White balance”, etc.
 To return to the image settings at the
time of shooting, press the <B>
button.
446
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Displaying the setting screen
 Press <0> to display the selected
function’s setting screen. Turn the
<5> or <6> dial to change the
setting. Press <0> to finalize the
setting and return to the previous
screen.
the image.
4 Save
 Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.
 When you select [OK], the JPEG
image created by processing will be
saved to the card.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To process another image, repeat
steps 2 to 4.
447
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Magnified View
You can magnify the image by pressing the <u> button in step 3. The
magnification will differ depending on the [Image quality] setting under
[x1: RAW image processing]. With <9>, you can scroll around the
magnified image.
To cancel the magnified view, press the <u> button again.
Images with Aspect Ratio Setting
With [z5: Aspect ratio] (p.310) set to an option other than [3:2], frame
lines indicating the image area will be displayed on the shot images.
JPEG images generated from 1 images will be saved with the set
aspect ratio.
Dual Pixel RAW images
The RAW images (p.175) shot with [z1: Dual Pixel RAW] set to
[Enable] can be processed with the camera. However, it cannot
process the RAW image using the Dual Pixel data.
When you process multiple-exposure 1 images, certain settings cannot
be changed.
448
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
RAW Image Processing Options

Brightness adjustment
You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop
increments. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.

White balance (p.192)
You can select the white balance. If you select [Q] and press the
<B> button, you can select [Auto: Ambience priority] or [Auto:
White priority]. If you select [P] and press the <B> button,
you can set the color temperature. The displayed image will reflect
the setting’s effect.

Picture Style (p.183)
You can select the Picture Style. By pressing the <B> button,
you can adjust the sharpness, contrast, and other parameters. The
displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.

Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.201)
You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer. The displayed image will
reflect the setting’s effect.

High ISO speed noise reduction (p.202)
You can set the noise reduction processing for high ISO speeds. The
displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect. If the effect is difficult
to discern, magnify the image (p.448).
 3 Image quality (p.169)
You can set the image quality when creating a JPEG image.
449
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN

Color space (p.217)
You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera’s LCD
monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the difference in the
image will hardly be perceptible when either color space is set.
Lens aberration correction

•
Peripheral illumination correction (p.207)
A phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to
the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the
corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to
discern, magnify the image (p.448) and check the four corners.
The peripheral illumination correction applied with the camera will
be less pronounced than that applied with the Digital Photo
Professional (p.596) at maximum correction amount. If the effects
of correction are not apparent, use Digital Photo Professional to
apply the peripheral illumination correction.
•
Distortion correction (p.209)
Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If
[Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. The image
periphery will be trimmed in the corrected image.
Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, adjust the
sharpness with the Picture Style’s [Sharpness] parameter setting
as necessary.
•
Digital Lens Optimizer (p.210)
By using optical design values, the lens aberrations, diffraction
phenomenon, and degraded resolution due to the low-pass filter
can be corrected. Check the effects of the [Enable] setting with
the magnified view (p.448). The unmagnified view (normal view)
will not show the effects of the Digital Lens Optimizer. When
[Enable] is selected, the chromatic aberration correction and
diffraction correction options will not be displayed. However, both
options will be applied to the processed image.
450
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
•
Chromatic aberration correction (p.211)
Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject’s outline)
due to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set,
the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to
discern, magnify the image (p.448).
•
Diffraction correction (p.212)
The diffraction by the lens aperture degrading the image
sharpness can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected
image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify
the image (p.448).
 Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce exactly the
same results as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software).
 If you perform [Brightness adjustment], noise, banding, etc. may be
intensified with the effects of adjustment.
 When [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set, noise may be intensified with the
effects of correction. Also, depending on the shooting conditions,
stronger application of outline emphasis may result. If necessary, adjust
the Picture Style’s Sharpness.
 When processing images with [Distortion correction] set to [Enable],
AF point display information (p.402) or Dust Delete Data (p.460) will not
be appended to the image.
 The lens correction data for lens aberration corrections is registered
(stored) in the camera.
 The effect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens
used and shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to discern
depending on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.
 See page 211 regarding the correction data for Digital Lens Optimizer.
451
S Resizing JPEG Images
You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it
as a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3, 4,
a, and b images. JPEG c images, RAW images, and frame-grab
images from 4K movies saved as still photos cannot be resized.
1
Select [Resize].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Resize],
then press <0>.
 An image is displayed.
the images to be resized.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to resize.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
the desired image size.
3 Select
 Press <0> to display the image
sizes.
 Select the desired image size, then
press <0>.
Target sizes
the image.
4 Save
 Select [OK] to save the resized
image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To resize another image, repeat steps
2 to 4.
452
S Resizing JPEG Images
Resize Options by Original Image Quality
Available Resize Settings
Original Image
Quality
4
a
b
c
3
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
4
a
k
b
Image Sizes
Sizes for resized images are shown below.
(Approx.)
Image
Quality
Full-frame (3:2)
4:3 (aspect ratio)
4
4464x2976 (13.3 megapixels)
3968x2976 (11.8 megapixels)
a
3360x2240 (7.5 megapixels)
*2976x2240 (6.7 megapixels)
b
1920x1280 (2.5 megapixels)
*1696x1280 (2.2 megapixels)
c
720x480 (350,000 pixels)
640x480 (310,000 pixels)
Image
Quality
16:9 (aspect ratio)
1:1 (aspect ratio)
2976x2976 (8.9 megapixels)
4
*4464x2512 (11.2 megapixels)
a
*3360x1888 (6.3 megapixels)
2240x2240 (5.0 megapixels)
b
1920x1080 (2.1 megapixels)
1280x1280 (1.6 megapixels)
c
*720x408 (290,000 pixels)
480x480 (230,000 pixels)
 The actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk
may differ slightly from the aspect ratio indicated.
 The image may be cropped slightly depending on the resizing conditions.
453
N Cropping JPEG Images
You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image.
Cropping an image is possible only with JPEG 3, 4, a, and b
images. Images shot in JPEG c or RAW, and frame-grab images
from 4K movies saved as still photos cannot be cropped.
1
Select [Cropping].
 Under the [x2] tab, select
[Cropping], then press <0>.
 An image is displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to crop.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
the cropping frame size,
3 Set
aspect ratio, position, and
orientation.
 Press <0> to display the cropping
frame.
 The image area within the cropping
frame will be cropped.
 Changing the Cropping Frame Size
Turn the <6> dial to change the cropping frame size. The smaller
the cropping frame, the more magnified the cropped image will look.
 Changing the Aspect Ratio
Turn the <5> dial to change the cropping frame’s aspect ratio. You
can select the aspect ratio as follows: [3:2], [16:9], [4:3], or [1:1].
454
N Cropping JPEG Images
 Moving the Cropping Frame
Use <9> to move the frame over the image vertically or
horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired
image area.
 Switching the Cropping Frame Orientation
Pressing the <B> button will toggle the cropping frame between
the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you to crop the
image shot in horizontal orientation to look as if it was shot in vertical
orientation.
the image area to be
4 Check
cropped.
 Press the <Q> button.
 The image area to be cropped will be
displayed.
 Press the <Q> button again to return
to the original image.
the cropped image.
5 Save
 Press <0> and select [OK] to save
the cropped image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To crop another image, repeat steps 2
to 5.
 Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized.
 AF point display information (p.402) and Dust Delete Data (p.460) will
not be appended to the cropped images.
455
456
12
Sensor Cleaning
The camera has a Self Cleaning Sensor Unit to
automatically shake off dust adhered to the image
sensor’s front layer (low-pass filter).
The Dust Delete Data can also be appended to the
image so that the dust spots remaining can be deleted
automatically by Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software, p.596).
Smudges adhering to the front of the sensor
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases,
lubricant from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of
the sensor. If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor
cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
457
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self
Cleaning Sensor Unit is activated to automatically shake off any dust on
the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this
operation. However, you can manually perform sensor cleaning or can
disable this unit as follows.
Activating the Sensor Cleaning Manually
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
[Clean nowf].
2 Select
 Select [Clean nowf], then press
<0>.
 Select [OK].
 The screen will indicate that the sensor is being cleaned. (A small
sound may be heard.) Although there will be a mechanical sound of
the shutter during sensor cleaning, the picture will not be recorded to
the card.
 After sensor cleaning is finished, the camera will automatically
restart (turn off and on).
458
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning
 For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed
upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.
 Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.
Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]
option remains disabled temporarily.
 Dots of light may appear on images if the sensor is affected by cosmic
rays, etc. By selecting [Clean nowf], their appearance may be
suppressed (p.571).
Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning
 In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].
 The sensor will no longer be cleaned when you set the power switch
to <1> or <2>.
459
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust
that may be visible on captured images. However, for the case where
visible dust still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the
image for erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by
Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.596) to erase the dust
spots automatically.
Preparation
 Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
 Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
 Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to
infinity (∞). If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to
face toward you and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.
Obtaining the Dust Delete Data
1
Select [Dust Delete Data].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Dust
Delete Data], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 After the automatic self-cleaning of
the sensor is performed, a message
will appear. Although there will be a
mechanical sound of the shutter
during the cleaning, no picture is
taken.
460
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
a solid-white object.
3 Shoot
 At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.




- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a
patternless, solid-white object and
take a picture.
The picture will be taken in aperturepriority AE mode at an aperture of
f/22.
Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there
is no card in the camera.
When the picture is taken, the camera
will start collecting the Dust Delete
Data. When the Dust Delete Data is
obtained, a message will appear.
If the data is not obtained
successfully, an error message will
appear. Follow the “Preparation”
procedure on the preceding page,
then select [OK]. Take the picture
again.
461
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
Dust Delete Data
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG
and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is
recommended that you update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it
again.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software,
p.596) to erase dust spots, refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual.
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly
affects the image file size.
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the
object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software).
462
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can
be removed manually with a commercially-available blower, etc. Before
cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.
The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be
cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
2 Select [Clean manually].
[OK].
3 Select
 In a moment, the reflex mirror will lock
up and the shutter will open.
 “CLn” will blink on the LCD panel.
4 Clean the sensor.
the cleaning.
5 End
 Set the power switch to <2>.
If you will clean the sensor manually, make sure to use a fully-charged
battery.
Using the household power outlet accessories (sold separately, p.530) is
recommended.
463
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
 While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the
power is cut off, the shutter will close and the reflex mirror will go
back down. These may result in damaging the image sensor,
shutter curtains, and reflex mirror.
• Setting the power switch to <2>.
• Removing or inserting the battery.
 The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor
with care.
 Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the
sensor.
 Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If
the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or
reflex mirror may get damaged.
 Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. Pressurized air
may damage the sensor, and sprayed gas may freeze on the sensor and
scratch it.
 If the battery level becomes low while cleaning the sensor, the beeper
will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
 If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
464
13
Transferring Images to a
Computer and Print Ordering
 Transferring Images to a Computer (p.466)
You can connect the camera to a computer and operate the
camera alone to transfer images recorded on the card to
the computer.
 Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.471)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print
images recorded on the card according to your printing
instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,
etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or create a
print order for a photofinisher.
 Specifying Images for a Photobook (p.476)
You can specify some of the images saved on the card for
printing in a photobook.
465
d Transferring Images to a Computer
You can connect the camera to a computer and operate the camera to
transfer images on the card to the computer. This is called direct image
transfer.
You can perform the direct image transfer with the camera while
looking at the LCD monitor.
The images transferred to the computer will be saved in the [Pictures]
or [My Pictures] folder and organized in folders by shooting date.
Before connecting the camera to a computer, install EOS Utility (EOS
software, p.596) to your computer (p.597).
Preparing Image Transfer
the camera’s power switch to
1 Set
<2>.
the camera to a
2 Connect
computer.
 Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
 When connecting the cable to the
camera, use the cable protector
(p.38). Connect the cable to the
digital terminal with the plug’s
<
> icon facing the back of the
camera.
 Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal.
Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (p.525). When
connecting the interface cable, use the provided cable protector (p.38).
466
d Transferring Images to a Computer
the power switch to <1>.
3 Set
 When the computer displays a screen
to select the program, select [EOS
Utility].
 The EOS Utility screen will appear on
the computer.
After the EOS Utility screen appears, do not operate EOS Utility. If any
screen other than EOS Utility’s main window is displayed, [Direct transfer]
in step 5 on page 469 will not be displayed. (You cannot transfer images to
the computer.)
 If the EOS Utility screen does not appear, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual.
 Before disconnecting the cable, turn off the camera. Hold the plug (not
the cord) to pull out the cable.
3 Transferring RAW+JPEG Images
For RAW+JPEG images, you can specify
which image to transfer.
On the next page in step 2, select
[RAW+JPEG transfer], then select the
image to be transferred: [JPEG only],
[RAW only], or [RAW+JPEG].
This [RAW+JPEG transfer] setting is linked to the [RAW+JPEG transfer]
setting under [54: Communication settings] 9 [FTP transfer settings]
9 [Transfer type/size], and the two will always remain synchronized.
467
d Transferring Images to a Computer
3 Selecting the Images to be Transferred
 Selecting Images
1
Select [Image transfer].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Image
transfer], then press <0>.
2 Select [Image sel./transfer].
3 Select [Sel.Image].
the images to be transferred.
4 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the image
to be transferred, then press <0>.
 Turn the <5> dial to display the [X]
on the upper left of the screen, then
press <0>.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, turn the <6> dial clockwise.
 To select another image to be
transferred, repeat step 4.
 When [Sel.Image] is selected, you can check the image’s transfer status
on the upper left of the screen: No mark: Not selected. X: Selected for
transfer. l: Transfer failed. k: Transfer succeeded.
 The procedures for [RAW+JPEG transfer] (p.467) and steps 1 to 4
above can also be performed even if the camera is not connected to a
computer.
468
d Transferring Images to a Computer
the image.
5 Transfer
 On the computer screen, check that
EOS Utility’s main window is
displayed.
 Select [Direct transfer], then press
<0>.
 On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK] to transfer the images to the
computer.
 Images selected with [Sel.n] and
[All images] can also be transferred
in this way.
 Selecting n
Select [Sel.n] and select [Folder
images not transfer’d]. When you
select a folder, all the images in that
folder not yet transferred to the computer
will be selected.
Selecting [Folder images failed transf.] will select the selected folder’s
images that failed to transfer.
Selecting [Clear folder transf. history] will clear the transfer history of
the images in the selected folder. After clearing the transfer history, you
can select [Folder images not transfer’d] and transfer all the images
in the folder again.
469
d Transferring Images to a Computer
 All images
If [All images] is selected and you select
[Card images not transferred], all the
images on the card not yet transferred to
a computer will be selected.
For a description of [Card images failed
transfer] and [Clear card’s transf.
history], see “Selecting n” on the
preceding page.
 If any screen other than EOS Utility’s main window is displayed on the
computer, [Direct transfer] is not displayed.
 During the image transfer, certain menu options cannot be used.
 You can also transfer movies.
 Shooting is possible even during the image transfer.
 For [Transfer with caption] under [x2: Image transfer], refer to the
“Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Function Instruction Manual” (p.4).
470
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded
on the card according to your printing instructions such as the image
selection, quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one
batch or create a print order for a photofinisher.
You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, file
number imprinting, etc. The print settings will be applied to all printordered images. (They cannot be set individually for each image.)
Setting the Printing Options
1
Select [Print order].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Print
order], then press <0>.
2 Select [Set up].
the options as desired.
3 Set
 Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
 Select the option to be set, then press
<0>. Select the desired setting,
then press <0>.
Print type
Date
File No.
471
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Print type
Date
File number
K
Standard
Prints one image on one sheet.
L
Index
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one
sheet.
K
L
Both
Prints both the standard and index prints.
On
Off
On
Off
[On] imprints the recorded date of the captured image.
[On] imprints the file number.
the setting.
4 ExitPress
the <M> button.
 The print order screen will reappear.
 Next, select [Sel.Image], [Byn], or
[All images] to order the images to
be printed.
472
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
 RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered.
 If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both]
setting (p.471), the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In
such a case, resize the image (p.452), then print the index print.
 Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may
not be imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer.
 With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]
at the same time.
 When printing with DPOF, use the card whose print order specifications
are set. It cannot be printed with the specified print order if you extract
just the images from the card for printing.
 Certain DPOF-compliant printers and photofinishers may not be able to
print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s Instruction
Manual before printing, or check with your photofinisher about
compatibility when ordering prints.
 Do not specify a new print order for a card containing images whose print
order was set by a different camera. All the print orders may be
overwritten inadvertently. Also, the print order may not be possible,
depending on the image type.
You can send images via Wi-Fi to a PictBridge-compatible (Wireless LAN)
printer and print the images (direct printing). For details, refer to “Wi-Fi
(Wireless Communication) Function Instruction Manual” (p.4).
473
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Specifying Images for Printing
 Selecting Images
Select and order images one by one.
If you press the <u> button and turn the
<6> dial counterclockwise, you can
select an image from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, turn the <6> dial clockwise.
Press the <M> button to save the
print order to the card.
 Standard / Both
Quantity
Total images selected
Press <0> to print a copy of the
displayed image. By turning the <5>
dial, you can set the number of copies to
be printed up to 99.
 Index
Checkmark
Index icon
Press <0> to add a checkmark to the
box [X]. The image will be included in
the index print.
 Byn
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the
folder. A print order for one copy of all
the images in the folder will be specified.
If you select [Clear all in folder] and
select the folder, the print order for all the
images in the folder will be canceled.
474
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
 All images
If you select [Mark all on card], one
copy of all the images on the card will be
set for printing.
If you select [Clear all on card], the print
order will be cleared for all the images on
the card.
 Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order
even if you set [Byn] or [All images].
 When using a PictBridge-compatible printer (Wireless LAN), do not
specify more than 400 images for one print order. If you specify more
than this, the images may not all be printed.
475
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When
you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to transfer images to a computer,
the specified images will be copied to a dedicated folder. This function
is useful for ordering photobooks online.
Specifying One Image at a Time
1
Select [Photobook Set-up].
 Under the [x1] tab, select
[Photobook Set-up], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Select images].
the image to be specified.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be specified, then press
<0>.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the dial clockwise.
 To select other images to be
transferred, repeat step 3.
476
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When [x1: Photobook Set-up] is set
to [All images in folder] or [All images
on card], all the images in the folder or
on the card will be specified.
To clear your selections, select [Clear all
in folder] or [Clear all on card].
 RAW images and movies cannot be specified.
 Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another
camera for another photobook with this camera. The photobook settings
may be overwritten.
477
478
14
Customizing the
Camera
You can make fine adjustments to various camera
functions and change the functionality of buttons and
dials to suit your picture-taking preferences with
Custom Functions and Custom Controls.
You can also save the camera’s current settings to the
<w>, <x>, and <y> modes.
Note that the features explained in this chapter can be
set and work in the following shooting modes: <d>,
<s>, <f>, <a>, and <F>.
479
3 Custom FunctionsN
81: Exposure
Exposure level increments
ISO speed setting increments
Bracketing auto cancel
Bracketing sequence
A LV
Shooting
p.482
p.483
k Movie
Shooting
k
k
k
In a
k
k
Number of bracketed shots
p.484
k
Safety shift
p.485
k
Same exposure for new aperture
p.486
k
82: Exposure
Set shutter speed range
Set aperture range
p.488
k
k
k
k
Shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV) shooting or
movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)
480
3 Custom FunctionsN
A LV
Shooting
83: Display/Operation
Warnings z in viewfinder
p.489
LV shooting area display
Dial direction during Tv/Av
k Movie
Shooting
k
p.490
Custom Controls
k
k
Depends on setting
84: Others
Add cropping information
Default Erase option
Retract lens on power off
Add IPTC information
p.491
p.492
p.493
k
(During playback)
k
k
k
85: Clear
Selecting [85: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] will clear all the
Custom Function settings.
Even if [85: Clear all Custom Func.(C.Fn)] is performed, the settings for
[83: Custom Controls] will remain unchanged. Also, although the [84:
Add IPTC information] will be retained, the setting will change to [Disable].
481
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Under the [8] tab, you can customize
various camera features to suit your
picture-taking preferences. Any settings
different from the default will be
displayed in blue.
C.Fn1: Exposure
Exposure level increments
C.Fn1
1/3:1/3-stop
1/2:1/2-stop
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc.
When [1/2-stop] is set, the exposure level will be displayed as shown
below.
ISO speed setting increments
C.Fn1
1/3: 1/3-stop
1/1: 1-stop
You can change the manual ISO speed setting increments to a
whole-stop.
 Even if [1-stop] is set, ISO speed will be automatically set in 1/3-stop
increments when ISO Auto is set.
 Even when [1-stop] is set, you can set ISO 32000.
482
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Bracketing auto cancel
C.Fn1
ON: Enable
When you set the power switch to <2>, the AEB and white
balance bracketing settings will be canceled. AEB settings will also
be canceled when the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie
shooting.
OFF: Disable
The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be
canceled even if you set the power switch to <2>. (If the flash
is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting, AEB will be
canceled temporarily, but the AEB range will be retained.)
Bracketing sequence
C.Fn1
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence
can be changed.
0-+: 0, -, +
-0+: -, 0, +
+0-: +, 0, White Balance Bracketing
B/A Direction
M/G Direction
0 : Standard exposure 0 : Standard white balance 0 : Standard white balance
- : Decreased exposure - : Blue bias
- : Magenta bias
+ : Increased exposure + : Amber bias
+ : Green bias
AEB
483
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Number of bracketed shots
C.Fn1
The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can
be changed from the default 3 shots, to 2, 5, or 7 shots.
When [81: Bracketing sequence] is set to [0, -, +], the bracketed
shots will be taken as shown in the table below.
3: 3 shots
5: 5 shots
2: 2 shots
7: 7 shots
(1-stop/step increments)
1st Shot
2nd Shot 3rd Shot
4th Shot
5th Shot
3: 3 shots Standard (0)
-1
2: 2 shots Standard (0)
±1
5: 5 shots Standard (0)
-2
-1
+1
+2
7: 7 shots Standard (0)
-3
-2
-1
+1
6th Shot
7th Shot
+2
+3
+1
If [2 shots] is set, you can select the + or - side when setting the AEB
range. With WB bracketing, the 2nd shot will be adjusted towards either the
B/A or M/G direction.
484
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Safety shift
C.Fn1
OFF: Disable
Tv/Av: Shutter speed/Aperture
Takes effect in the <s> shutter-priority AE and <f> aperturepriority AE modes. If the subject brightness changes and the
standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure
range, the camera will automatically change the manually-selected
setting to obtain the standard exposure.
ISO: ISO speed
Works in the <d> Program AE, <s> shutter-priority AE, and
<f> aperture-priority AE modes. If the subject brightness
changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the
autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the
manually set ISO speed to obtain the standard exposure.
 When [ISO speed] is set, safety shift will also work with AEB shooting in
the <a> mode.
 Under [z2: ISO speed settings], even if [Range for stills] or [Min.
shutter spd.] is changed from the default setting, safety shift will
override it if the standard exposure cannot be obtained.
 The minimum and maximum ISO speeds of the safety shift using the ISO
speed will be determined by the [Auto range] setting (p.181). However, if
the manually set ISO speed exceeds the [Auto range], the safety shift
will take effect up or down to the manually set ISO speed.
 Safety shift will take effect if necessary even when flash is used.
485
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Same exposure for new aperture
C.Fn1
If the <a> mode (manual exposure shooting) is set and the ISO
speed is set manually (except when set to ISO Auto), the open
aperture value may change to a higher number (a smaller aperture) if
you perform any of the following: 1. Change the lens, 2. Attach an
extender, or 3. Use a zoom lens whose open aperture value (f/number)
changes. If you then shoot while the maximum aperture is set, the
image will be underexposed by the amount the maximum aperture f/
number changes to a higher number. However, by changing the ISO
speed or shutter speed (Tv) automatically, you can obtain the same
exposure that would be obtained without performing 1, 2, or 3.
OFF: Disable
Automatic changes in settings to maintain the specified exposure
will not be applied. The ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture
already set will be used for shooting. If you perform 1, 2, or 3 and
the maximum aperture becomes slower, adjust the ISO speed and
shutter speed before you shoot.
ISO: ISO speed
If you perform 1, 2, or 3, a higher ISO speed will be set
automatically to compensate for the number of stops the maximum
aperture has become slower. The same exposure that would be
obtained without performing 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained. The ISO
speed will change automatically within the range set with [Range
for stills].
ISO/Tv: ISO speed/Shutter speed
If you perform 1, 2, or 3, a higher ISO speed will be set
automatically to compensate for the number of stops the maximum
aperture has become slower. If the ISO speed reaches the upper
limit of the range set with [Range for stills], a slower shutter
speed will be set automatically. The same exposure that would be
obtained without performing 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained. The
shutter speed will change automatically within the range set with
[82: Set shutter speed range].
486
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Tv: Shutter speed
If you perform 1, 2, or 3, a slower shutter speed will automatically
be set to compensate for the number of stops the maximum
aperture has become slower. The same exposure that would be
obtained without performing 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained. The
shutter speed will change automatically within the range set with
[82: Set shutter speed range].
This function also works in the reverse with the above options: When
the maximum aperture f/number changes to a smaller number (larger
aperture opening).
 This function does not work with macro lenses whose effective aperture
value changes when the magnification changes.
 This function does not work during movie shooting.
 If [ISO speed] is set and the exposure cannot be maintained within the
range set with [Range for stills], the same exposure that would be
obtained without performing 1, 2, or 3 cannot be obtained.
 If [Shutter speed] is set and the exposure cannot be maintained within
the range set with [82: Set shutter speed range], the same exposure
that would be obtained without performing 1, 2, or 3 cannot be obtained.
 If you perform 1, 2, or 3 and the camera turns off (power switch is set to
<2>, etc.) while the exposure is being maintained, the standard
exposure will be updated to the exposure at the moment the camera
turns off.
 This function also works with changes in the highest f/number (minimum
aperture).
 With [ISO speed] or [Shutter speed] set, if you perform 1, 2, or 3 and
then return to the state before performing 1, 2, or 3 without manually
changing the ISO speed, shutter speed, or aperture, the original
exposure setting will be restored.
 If [ISO speed] is set and the ISO speed increases to an expanded ISO
speed, the shutter speed may change to maintain the exposure.
487
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn2: Exposure
Set shutter speed range
C.Fn2
You can set the shutter speed range. In the <s> and <a> modes,
you can set the shutter speed manually within the range you have set.
In the <d> and <f> modes, the shutter speed will be set
automatically within the set shutter speed range (except for movie
shooting). Then select [OK] to register the setting.
Highest speed
You can set it from 1/8000 sec. to 15 sec.
Lowest speed
You can set it from 30 sec. to 1/4000 sec.
Set aperture range
C.Fn2
You can set the aperture range. In the <f>, <a>, and <F> modes,
you can set the aperture manually within the range you have set. (In
the <F> mode, aperture cannot be set manually during movie
shooting.) In the <d> and <s> modes, the aperture will be set
automatically within the set aperture range (except for movie
shooting). Then select [OK] to register the setting.
Min. aperture (Max. f/)
You can set it from f/91 to f/1.4.
Max. aperture (Min. f/)
You can set it from f/1.0 to f/64.
The settable aperture range varies depending on the lens’s maximum and
minimum apertures.
488
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn3: Disp./Operation
Warnings z in viewfinder
C.Fn3
When any of the following functions are set, the <z> icon can be
displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel (p.31).
Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear, then
press <0> to add a checkmark [X]. Then select [OK] to register the
setting.
When monochrome V is set
If the Picture Style is set to [Monochrome] (p.185), the warning
icon will appear.
When WB is corrected
If white balance correction is set (p.198), the warning icon will
appear.
When one-touch image quality is set
If you change the image-recording quality with the one-touch
image quality setting function (p.507), the warning icon will appear.
When M is set
If [z3: High ISO speed NR] is set to [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction] (p.202), the warning icon will appear.
When HDR is set
If [z3: HDR mode] is set (p.263), the warning icon will appear.
If you set any of the checkmarked [X] functions, <z> will also appear for
the respective setting displayed on the Quick Control screen (p.64) and
Custom Quick Control screen (p.510).
489
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Live View shooting area display
C.Fn3
When the aspect ratio (p.310) for Live View shooting is set to [4:3],
[16:9], or [1:1], you can set the display method for the image area.
: Masked
: Outlined
Dial direction during Tv/Av
C.Fn3
: Normal
: Reverse direction
Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture
can be reversed.
In the <a> shooting mode, the turning direction of the <6> and
<5> dials will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the turning
direction of only the <6> dial will be reversed. The <5> dial’s
turning direction in the <a> mode and the turning direction to set
the exposure compensation in the <d>, <s>, and <f> mode
will be the same.
Custom Controls
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials
according to your preferences. For details, see page 495.
490
C.Fn3
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn4: Others
Add cropping information
C.Fn4
If you set the cropping information, vertical lines for the aspect ratio
you set during the Live View shooting will be displayed on the screen.
You can then compose the shot as if you were shooting with a
medium- or large-format camera (6x6 cm, 4x5 inch, etc.).
When you take a picture, the aspect ratio information for cropping the
image with the Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.596) will
be appended to the image. (The image is recorded to the card without
being cropped.)
If you transfer the image to a computer, you can use Digital Photo
Professional to easily crop the image to the aspect ratio that was set at
the time of shooting.
OFF : Off
6:7 :Aspect ratio 6:7
6:6 : Aspect ratio 6:6
5:6 :Aspect ratio 10:12
3:4 : Aspect ratio 3:4
5:7 :Aspect ratio 5:7
4:5 : Aspect ratio 4:5
 If [z5: Aspect ratio] is set to any setting other than [3:2], you cannot
set cropping information for the image.
 Cropping information will also be appended in viewfinder shooting.
However, the cropping range will not be displayed.
 Even if a RAW image with cropping information added is processed with
the camera (p.446), the JPEG image cannot be saved as a cropped
image. When the RAW image is processed, the JPEG image with
cropping information will be saved.
491
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Default Erase option
C.Fn4
During image playback and image review immediately after shooting,
when you press the <L> button, the erase menu appears (p.439). You
can set which option, [Cancel] or [Erase], is to be preselected on this
screen.
If [Erase] is set, you can just press <0> to quickly erase the image.
: [Cancel] selected
L : [Erase] selected
If [Erase] is set, be careful not to erase an image accidentally.
Retract lens on power off
C.Fn4
This is to set the lens retraction mechanism for when a gear-driven
STM lens (such as EF40mm f/2.8 STM) is attached to the camera. You
can set it to retract the extended lens automatically when the camera’s
power switch is set to <2>.
ON : Enable
OFF: Disable
 With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.
 Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.
When [Enable] is set, this function takes effect regardless of the lens’s
focus mode switch setting (AF or MF).
492
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Add IPTC information
C.Fn4
With the IPTC (International Press Telecommunications Council)
information from EOS Utility (EOS software, p.596) registered to the
camera, the IPTC information can be recorded (appended) to the still
photos (JPEG/RAW images) you shoot. Useful for file management
and other tasks utilizing the IPTC information.
Regarding the procedure to register the IPTC information to the
camera and details on registered information, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.
OFF: Disable
The IPTC information will not be recorded to the image.
ON: Enable
During still photo shooting, the IPTC information registered in the
camera will be recorded to the image.
The IPTC information is not appended during movie shooting (MOV or MP4
movies).
 During playback, you can check whether the IPTC information is
appended or not (p.400).
 With Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.596), you can check
the IPTC information recorded in the image.
 Even if [85: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] is selected (p.481), the
IPTC information registered in the camera will not be erased. However,
the setting will be [Disable].
493
494
7 Custom ControlsN
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials for ease
of operation according to your preferences.
1
Select [Custom Controls].
 Under the [83] tab, select [Custom
Controls], then press <0>.
 The Custom Controls setting screen
will appear.
a camera button or dial.
2 Select
 Select a camera button or dial, then
press <0>.
 The name of the camera control and
the assignable functions will be
displayed.
 The diagram on the left will show the
location of the selected button or dial.
a function.
3 Assign
 Select a function, then press <0>.
 If the [z] icon appears on the
bottom left of the screen, you can
press the <B> button and set
other related options.
the setting.
4 Exit
 When you press <0> to exit the
setting, the screen in step 2 will
reappear.
 Press the <M> button to exit.
With the screen in step 2 displayed, you can press the <L> button to revert
the Custom Control settings to their defaults. Note that the [83: Custom
Controls] settings will not be canceled even if you select [85: Clear all
Custom Func. (C.Fn)].
495
7 Custom ControlsN
Assignable Functions to Camera Controls
Function
Page
Metering and AF start
500
AF stop
501
Switch to registered AF function
502
ONE SHOT z AI SERVO/SERVO
AF
k
k*1
k*1
k
k
k*3
k*3
k
k
Switch to registered AF point
Selected AF point z Center/Registered AF point 503
Direct AF point selection
Direct AF area selection
504
Pause Movie Servo AF
k
Metering start
AE lock
504
k
Exposure
AE lock (while button pressed)
AE lock (hold)
k
k
AE lock, AF stop
k
k
k
k
FE lock
505
Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
)
Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
)
Set ISO speed (
during metering)
Exposure compensation (hold button, turn
)
Exposure compensation (hold button, turn
) 506
Shutter speed setting in M mode
Aperture setting in M mode
496
7 Custom ControlsN
p
k
k
k
k*2
k*2
3
k*
k*3
k*4
k*4
k*5
k*6
k*7
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
<
> stands for “AF stop button” provided on super telephoto lenses
equipped with Image Stabilizer.
497
7 Custom ControlsN
Function
Page
Images
One-touch image quality setting
One-touch image quality (hold)
507
Image quality
Picture Style
508
Depth-of-field preview
IS start
508
Menu display
Operation
Register/recall shooting function
k*9
k*9
k
k
Unlock while button pressed
Start movie recording (when k set)
Image replay
Magnify/Reduce (press SET, turn
)
509
Cycle: y•g/o/n
Flash function settings
No function (disabled)
498
7 Custom ControlsN
p
k*8
k*8
k*8
k*8
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
<
> stands for “AF stop button” provided on super telephoto lenses
equipped with Image Stabilizer.
499
7 Custom ControlsN
AF
: Metering and AF start
When you press the button assigned to this function, metering and AF
are performed.
*1: When assigned to the <p> or <A> button,
pressing the <B> button while the setting
screen is displayed will enable you to set the
detailed AF settings. When shooting, pressing the
<p> or <A> button will perform AF as it
was set.
 AF start position
When [Registered AF point] is set, you can press the <p> or
<A> button to switch to the registered AF point.
Registering the AF Point
1. Set the AF area selection mode to one of the following: Single-point
Spot AF (manual selection), Single-point AF (manual selection), AF
point expansion (manual selection ), AF point expansion (manual
selection, surrounding points), or Automatic selection AF. Zone AF
and Large Zone AF cannot be selected.
2. Select an AF point manually.
3. Hold down the <S> button, then press the <U> button. A beep will
sound, and the AF point will be registered, then the registered AF
point will blink.
 When the AF point is registered, the following will be displayed:
• Automatic selection AF:
HP (HP: Home Position)
• Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), Single-point AF (manual
selection), AF point expansion (manual selection ), AF point
expansion (manual selection, surrounding points): SEL
(Center),
SEL HP (Off center)
 To cancel the registered AF point, hold down the <S> button, then
press the <m> button. The registered AF point will also be canceled
if you select [55: Clear all camera settings].
500
7 Custom ControlsN
 AI Servo AF characteristics (p.127)
Press the <p> or <A> button to perform AF with the set case
from [Case 1] to [Case 6].
 AF operation (p.100)
Press the <p> or <A> button to perform AF with the set AF
operation.
 AF area selection mode (p.104)
Press the <p> or <A> button to perform AF with the set AF
area selection mode.
If you want to keep using the currently selected AF point when you
press the <p> or <A> button, set [AF start position] to
[Manually selected AF point]. If you want to keep the currently set AI
Servo AF characteristics, AF operation, and AF area selection mode,
select [Maintain current setting].
 If [24: Orientation linked AF point] is set to [Separate AF pts:
Area+pt] or [Separate AF pts: Pt only], you can separately register the
AF points to be used for vertical (grip up or down) and horizontal
shooting.
 If [Registered AF point] and [AF area selection mode] are both set for
[AF start position], [Registered AF point] will take effect.
: AF stop
The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this
function. Useful when you want to stop the AF during AI Servo AF.
501
7 Custom ControlsN
: Switch to registered AF function
Only while you hold down the depth-of-field preview button or the lens’s
AF stop button, you can apply AF with the following settings: AF area
selection mode (p.104), Tracking sensitivity (p.132), Acceleration/
deceleration tracking (p.133), AF point auto switching (p.134), AI Servo
1st image priority (p.136), and AI Servo 2nd image priority (p.137). Useful
when you want to change the AF characteristics during AI Servo AF.
*2: On the setting screen, press the <B> button to
display the detailed settings screen. Turn the
<5> or <6> dial to select the function to be
registered, then press <0> to add a checkmark
[X]. When you select a function and press <0>,
you can adjust the setting. By pressing the <L>
button, you can revert the settings to their defaults.
: ONE SHOT z AI SERVO/SERVO
You can switch the AF operation. In One-Shot AF mode, when you
press the button to which this function is assigned, the camera switches
to AI Servo AF/Servo AF mode. If you press the button in the AI Servo
AF/Servo AF mode, the camera switches to One-Shot AF mode. Useful
when you need to keep switching between One-Shot AF and AI Servo
AF/Servo AF for a subject that keeps moving and stopping.
*3: On the setting screen, when you press the <B> button, you can select [Switch
only when btn is held] or [Switch each time btn is pressed].
This function does not work during Live View shooting if Multi Shot Noise
Reduction is set.
502
7 Custom ControlsN
: Switch to registered AF point
While the metering timer is active, when you press the depth-of-field
preview button or the lens’s AF stop button, the focusing point can be
switched to the registered AF point.
*4: On the setting screen, when you press the <B> button, you can select [Switch
only when btn is held] or [Switch each time btn is pressed]. To register the AF
point, see page 500.
: Selected AF point z Center/Registered AF point
While the metering timer is active, pressing the <p> (AF area
selection) button will switch between the current AF point and the center
AF point or registered AF point.
*5: On the setting screen, when you press the <B> button, you can select [Switch
to center AF point] or [Switch to registered AF point]. To register the AF point,
see page 500.
:Direct AF point selection
While the metering timer is active, you can select an AF point directly
with the <5> or <9> dial without pressing the <S> button.
*6: With the Quick Control Dial setting screen
displayed, you can press the <B> button, then
set the direction for switching the AF point for
when the <5> dial is turned. The [Direction: AF
point switching] settings for [Horizontal] and
[Vertical] will work for Single-point Spot AF,
Single-point AF, Man. select.c: AF point
expansion, and Expand AF area: Surround. The
[Direction: Zone AF frame switch] settings for
[Cycle through the zones], [Horizontal], and [Vertical] will work with Zone AF.
*7: On the Multi-controller setting screen, you can press the <B> button and select
the AF point ([Switch to center AF point] or [Switch to registered AF point]) the
camera switches to when you press the center of <9>. To register the AF point, see
page 500.
If you assign [Direct AF point selection] to <5> and you want to change
the aperture in the <a> mode, hold down the <A> button and turn the
<6> dial.
503
7 Custom ControlsN
: Direct AF area selection
If the metering timer is active, you can press the <p> (AF area
selection) button to directly select an AF area selection mode without
pressing the <S> button.
: Pause Movie Servo AF
When Movie Servo AF is active, you can pause the AF by pressing the
Depth-of-field preview button or <0>. Press the button again to
resume Movie Servo AF.
Exposure
: Metering start
When you press the shutter button halfway, exposure metering is
performed (AF is not performed).
: AE lock
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock) while the metering timer is active. Useful when you
want to focus and meter the shot separately.
: AE lock (while button pressed)
The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while you hold down the shutter
button.
If you assign [AE lock (while button pressed)] to the shutter button, any
buttons assigned to [AE lock] or [AE lock (hold)] will also work as [AE lock
(while button pressed)].
504
7 Custom ControlsN
: AE lock (hold)
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock). The AE lock will be maintained until you press the
button again. Useful when you want to set the focus and meter
separately or take multiple shots at the same exposure setting.
: AE lock, AF stop
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock) and the AF will stop. Useful with AI Servo AF if you
want to perform AE lock at the same time when AF stops.
: FE lock
For flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function will
fire a preflash and record the required flash output (FE lock).
: Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
)
You can set the ISO speed by holding down <0> and turning the
<6> dial (for still photo shooting only). If this control is used with ISO
Auto set, you can set the ISO speed manually. When the metering timer
(0) ends, ISO Auto will be restored. If you use this function in the
<a> mode, you can adjust the exposure with the ISO speed while
maintaining the current shutter speed and aperture value.
: Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
)
You can set the ISO speed by holding down <p> (AF area selection)
button and turning the <6> dial (for still photo shooting only). The
settable range is the same as with [
: Set ISO speed (hold btn,
turn )].
For movie shooting, setting [
: Set ISO speed (hold btn, turn
[
: Set ISO speed (hold btn, turn )] will not take effect.
)] or
505
7 Custom ControlsN
: Set ISO speed (
during metering)
While the metering timer is active, you can set the ISO speed by turning
the <5> dial. If this control is used with ISO Auto set, you can set the
ISO speed manually. (Even after the metering timer (0) ends, ISO
Auto will not be restored.) If you use this function in the <a> mode, you
can adjust the exposure with the ISO speed while maintaining the
current shutter speed and aperture value.
: Exposure compensation (hold button, turn
)
You can set the exposure compensation by holding down <0> and
turning the <6> dial. Useful when you want to set exposure
compensation in <a> manual exposure with ISO Auto set.
: Exposure compensation (hold button, turn
)
You can set the exposure compensation by holding down <p> (AF
area selection) button and turning the <6> dial. Useful when you
want to set exposure compensation in <a> manual exposure with ISO
Auto set.
The following will work even while the <R> switch is set to the right
(Multi function lock, p.62): [
: Set ISO speed (hold btn, turn
)]
(p.505) and [
: Exposure compensation (hold btn, turn
)].
: Shutter speed setting in M mode
In <a> manual exposure, you can set the shutter speed with the
<6> or <5> dial.
: Aperture setting in M mode
In <a> manual exposure, you can set the aperture with the <5> or
<6> dial.
506
7 Custom ControlsN
Images
: One-touch image quality setting
Pressing the depth-of-field preview button or <B> button will switch to
enable shooting with the image-recording quality set here. If [Show/hide in
viewfinder] has [Image quality] checkmarked [X] (p.84), the imagerecording quality (JPEG or RAW image type) will blink in the viewfinder. After
the shooting ends, the One-touch image quality setting will be canceled and
the image-recording quality will be switched back to the previous quality.
*8: On the setting screen, when you press the <B> button, you can set the imagerecording quality for this function.
: One-touch image quality (hold)
Pressing the depth-of-field preview button or <B> button will switch
to enable shooting with the image-recording quality set here. If [Show/
hide in viewfinder] has [Image quality] checkmarked [X] (p.84), the
image-recording quality (JPEG or RAW image type) will blink in the
viewfinder. Even after shooting, the One-touch image quality setting will
not be canceled. To revert to the previous image-recording quality
setting, press the button assigned to this function again.
*8: On the setting screen, when you press the <B> button, you can set the imagerecording quality for this function.
If RAW or RAW+JPEG is set for the image-recording quality to be switched
to with [One-touch image quality setting] or [One-touch image quality
(hold)], [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] (p.202) will be canceled when
switching is performed. For [z3: High ISO speed noise reduct’n],
[Standard] will be applied for shooting.
You can set the camera to display <z> in the viewfinder and on the LCD
panel for when the image-recording quality is switched with the One-touch
image quality setting (p.489).
: Image quality
Press <0> to display the image-recording quality setting screen
(p.169) on the LCD monitor.
507
7 Custom ControlsN
: Picture Style
Press <0> to display the Picture Style selection setting screen on the
LCD monitor (p.183).
Operation
: Depth-of-field preview
When you press the depth-of-field preview button or <0>, the aperture
will stop down and you can check the depth of field (p.250).
: IS start
If you press the depth-of-field preview button or the lens’s AF stop
button with the lens’s IS switch set to <1>, the lens’s Image
Stabilizer will be activated.
: Menu display
Press <0> to display the menu on the LCD monitor.
: Register/recall shooting function
You can manually set the main shooting functions, such as the shutter
speed, aperture, ISO speed, metering mode, and AF area selection
mode, and can register them to the camera. Only while you hold down
the <p> or <A> button, you can recall and use the registered
shooting function settings to take a picture.
*9: On the setting screen, press the <B> button to
display the detailed settings. Turn the <5> or
<6> dial to select the function to be registered,
then press <0> to add a checkmark [X] to it.
When you select a function and press <0>, you
can adjust the setting. By pressing the <L>
button, you can revert the settings to their defaults.
By selecting [Register current settings], the
camera’s current settings will be registered. To
register the AF point, see page 500.
508
7 Custom ControlsN
: Unlock while button pressed
Even when the <R> switch is set to the right, as long as the depthof-field preview button is held down, you can use the camera control
buttons and dials restricted by [55: Multi function lock] (p.90).
: Start movie recording (when k set)
For movie shooting, pressing the button assigned to this function will
start the movie shooting. To stop the movie shooting, press the button
again.
: Image replay
Press <0> to play back the images.
: Magnify/Reduce (press SET, turn
)
Press <0> to magnify or reduce the images recorded on the card
(p.406). You can also magnify the image during Live View shooting and
movie shooting (p.325, 329).
: Cycle: m/o/n
Pressing the <B> button changes the settable function in the
following sequence: m9o9n.
: Flash function settings
Press <0> to display the flash function setting screen (p.291).
: No function (disabled)
Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the
button.
509
Custom Quick Control
On the standard Quick Control screen (p.64), preset shooting functions
are displayed in the default layout. On the Custom Quick Control
screen, you can customize the screen with your preferred shooting
functions and layout. This feature is called “Custom Quick Control”.
This page explains how to change the layout of the Custom Quick
Control screen. Page 64 explains how to operate the Quick Control, and
page 86 explains how to display the Custom Quick Control screen.
1
Select [Custom Quick Control].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Custom
Quick Control], then press <0>.
2 Select [Start editing layout].
the operation procedure
3 Read
and select [OK].
• Q : Add item
• L : Remove
• s : Select and confirm
 Items displayed on the default screen
are shown on the left.
510
Custom Quick Control
an item.
4 Add
 Press the <Q> button.
 Turn the <5> dial or use <9> to
select the item to be added, then
press <0>.
 To remove an item, select the item,
then press the <L> button.
Otherwise, select [Clear all items] in
step 2.
 For items that let you select the icon
size, turn the <5> dial or use <9>
to select the size, then press <0>.
 For items which can be positioned
and for display sizes, see page 513.
the item.
5 Position
 Use <6>, <5> or <9> to move
the item (framed with directional
wedges) to the desired position.
 If you want to change the size, press
the <B> button to change it.
 Press <0> to place the item. If there
is already an item on that position, it
will be overwritten (deleted).
 To change the position of an item,
select the item, then press <0> to
move it.
If you first want to delete all the items displayed by default, select [Clear all
items] in step 2, then go to step 4.
511
Custom Quick Control
Sample layout
 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to position
other items as desired.
 To delete an item already in position,
select it, then press the <L> button.
the setting.
6 Exit
 Press the <M> button to exit the
setting. The screen in step 2 will
reappear.
Sample screen
the setting screen.
7 Check
 Under [53: z button display
options], check that [Custom Quick
Control screen] has a checkmark
[X] (p.86).
 Press the <B> button to display
the Custom Quick Control screen
(p.86) and check the layout.
 Press the <Q> button to use the
Quick Control (p.64).
Resetting the Custom Quick Control Screen or
Clearing All Items
In step 2, selecting [Revert layout to default] will initialize the current
setting and revert the Custom Quick Control screen to the default layout
(p.510).
Selecting [Clear all items] will delete all the items set. The screen will
then become blank with no items displayed except for the bottom line.
512
Custom Quick Control
Available Items and Display Sizes for the Screen Layout
(Vertical x horizontal cells)
Item and Size
1x1
1x2
1x3
Shooting mode
k
Shutter speed
k
k
Aperture
k
k
ISO speed
k
k
Exposure compensation/AEB setting
k
k
k
Flash exposure compensation
k
k
k
Picture Style
k
White balance
k
k
White balance shift/bracketing
k
k
Auto Lighting Optimizer
k
Custom Controls
k
AF operation
k
AF point selection
k
Metering mode
k
Drive mode
k
2x2
2x3
k
k
k
k
Recording function/card selection
k
k
Date/Time/Zone
k
k
External Speedlite control
k
Highlight tone priority
k
Viewfinder grid
k
Sensor cleaning
k
GPS setting
k
Anti-flicker shooting
k
Long exposure noise reduction
k
High ISO speed noise reduction
k
Select folder
1x5
k
k
k
k
513
Custom Quick Control
 Depending on the items, the amount of displayable information and
settable functions for Quick Control may vary due to their display sizes.
 The same item cannot be placed in multiple positions on the screen.
 In the <A> mode, some menu items are not displayed. Also, some
menu items cannot be set with the Quick Control.
<A> Mode Settings and Display Conditions
You can also set Custom Quick Control and display the Custom Quick
Control screen in the <A> mode.
However, functions such as [Expo.comp./AEB] that are not displayed
on the menu screen for <A> mode will not appear on the Custom
Quick Control screen, even if those items are set to be displayed. Also,
functions such as [ISO speed] that cannot be set with the Quick Control
screen in the <A> mode will be grayed out.
 Not displayed
Exposure compensation/AEB, Flash exposure compensation, White
balance shift/bracketing, Custom Controls, External Speedlite
control, Highlight tone priority, Anti-flicker shooting, Long exposure
noise reduction, High ISO speed noise reduction
 Grayed out (not settable with the Quick Control screen)
Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, Picture Style, White balance,
Auto Lighting Optimizer, AF operation, AF point selection, Metering
mode
514
3 Registering My MenuN
Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom
Functions whose settings you change frequently. You can also name
the registered menu tabs, and press the <M> button to display the
My Menu tab first.
Creating and Adding My Menu Tab
1
Select [Add My Menu tab].
 Under the [9] tab, select [Add My
Menu tab], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 The [MY MENU1] tab is created.
 You can create up to five menu tabs
by repeating steps 1 and 2.
Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)
1
Select [Configure: MY MENU*].
 Turn the <6> dial to select
[Configure: MY MENU*] (tab for
registering menu items), then press
<0>.
515
3 Registering My MenuN
2 Select [Select items to register].
the desired items.
3 Register
 Select the desired item, then press
<0>.
 Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.
 You can register up to six items.
 To return to the screen in step 2,
press the <M> button.
My Menu Tab Settings
You can sort and delete items under the
menu tab, and rename or delete the
menu tab.
 Sort registered items
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select
[Sort registered items] and select the item whose order you want to
change. Then press <0>. With [z] displayed, turn the <5> dial to
change the order, then press <0>.
 Delete selected items / Delete all items on tab
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all
the registered items under the tab.
516
3 Registering My MenuN
 Delete tab
You can delete the My Menu tab currently displayed. Select [Delete
tab] to delete the [MY MENU*] tab.
 Rename tab
You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].
1 Select [Rename tab].
text.
2 Enter
 Press the <L> button to delete any
Input mode
unnecessary characters.
 Operate the <5>, <6>, or <9> to
move the and select the desired
character. Then press <0> to enter
it.
 By selecting [Aaz1@], you can
change the input mode.
 You can enter up to 16 characters.
 To cancel the text entry, press the
<B> button, then select [OK].
the setting.
3 Exit
 After entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
 The set name is saved.
If you cannot enter text in step 2, press the <Q> button and use the
character palette when the blue frame appears.
517
3 Registering My MenuN
Deleting all My Menu tabs / Deleting all items
You can delete all My Menu tabs or all
My Menu items that you created and
registered under the tabs.
 Delete all My Menu tabs
You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select
[Delete all My Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY
MENU5] will be deleted and the [9] tab will revert to its default.
 Delete all items
You can delete only but all the items registered under the [MY
MENU1] to [MY MENU5] tabs. The tab(s) will remain. When [Delete
all items] is selected, all the items registered under all the created
tabs will be deleted.
If you perform [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs], tab names
renamed with [Rename tab] will also be deleted.
518
3 Registering My MenuN
Menu Display Settings
You can select [Menu display] to set the
menu screen that is to appear first when
you press the <M> button.
 Normal display
Displays the last displayed menu screen.
 Display from My Menu tab
Displays with the [9] tab selected.
 Display only My Menu tab
Only the [9] tab is displayed. (The z, 2, 3, 5, and 8 tabs will
not be displayed.)
519
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN
You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting
functions, menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom
shooting modes under the Mode Dial’s <w>, <x>, and <y>
positions.
1
Select [Custom shooting mode
(C1-C3)].
 Under the [55] tab, select [Custom
shooting mode (C1-C3)], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Register settings].
the desired items.
3 Register
 Select the Custom shooting mode to
be registered, then press <0>.
 Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.
 The current camera settings (p.521)
will be registered under the Mode
Dial’s C* position.
Automatic Update of Registered Settings
If you change a setting while you shoot in the <w>, <x>, or <y>
mode, the respective Custom shooting mode can be automatically
updated to reflect the changes in settings (Auto update). To enable this
automatic update, set [Auto update set.] to [Enable] in step 2.
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes
If you select [Clear settings] in step 2, the settings of respective modes
can be reverted to the default settings with no Custom shooting modes
registered.
520
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN
HDR movie shooting and My Menu settings will not be registered under
Custom shooting modes.
 Even in the <w>, <x>, and <y> modes, you can still change
shooting function settings and menu settings.
 By pressing the <B> button, you can check which shooting mode is
registered under <w>, <x>, and <y> (p.87).
Settings To Be Registered
 Shooting functions
Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, AF operation, AF area
selection mode, AF point, Drive mode, Metering mode, Exposure
compensation amount, AEB increment, Flash exposure compensation amount
 Menu display
[z1]
Image quality, Image review time, Beep, Release shutter without card,
Lens aberration correction, Flash firing, E-TTL II flash metering, Flash
sync speed in Av mode
[z2] Exposure compensation/AEB, ISO speed settings, Auto Lighting
Optimizer, White balance, Custom White Balance, White balance shift/
bracketing, Color space
[z3] Picture Style, Long exposure noise reduction, High ISO speed noise
reduction, Highlight tone priority, Multiple exposure (settings), HDR
Mode (settings)
[z4] Interval timer, Bulb timer, Anti-flicker shooting, Mirror lockup
[z5 (Live View shooting)]
Live View shooting, AF method, Touch shutter, Grid display, Aspect
ratio, Exposure simulation
[z6 (Live View shooting)]
Silent LV shooting, Metering timer
521
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN
[z4 (Movie shooting)]
Movie Servo AF, AF method, Grid display, Movie recording quality
(excluding 24.00p), Sound recording, AF speed with Movie Servo AF,
Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity
[z5 (Movie shooting)]
Metering timer, Movie recording count, Movie play count, V button
function, Time-lapse movie (setting), Remote control shooting
[21] Case 1, Case 2, Case 3, Case 4, Case 5, Case 6
[22] AI Servo 1st image priority, AI Servo 2nd image priority
[23] Lens electronic MF, AF-assist beam firing, One-Shot AF release
priority
[24] Lens drive when AF impossible, Selectable AF point, Select AF area
selection mode, AF area selection method, Orientation linked AF point,
Initial AF point with
AI Servo AF, Auto AF point selection: EOS iTR
AF
[25] AF point selection movement, AF point display during focus, VF
display illumination, AF status in viewfinder, AF microadjustment
(excluding adjustment value)
[x2] Image jump with 6
[x3] Highlight alert, AF point display, Playback grid, Histogram display,
Movie play count, Magnification (approx.)
[51] File numbering, Auto rotate, Eye-Fi settings
[52] Auto power off, LCD brightness, LCD color tone, Viewfinder display,
Touch control
[53] Auto cleaning, z button display options, m button function
[55] Multi function lock
[81] Exposure level increments, ISO speed setting increments, Bracketing
auto cancel, Bracketing sequence, Number of bracketed shots, Safety
shift, Same exposure for new aperture
[82] Set shutter speed range, Set aperture range
[83] Live View shooting area display, Dial direction during Tv/Av, Custom
Controls
[84] Add cropping information, Default Erase option, Retract lens on power
off, Add IPTC information
522
15
Reference
This chapter provides reference information for system
accessories, camera features, etc.
Certification Logo
Select [55: Certification Logo Display] and press <0> to
display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other
certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the
camera body, and on the camera’s package.
523
System Map
ST-E2
ST-E3-RT
Dioptric
Adjustment
Lenses Eg
270EX II
430EX III-RT/
600EX II-RT
430EX III
Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX II
Macro Twin Lite
MT-26EX-RT
Bundled
Accessories
Eyecup Eg
Anti-Fog
Eyepiece Eg
Cable protector
Wide Strap
Angle
Finder C
Battery Pack
LP-E6N*1
Hand Strap E2
AC Adapter DC Coupler
AC-E6N*2
DR-E6*2
Battery Grip
BG-E20
Protecting
Cloth PC-E1
524
Battery Charger
LC-E6E
Battery Magazine
BGM-E20 for
LP-E6N/LP-E6
(attached to BG-E20)
Car Battery
Cable CB-570
Car Battery
Charger
CBC-E6
System Map
Headphones
Directional Stereo
Microphone
DM-E1
Timer Remote Remote
Switch
Controller
RS-80N3
TC-80N3
Wireless
Controller
LC-5
EF lenses
Remote Controller
RC-6
HDMI Cable
HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)
Wireless File
Transmitter
WFT-E7 (Ver. 2)*3/
WFT-E7*4
EOS
Solution Disk
Wireless LAN
access point
Interface Cable
IFC-150U II (1.5 m/4.9 ft.)
TV/Video
Connect Station
CS100
Wireless LAN adapter
Ethernet port
Interface Cable
IFC-500U II*5 (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)
USB port
Computer
CF Card
Card reader
Card slot
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory card
*1: Battery Pack LP-E6 can also be used.
*2: AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 can also be used.
*3: Check that the firmware of the WFT-E7 (Ver.2) is Version 1.3.0 or later.
*4: To use the older model WFT-E7 (not Ver. 2), the WFT-E7’s firmware must be updated
and Interface Cable IFC-40AB II or IFC-150AB II must be used.
*5: With IFC-500U II, the communication speed will be equivalent to Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0).
* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.
525
3 Checking the Battery Information
You can check the conditions of the battery you are using on the LCD
monitor. Each Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 has a unique serial number,
and you can register multiple battery packs to the camera. When you
use this feature, you can check the registered batteries’ approximate
remaining capacity and usage history.
Select [Battery info.].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Battery
info.], then press <0>.
 The battery info. screen will appear.
Battery position
Battery model or household power source
being used.
The battery level indicator (p.50) is
displayed together with the remaining
battery level shown in 1% increments.
The number of shots taken with the current
battery. The number is reset when the
battery is recharged.
Battery’s recharge performance level is
displayed in three levels.
(Green): Battery’s recharge performance is fine.
(Green): Battery’s recharge performance is slightly degraded.
(Red): Purchasing a new battery is recommended.
Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is recommended. If
you use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, the camera’s full
performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.
 The shutter count is the number of still photos taken. (Movie shooting is
not counted.)
 The battery information will also be displayed when using Battery Grip
BG-E20 (sold separately).
 If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the message.
526
3 Checking the Battery Information
Registering Batteries to the Camera
You can register up to six LP-E6N/LP-E6 batteries to the camera. To
register multiple batteries to the camera, follow the procedure below for
each battery.
1
Press the <B> button.
 With the battery info. screen
displayed, press the <B> button.
 The battery history screen will
appear.
 If the battery is not registered, it will
be grayed out.
[Register].
2 Select
 The confirmation dialog will appear.
[OK].
3 Select
 The battery will be registered and the
battery history screen will reappear.
 The grayed out battery number will
now be displayed in white.
 Press the <M> button. The battery
info. screen will reappear.
 The battery cannot be registered if the household power outlet
accessories (sold separately, p.530) are used.
 If six batteries are already registered, [Register] cannot be selected. To
delete unnecessary battery information, see page 529.
527
3 Checking the Battery Information
Labeling Serial Numbers on Batteries
It is convenient to label each registered Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6
with their serial numbers, using commercially-available labels.
1
Serial number
Write the serial number on a
label.
 Write the serial number displayed on
the battery history screen on a label
approx. 25 mm x 15 mm / 1.0 in. x 0.6
in. in size.
7c40
0300
the battery and affix the
2 Remove
label.
 Set the power switch to <2>.
 Open the battery compartment cover
and remove the battery.
 Affix the label as shown in the
illustration (on the side with no
electrical contacts).
 Repeat this procedure for all of your
batteries so you can easily see the
serial number.
 Do not affix the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in
step 2. Otherwise, the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert the
battery or impossible to turn on the camera.
 If you use Battery Grip BG-E20 (sold separately), the label may peel off
as you repeatedly insert and remove the battery into the battery
magazine. If it peels off, affix a new label.
528
3 Checking the Battery Information
Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery
You can check the remaining capacity of any battery (even when not
installed) and also when it was last used.
Serial number Date last used
Look for the serial number.
 Refer to the battery’s serial number
label and look for the battery’s serial
number on the battery history screen.
 You can check the respective
battery’s remaining capacity and the
date when it was last used.
Battery level
Deleting the Registered Battery Information
1
Select [Delete info.].
 Follow step 2 on page 527 to select [Delete info.], then press
<0>.
2 Select the battery information to be deleted.
 Select the battery information to be deleted, then press <0>.
 [X] will appear.
 To delete information for another battery, repeat this procedure.
3 Press the <L> button.
 The confirmation dialog will appear.
4 Select [OK].
 The battery information will be deleted and the screen in step 1
will reappear.
529
Using a Household Power Outlet
You can power the camera with a household power outlet by using the
DC Coupler DR-E6 and AC Adapter AC-E6N (each sold separately).
1
Place the cord in the groove.
 Carefully insert the DC coupler’s cord
into the groove without damaging the
cord.
the DC coupler.
2 Insert
 Open the battery compartment cover
DC coupler cord hole
and open the DC coupler cord hole
cover.
 Insert the DC coupler securely until it
locks and put the cord through the
hole.
 Close the cover.
the DC coupler to the AC
3 Connect
adapter.
 Connect the DC coupler’s plug to the
AC adapter’s connector securely.
the power cord.
4 Connect
 Connect the power cord to the AC
adapter and insert the power plug into
a power outlet.
the camera’s power switch to
5 Set
<1> (p.49).
530
Using a Household Power Outlet
 Do not use an AC adapter other than the AC-E6N (sold separately).
 While the camera’s power switch is on, do not connect or disconnect the
power cord or connector, or disconnect the DC coupler.
 After using the camera, unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 can also be used.
531
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can
automatically transfer captured images to a computer or upload them to
an online service via a wireless LAN.
The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on
how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image
transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or
contact the card manufacturer.
The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card
functions (including wireless transfer). In case of a problem
with an Eye-Fi card, please check with the card manufacturer.
Also note that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in
many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card
is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been
approved for use in your area, please check with the card
manufacturer.
1 Insert an Eye-Fi card (p.45).
[Eye-Fi settings].
2 Select
 Under the [51] tab, select [Eye-Fi
settings], then press <0>.
 This menu is displayed only when an
Eye-Fi card is inserted into the
camera.
Eye-Fi transmission.
3 Enable
 Select [Eye-Fi trans.], then press
<0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
 If you set [Disable], there will be no
automatic transmission even with the
Eye-Fi card inserted (transmission
status icon I).
532
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
the connection
4 Display
information.
 Select [Connection info.], then press
<0>.
the [Access point SSID:].
5 Check
 Check that an access point is
displayed for [Access point SSID:].
 You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s
MAC address and firmware version.
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
the picture.
6 Take
 The picture is transferred and the
Transmission status
[H] icon switches from gray (not
connected) to one of the icons in the
sequence below.
 For transferred images, [O] is
displayed in the shooting information
display (p.398).
: No connection with access point.
H(Gray) Not connected
H(Blinking) Connecting... : Connecting to access point.
H(Illuminated) Connected : Connection to access point established.
H() Transferring...
: Image transfer to access point in progress.
533
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards
 If [Wi-Fi/NFC] under [54: Wireless communication settings] [Built-in
wireless settings] is set to [Enable], image transfer with an Eye-Fi card
will not be possible.
 If “J” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card
information. Turn the camera’s power switch off and on again.
 Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In
hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are
prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera beforehand.
 If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and
computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s instruction manual.
 Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image
transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted.
 Because of the communication function, the Eye-Fi card may become
hot.
 The camera’s battery power will be consumed faster.
 During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.
 If you insert a wireless LAN card other than an Eye-Fi card, [51: Eye-Fi
settings] will not appear. Also, the transmission status icon <H> will not
appear.
534
535
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function
All image quality settings selectable
Dual Pixel RAW
d
s
f
a
F
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Aspect ratio*1
Automatically set/Auto
ISO speed
o
Manually set
Picture Style
Automatically set/Auto
o
Manual selection
Auto
o
Preset
White balance Custom
Color temperature setting
Correction/Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
o
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction
o
Highlight tone priority
Peripheral illumination correction
Digital Lens Optimizer
Chromatic aberration correction
Diffraction correction
Anti-flicker
o
Distortion correction
Lens
aberration
correction
shooting*2
Color space
sRGB
o
o
o
o
Adobe RGB
One-Shot AF
o*3
AI Servo AF*2
Servo AF*1
AI Focus AF*2
o*4
AF area selection mode*2
AF
AF point selection
Manual focusing (MF)
o*4
k
AF Microadjustment*2
u+Tracking*1
FlexiZone - Multi*1
FlexiZone - Single*1
536
: Not selectable/Disabled
A
k
k
k
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Function
A
d
s
f
a
F
Single shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k*5
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
High-speed continuous shooting
Low-speed continuous shooting
Drive
Silent single shooting*2
Silent continuous shooting*2
10-sec. self-timer/Remote control
2 sec. self-timer/Remote control
Evaluative metering
Metering
Partial metering
Spot metering
Center-weighted average
Program shift
Exposure compensation
AEB
AE lock
Exposure
Depth-of-field preview
HDR shooting
Multiple exposures
Interval timer*2
k
*6
k
k
k
k
Bulb timer
Mirror lockup*2
Flash exposure compensation
External
Speedlite
FE lock*2
Flash function settings
Custom Function settings
GPS function
k
k
Quick Control
k
Touch control
k
*1: Settable only with Live View shooting (enabled).
*2: Settable only with viewfinder shooting (enabled).
*3: Automatically set for Live View shooting.
*4: Automatically set for viewfinder shooting.
*5: Settable only with ISO Auto set.
*6: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
Live View shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
537
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Movie Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
: Not selectable/Disabled
A
d/F
y
k
Select all movie recording qualities
k
k
k
k
k
HDR movie shooting
k
k
k
k
k
Time-lapse movie
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
Preset
k
k
k
k
Custom
k
k
k
k
Color temperature setting
k
k
k
k
Correction
k
k
k
k
Function
ISO speed
Picture Style
Automatically set/Auto
f
Automatically set/Auto
a
M
k
Manually set
Manual selection
Auto
White balance
s
Auto Lighting Optimizer
o
k
k
k
k
High ISO speed noise reduction*1*2
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
u+Tracking
k
k
k
k
k
FlexiZone - Multi
k
k
k
k
k
FlexiZone - Single
k
k
k
k
k
Manual focusing (MF)
k
k
k
k
k
Movie Servo AF*3
k
k
k
k
k
Highlight tone priority
Lens aberration
correction
AF
538
Peripheral illumination
correction
Chromatic aberration
correction
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Function
Metering
A
d/F
y
k
s
f
a
o
o
o
o
o
k
k
k
k*4
M
Program shift
Exposure
Exposure compensation
k
k
k
*5
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Time code
k
k
k
k
k
HDMI output
k
k
k
k
k
GPS function
k
k
k
k
k
Quick Control
k
k
k
k
k
Touch control
k
k
k
k
k
AE lock
Sound recording*3
Auto
Custom
*1: Cannot be set for 4K movie shooting.
*2: Multi Shot Noise Reduction cannot be set.
*3: Cannot be set for High Frame Rate movie shooting.
*4: Settable only with ISO Auto set.
*5: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
539
Menu Settings
Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting
z: Shooting 1 (Red)
Image quality
Page
1 / 41 / 61
73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, b, c
169
Dual Pixel RAW*
Disable / Enable
Image review time
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold
175
77
Beep
Enable / Touch to
76
Release shutter
without card
Enable / Disable
/ Disable
46
Peripheral illumination: Enable / Disable
Distortion correction*: Disable / Enable
Lens aberration
correction
Digital Lens Optimizer*: Disable / Enable
207
Chromatic aberration: Enable / Disable
Diffraction correction*: Enable / Disable
External Speedlite
control
Flash firing / E-TTL II metering / Flash sync.
speed in Av mode / Flash function settings /
Flash C.Fn settings / Clear settings
289
* Not displayed for movie shooting.
 Shaded menu options are not displayed in the <A> mode.
 What is displayed under [z1: Image quality] depends on the [Record
func.] (p.166) setting under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.]. If
[Rec. separately] is set, set the image quality for each card.
 With movie shooting, certain menu items are not displayed. Also, the
[z6] tab will not appear.
540
Menu Settings
z: Shooting 2 (Red)
Page
Exposure
compensation/AEB
setting*1
1/3- and 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops (AEB
±3 stops)
255
257
ISO speed settings
ISO speed / Range for stills / Auto range /
Minimum shutter speed
177
180
181
182
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
White balance
Disable / Low / Standard / High
Disabled in M or B modes
Q (Ambience priority) / Qw (White priority) /
W/E/R/Y/U/D/O/P (Approx. 2500 - 192
10000)
Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance
White balance shift/
bracketing*2
Color space*3
201
195
White balance correction: B/A/M/G bias,
9 levels each
198
White balance bracketing: B/A and M/G bias,
single-level increments, ±3 levels
199
sRGB / Adobe RGB
217
*1: During movie shooting, [z2: Expo.comp./AEB] will be [z2: Exposure
comp.].
*2: During movie shooting, [z2: WB Shift/Bkt.] will be [z2: WB correction].
*3: Not displayed for movie shooting.
541
Menu Settings
z: Shooting 3 (Red)
Page
Picture Style
DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /
RLandscape / uFine Detail / SNeutral
/ UFaithful / VMonochrome / WUser
Def. 1-3
183
Noise reduction for
long exposures*1
Disable / Auto / Enable
204
High ISO speed noise
reduction*2
Disable / Low / Standard / High /
Multi Shot Noise Reduction*1
202
Highlight tone priority
Disable / Enable
206
Dust Delete Data
Obtain data to be used with Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software) to delete dust
spots
460
Multiple exposure*1
Multiple exposure / Multiple exposure control /
Number of exposures / Save source images /
Continuous multiple exposure / Select image
for multiple exposures
268
HDR Mode*1
Adjust dynamic range / Effect / Continuous
HDR / Auto Image Align / Save source images
263
*1: Not displayed for movie shooting.
*2: Cannot be set for 4K movie shooting.
542
Menu Settings
z: Shooting 4*1 (Red)
Page
Interval timer
Disable / Enable (Interval / Number of shots)
281
Bulb timer*2
Disable / Enable (Exposure time)
261
Anti-flicker shooting
Disable / Enable
215
Mirror lockup
Disable / Enable
276
*1: In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z2].
*2: Settable in the <F> mode.
z: Shooting 5* (Red)
Live View shooting
Enable / Disable
299
AF method
u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /
FlexiZone - Single
316
Touch shutter
Disable / Enable
327
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
309
Aspect ratio
3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1
310
Exposure simulation
Enable / During e / Disable
311
* In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z3].
z: Shooting 6 (Red)
Silent LV shooting
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable
312
Metering timer
4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /
10 min. / 30 min.
313
543
Menu Settings
2: AF1 (Purple)
Page
Case 1
Versatile multi purpose setting
128
Case 2
Continue to track subjects, ignoring possible
obstacles
128
Case 3
Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering
AF points
129
Case 4
For subjects that accelerate or decelerate
quickly
129
Case 5
For erratic subjects moving quickly in any
direction
130
Case 6
For subjects that change speed and move
erratically
131
AI Servo 1st image
priority
Release priority / Equal priority / Focus priority
136
AI Servo 2nd image
priority
Shooting speed priority: -2/-1 / Equal priority: 0
/ Focus priority: +1/+2
137
Lens electronic MF
Enable after One-Shot AF / Disable after OneShot AF / Disable in AF mode
138
AF-assist beam firing
Enable / Disable / IR AF assist beam only
139
One-Shot AF release
priority
Release priority / Focus priority
140
2: AF2 (Purple)
2: AF3 (Purple)
544
Menu Settings
2: AF4 (Purple)
Page
Lens drive when AF
impossible
Continue focus search / Stop focus search
141
Selectable AF point
All points / Only cross-type AF points /
15 points / 9 points
142
Select AF area
selection mode
Manual selection: Spot AF / Manual selection:
1 point AF / Expand AF area:
/ Expand AF
area: Surround / Manual selection: Zone AF /
Manual selection: Large Zone AF / Auto
selection AF
143
AF area selection
method
S 9 M-Fn button / S 9 Main Dial
144
Orientation linked AF
point
Same for both vertical/horizontal / Separate AF
points: Area+point / Separate AF points: Point
only
144
Initial AF Point,
Servo AF
AI
Auto AF point
selection: EOS iTR AF
Initial
AF point selected / Manual
AF point / Auto
146
EOS iTR AF (Face priority) / EOS iTR AF /
Disable
147
Stops at AF area edges / Continuous
148
2: AF5 (Purple)
AF point selection
movement
Selected (constant) / All (constant) / Selected
AF point display during
(pre-AF, focused) / Selected (focused) /
focus
Disable display
149
Auto / Enable / Disable
VF display illumination AF point during AI Servo AF: Non illuminated /
Illuminated
150
AF operation display in
Show in field of view / Show outside view
viewfinder
151
AF Microadjustment
151
Disable / All by same amount / Adjust by lens
545
Menu Settings
3: Playback 1 (Blue)
Page
Protect images
Protect images
412
Rotate image
Rotate images
411
Erase images
Erase images
440
Print order
Specify images to be printed (DPOF)
471
Photobook set-up
Specify images for a photobook
476
Image copy
Copy images between cards
435
RAW image
processing
Process 1 images
446
3: Playback 2 (Blue)
Cropping
Partially crop JPEG images
454
Resize
Downsize JPEG image’s pixel count
452
Rating
[OFF] / l / m / n / o / p
416
Slide show
Set playback description / Display time / Repeat
429
Image transfer
Image selection/transfer / RAW+JPEG transfer /
Transfer with caption
468
Image jump w/6
1 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date / Folder /
Movies / Stills / Protect / Rating
404
546
Menu Settings
3: Playback 3 (Blue)
Page
Highlight alert
Disable / Enable
401
AF point display
Disable / Enable
402
Playback grid
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
396
Histogram display
Brightness / RGB
402
Movie playback count* Recording time / Time code
366
1x (no magnification) / 2x (magnify from
center) / 4x (magnify from center) / 8x (magnify
Magnification (Approx.) from center) / 10x (magnify from center) /
Actual size (from selected point) / Same as last
magnification (from center)
407
Control over HDMI
Disable / Enable
433
* The setting is linked to the [Movie play count] for [Time code] under the [z5
(Movie)] tab.
5: Set-up 1 (Yellow)
Recording function: Standard / Auto switch
card / Record separately / Record to multiple
166
Record/playback / Playback: f / g
168
Folder: Selecting and creating a folder
218
File numbering
Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset
223
File name
Preset code / User setting 1 / User setting 2
220
Auto rotate vertical
images
OnzD / OnD / Off
444
Format card
Erase data on the card by formatting
73
Eye-Fi settings
Displayed when a commercially-available EyeFi card is inserted
532
Record function+card/
folder selection
547
Menu Settings
5: Set-up 2 (Yellow)
Auto power off
LCD brightness
Page
1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. / 30
min. / Disable
Auto: Adjustable to one of three brightness
levels
Manual: Adjustable to one of seven brightness
levels
76
442
LCD color tone
1: Warm tone / 2: Standard / 3: Cool tone 1 /
4: Cool tone 2
443
Date/Time/Zone
Date (year, month, day) / Time (hr., min., sec.) /
Daylight saving time / Time zone
51
Language K
Select the interface language
54
Electronic level: Hide / Show
83
Grid display: Hide / Show
81
Show/hide in viewfinder:
Viewfinder Information
Battery / Shooting mode / White balance /
Drive mode / AF operation / Metering mode /
Image quality (Image type) / Digital Lens
Optimizer / Dual Pixel RAW / Flicker detection
Touch control
548
Standard / Sensitive / Disable
84
72
Menu Settings
5: Set-up 3 (Yellow)
Page
Video system
For NTSC / For PAL
352
432
Battery information
Power source / Remaining capacity / Shutter
count / Recharge performance
526
Auto cleaning f: Enable / Disable
Sensor cleaning
Clean now f
458
Clean manually
463
z button display
options
Displays camera settings / Electronic level / Quick
Control screen / Custom Quick Control screen
86
Custom Quick Control
Start editing layout / Revert layout to default /
Clear all items
510
Live View info switch setting: 1 / 2 / 3 / 4
305
Histogram display
z button LV display
• Brightness/RGB: Brightness / RGB
options
• Display size: Large / Small
306
Reset
Rating / Protect
m button function
415
414
5: Set-up 4 (Yellow)
HDMI output frame
rate*1*2
Auto / 59.94i/50.00i / 59.94p/50.00p / 23.98p
390
GPS setting
GPS / Auto time setting / Position update interval /
GPS information display / GPS Logger
227
Wireless
communication
settings*3
Built-in wireless settings:
Wi-Fi/NFC / Wi-Fi function / Send images to
smartphone / Nickname / Clear settings
FTP transfer settings:
Automatic transfer / Transfer type/size / Transfer
with SET / Set root certification
–
549
Menu Settings
*1: Not settable if [Movie rec quality]’s [24.00p] is set to [Enable] under [z4
(Movie)] tab.
*2: Displayed contents vary depending on the [53: Video system] setting.
*3: For details, refer to “Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Function Instruction
Manual” (p.4).
When using the GPS function, built-in Wi-Fi (wireless commnunication)
function or Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E7 (Ver. 2 / sold separately), be
sure to check the region of use and use the function in accordance with the
laws and regulations of the country or region.
5: Set-up 5 (Yellow)
Page
Multi function lock
Main Dial / Quick Control Dial / Multi-controller
/ AF area selection button / Touch control
90
Custom shooting
modes (C1-C3)
Register setting / Clear settings / Auto update
settings
520
Clear all camera
settings
Resets the camera to the default settings
77
Copyright information
Display copyright information / Enter author’s
name / Enter copyright details / Delete
copyright information
225
Certification Logo
Display
Displays some of the logos of the camera’s
certifications
523
z firmware ver.
Select to update the firmware of the camera,
lens, Speedlite, or wireless file transmitter
To prevent an inadvertent update in the firmware, selecting [55: z
firmware ver.] will disable touch control.
550
–
Menu Settings
8: Custom Functions (Orange)
C.Fn1: Exposure
482
C.Fn2: Exposure
C.Fn3: Display/
Operation
488
Customize camera functions as desired
C.Fn4: Others
C.Fn5: Clear
Page
489
491
Clear all Custom Function settings
481
Add My Menu tabs 1-5
515
9: My Menu (Green)
Add My Menu tab
Delete all My Menu tabs Delete all My Menu tabs
518
Delete all items
Delete all items under My Menu tabs 1-5
518
Menu display
Normal display / Display from My Menu tab /
Display only My Menu tab
519
551
Menu Settings
Movie Shooting
z: Shooting 2 (Movie) (Red)
ISO speed settings
Page
ISO speed / Range for movies / Range for H
379
z: Shooting 4*1 (Movie) (Red)
Movie Servo AF
Enable / Disable
380
AF method
u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi / FlexiZone Single
382
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
382
MOV / MP4
351
Movie recording size*2
• 4K (4096x2160) / Full HD (1920x1080)
• NTSC: 59.94p / 29.97p / 23.98p
Movie recording quality PAL: 50.00p / 25.00p
• MJPG (Motion JPEG) / ALL-I (For editing) /
IPB (Standard) / IPB (Light)
24.00p: Disable / Enable
High Frame Rate: Disable /
357
Enable*3
Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable
Sound recording
Recording level
Wind filter: Disable / Enable
Attenuator: Disable / Enable
552
352
358
362
363
Menu Settings
Page
Movie Servo AF
Speed*4
Movie Servo AF track
sensitivity*4
When active: Always on / During shooting
AF speed: Slow (-7/-6/-5/-4/-3/-2/-1) /
Standard / Fast (+1/+2)
Locked on (-3/-2/-1) / 0 /
Responsive (+1/+2/+3)
383
384
*1: In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z2].
*2: The movie recording size will vary depending on the [MOV/MP4], [24.00p], and
[High Frame Rate] settings and the [53: Video system] setting.
*3: High Frame Rate movies will be shot in HD quality.
*4: Not settable if [z4: AF method] is set to [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone Multi].
z: Shooting 5*1 (Movie) (Red)
Metering timer
4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /
10 min. / 30 min.
385
Time code
Count up / Start time setting / Movie recording
count / Movie play count*2 / HDMI / Drop
frame*3
365
V button function
/- / q/- /
/k / q/k
386
Time-lapse movie
Disable / Enable (Interval / No. of shots / Time
required / Playback time / Card- time left)
371
HDMI display
a / awithout information / A+a
387
Remote control
shooting
Disable / Enable
389
*1: In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z3].
*2: Setting is linked to [x3: Movie play count].
*3: Displayed when 2(119.9fps), 8(59.94fps), or 6(29.97fps) is set.
553
Troubleshooting Guide
If a problem occurs with the camera, first consult this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Power-Related Problems
The battery does not recharge.
 If the battery’s remaining capacity is 94% or higher, the battery will
not be recharged (p.526).
 Do not use any battery other than genuine Canon Battery Pack
LP-E6N/LP-E6.
The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.
 If (1) the battery charger or battery has a problem or (2)
communication with the battery failed (with a non-Canon battery
pack), the protection circuit will stop charging, and the charge
lamp will blink in orange at a high speed. In the case of (1), unplug
the charger’s power plug from the power outlet. Detach and
reattach the battery to the charger. Wait a few minutes, then
reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the problem
persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
The charger’s lamp does not blink.
 If the internal temperature of the battery attached to the charger is
high, the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp
off). During charging, if the battery’s temperature becomes high for
any reason, charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks). When the
battery temperature goes down, charging will resume automatically.
The camera is not activated even when the power switch is set to <1>.




554
Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.44).
Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (p.44).
Recharge the battery (p.42).
Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.45).
Troubleshooting Guide
The access lamp still lights or blinks even when
the power switch is <2>.
 If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the
card, the access lamp will remain on or continue to blink for a few
seconds. When the image recording is completed, the power will
turn off automatically.
[Does this battery/do these batteries display the Canon logo?]
is displayed.
 Do not use any battery other than genuine Canon Battery Pack
LP-E6N/LP-E6.
 Remove and install the battery again (p.44).
 If the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
 Use a fully-charged battery (p.42).
 The battery performance may have degraded. See [53: Battery
info.] to check the battery’s recharge performance level (p.526). If
the battery performance is poor, replace the battery with a new
one.
 The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the
following operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
• Using GPS.
• Using the LCD monitor frequently.
• Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged
period.
• Using the Wi-Fi/NFC (wireless communication) function
frequently.
• The Eye-Fi card’s transmission is enabled.
555
Troubleshooting Guide
The camera turns off by itself.
 Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to
take effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.76).
 Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor
will still turn off after the camera is left idle for approx. 30 min. (The
camera’s power does not turn off.)
Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
 The camera cannot be used with EF-S or EF-M lenses (p.55).
The viewfinder is dark.
 Install a recharged battery in the camera (p.42).
No images can be shot or recorded.
 Make sure the card is properly inserted (p.45).
 If you are using an SD card, slide the card’s write-protect switch to
the Write/Erase setting (p.45).
 If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images
to make space (p.45, 439).
 If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode and the focus
indicator <o> in the viewfinder blinks, or when the AF point is
orange during Live View/movie shooting, a picture cannot be
taken. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus
automatically, or focus manually (p.58, 159).
556
Troubleshooting Guide
The card cannot be used.
 If a card error message is displayed, see page 48 or 573.
An error message is displayed when
the card is inserted in another camera.
 CF cards with a capacity greater than 128 GB and SDXC cards
are formatted in exFAT. This means that if you format a card with
this camera and then insert it into another camera, an error may
be displayed and it may not be possible to use the card.
I have to press the shutter button twice
completely to take a picture.
 Set [z4: Mirror lockup] to [Disable].
The image is out of focus or blurred.
 Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF> (p.55).
 Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (p.57,
58).
 If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.
 In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster
shutter speed (p.246), set a higher ISO speed (p.177), use flash
(p.286), or use a tripod.
 See “Minimizing Blurred Photos” on page 96.
557
Troubleshooting Guide
There are fewer AF points or the Area AF frame shape is different.
 Depending on the attached lens, the number of usable AF points
and patterns and Area AF frame’s shape vary. The lenses are
categorized into 11 groups from A to K (p.115). Check which
group your lens belongs to. Using a lens in groups G to K will have
fewer usable AF points (p.118-121).
The AF point is blinking or two AF points are displayed.
 Regarding the AF points lighting up or blinking when you press
the <S> button, see page 108.
 The registered AF point at that position is blinking (p.108, 500).
 The manually-selected AF point (or zone) and the registered AF
point are displayed (p.107, 500).
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
 Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF (p.100, 101, 314). Focus
lock (p.97, 101) is not possible with AI Servo AF/Servo AF (p.102,
315) and when servo AF is used with AI Focus AF (p.102).
The AF points do not light up in red.
 The AF points light up in red only when focus is achieved in low
light or with a dark subject.
 In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F> mode, you can set
whether to have the AF points light in red for when focus is
achieved (p.150).
558
Troubleshooting Guide
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
 The continuous shooting speed for high-speed continuous
shooting may decrease depending on the power source type,
battery level, temperature, flicker reduction, Dual Pixel RAW
shooting, Digital Lens Optimizer, shutter speed, aperture, subject
conditions, brightness, AF operation, lens, flash use, shooting
function settings, etc. For details, see pages 160-162.
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
 If you shoot something that has fine detail such as a field of grass,
the file size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be
lower than the number listed on page 171.
 If [Rec. separately] is set and different image-recording quality are
set for the CF card (Card1) and SD card (Card2), the maximum
burst for continuous shooting will decrease.
 Under [z1: Lens aberration correction], if [Digital Lens
Optimizer] is set to [Enable], the maximum burst for continuous
shooting will greatly decrease.
 If [z1: Dual Pixel RAW] is set to [Enable] and the imagerecording quality is 1, the maximum burst for continuous
shooting will decrease.
Even after I change the card, the maximum burst
displayed for continuous shooting does not change.
 The maximum burst displayed in the viewfinder does not change
when you change the card, even if it is a high-speed card. The
maximum burst shown in the table on page 171 is based on
Canon’s testing card. (The faster the card’s writing speed, the
higher the actual maximum burst will be.) Therefore, the
maximum burst displayed in the viewfinder may differ from the
actual maximum burst.
559
Troubleshooting Guide
Dual Pixel RAW shooting is not possible.
 Set [z1: Dual Pixel RAW] to [Enable], and set [z1: Image
quality] to 1 or 1+JPEG.
ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected.
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the settable
ISO speed range will be ISO 200 - ISO 32000. Even if you set
[Range for stills] to expand the setting range, you cannot select
L (equivalent to ISO 50), H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), or H2
(equivalent to ISO 102400). When [z3: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [Disable] (p.206), you can set ISO 100/125/160, L, or H1/
H2.
Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation,
the image comes out bright.
 Set [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable] (p.201). When
[Low], [Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased
exposure compensation or flash exposure compensation, the
image may come out bright.
I cannot set the exposure compensation when
both manual exposure and ISO Auto are set.
 See page 252 to set the exposure compensation.
 For flash shooting, exposure compensation will not take effect.
Not all the lens aberration correction options are displayed.
 If [Digital Lens Optimizer] under [z1: Lens aberration
correction] is set to [Enable], [Chromatic aberr corr] and
[Diffraction correction] will not be displayed. However, the
[Enable] setting for both [Chromatic aberr corr] and [Diffraction
correction] will take effect for shooting.
 During movie shooting, [Distortion correction], [Digital Lens
Optimizer] or [Diffraction correction] will not be displayed.
560
Troubleshooting Guide
The shot image is not displayed during
multiple-exposure shooting.
 If [On:ContShtng] is set, image review immediately after image
capture or image playback is not possible during shooting (p.268).
The multiple-exposure image is shot in 1 quality.
 When the image-recording quality is set to 41 or 61, the
multiple-exposure image will be recorded in 1 quality (p.275).
When I use the <f> mode with flash,
the shutter speed becomes slow.
 If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter
speed automatically becomes slow (slow-sync shooting) so that
both the subject and background are properly exposed. To
prevent a slow shutter speed, under [z1: External Speedlite
control], set [Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/200-1/60sec.
auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] (p.290).
The flash does not fire.
 Make sure the flash (or PC sync cord) is securely attached to the
camera.
 If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set
[z6: Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.312).
The flash always fires at full output.
 If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash
will always be fired at full output (p.287).
 When the flash Custom Function setting for [Flash metering
mode] is set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the flash will
always be fired at full output (p.294).
561
Troubleshooting Guide
Flash exposure compensation cannot be set.
 If flash exposure compensation is already set with the Speedlite,
flash exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera.
When the external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is
canceled (set to 0), flash exposure compensation can be set with
the camera.
High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.
 Under [z1: External Speedlite control], set [Flash sync.
speed in Av mode] to [Auto] (p.290).
The shutter makes two release sounds during Live View shooting.
 If you use flash, the shutter will make two release sounds each
time you shoot (p.300).
During Live View shooting, a white <s> or
red <E> icon is displayed.
 It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the
white <s> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may
deteriorate. If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the
Live View shooting will soon stop automatically (p.331).
Shot images are not displayed when continuous shooting
is performed during Live View shooting.
 If the image-recording quality is set to 41 or 61, the shot
images are not displayed during continuous shooting (p.299).
562
Troubleshooting Guide
During movie shooting, the red E icon is displayed.
 It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the
red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the movie shooting will
soon stop automatically (p.391).
Movie shooting stops by itself.
 If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop
automatically. For cards that can record movies, see page 356. To
find out the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s
website.
 If you shoot a movie for 29 min. 59 sec. or shoot a High Frame
Rate movie for 7 min. 29 sec., the movie shooting will stop
automatically.
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.
 If the shooting mode is <A>, <d>, <s>, <f>, or <F>, the
ISO speed will be set automatically. In the <a> mode, you can
freely set the ISO speed (p.341).
ISO 100 cannot be set or ISO speed expansion cannot
be selected during movie shooting.
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the settable
ISO speed range will start from ISO 200. Even if you set [Range
for movies] or [Range for H] for ISO speed expansion, you
cannot select H, H1, or H2. When [z3: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [Disable] (p.206), you can set ISO 100/125/160, or an
expanded ISO speed.
 During HDR movie shooting, expanded ISO speeds cannot be
selected.
563
Troubleshooting Guide
The manually set ISO speed changes when
switching to movie shooting.
 For viewfinder shooting and Live View shooting, the ISO speed
will be set according to the setting of [Range for stills] under
[z2: ISO speed settings] (p.180). For movie shooting, the ISO
speed will be set according to the setting of [Range for movies]
or [Range for H] under [z2: ISO speed settings] (p.379).
The exposure changes during movie shooting.
 If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie
shooting, the changes in the exposure may be recorded.
 Shooting a few test movies is recommended if you intend to
perform zooming during movie shooting. Zooming during movie
shooting may result in recording of changes in exposure or
mechanical sound of the lens, or images may be out of focus.
The image flickers or horizontal
stripes appear during movie shooting.
 Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources
during movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness)
or color tone may be recorded. In the <s> or <a> mode, a
slow shutter speed may reduce the problem. The problem may be
more noticeable in time-lapse movie shooting.
564
Troubleshooting Guide
The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.
 If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a
moving subject, the image may look distorted. The problem may
be more noticeable in time-lapse movie shooting.
The movie does not record the sound.
 High Frame Rate movies do not record sound.
The time code is not appended.
 For High Frame Rate movie shooting, if [Free run] is set for
[Count up] under [z5: Time code] (p.365), the time code will not
be appended. Also, if there is HDMI output, the time code will not
be appended to the HDMI video output (p.367).
The time code’s count is faster.
 For High Frame Rate movie shooting, it will count up by 4 sec. for
every sec. in real time (p.358).
I cannot take still photos during movie shooting.
 Still photos cannot be taken during movie shooting. To take still
photos, stop the movie shooting and take still photos using
viewfinder shooting or Live View shooting.
565
Troubleshooting Guide
Operation Problems
I cannot change the setting with the <6> dial,
<5> dial, <9>, <p>, or <d>.
 Set the <R> switch to the left (lock release, p.62).
 Check the [55: Multi function lock] setting (p.90).
Touch operation is not possible.
 Check if [52: Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive]
(p.72).
A camera button or dial does not work as expected.
 Check the [83: Custom Controls] setting (p.495).
Display Problems
The menu screen shows fewer tabs and options.
 In the <A> mode, some menu tabs and options are not
displayed. Set the shooting mode to <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>
or <F> (p.67).
The display starts with [9] My Menu or the [9] tab
alone is displayed.
 Under the [9] tab, [Menu display] is set to [Display from My
Menu tab] or [Display only My Menu tab]. Set [Normal display]
(p.519).
566
Troubleshooting Guide
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).
 Set [z2: Color space] to [sRGB]. If [Adobe RGB] is set, the first
character will be an underscore (p.217).
The fourth character in the file name changes.
 [51: File name] is set to [*** + image size]. Select the camera’s
unique file name (preset code) or the file name registered under
User setting 1 (p.220).
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
 If the card already contains recorded images, the image file
number may not start from 0001 (p.223).
The shooting date and time displayed are incorrect.
 Make sure the correct date and time are set (p.51).
 Check the time zone and daylight saving time (p.52, 53).
The date and time are not in the image.
 The shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date
and time are recorded in the image data as shooting information.
When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture,
using the date and time recorded in the shooting information
(p.471).
567
Troubleshooting Guide
[###] is displayed.
 If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number
the camera can display, [###] will be displayed.
In the viewfinder, the AF point display speed is slow.
 In low temperatures, the display speed of the AF points may
become slower due to the AF point display device’s (liquid crystal)
characteristics. The display speed will return to normal at room
temperature.
The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.
 If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
 The LCD monitor display may seem slightly slow in low
temperatures or look black in high temperatures. It will return to
normal at room temperature.
[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.
 [51: Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is
inserted in the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect
switch set to the LOCK position, you will not be able to check the
card’s connection status or disable Eye-Fi transmission (p.532).
568
Troubleshooting Guide
Playback Problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
 [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (p.401).
A red box is displayed on the image.
 [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.402).
During image playback, the AF points are not displayed.
 When you play back an image applied with distortion correction
(p.209), the AF points are not displayed.
The image cannot be erased.
 If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.412).
The movie cannot be copied.
 Copying movie files exceeding 4 GB may not work. For details,
see page 435.
Still photos and movies cannot be played back.
 The camera may not be able to play back images taken with
another camera.
 Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the
camera.
Operation sound and mechanical sound
can be heard during movie playback.
 If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting,
the operation sound will also be recorded. Using the Directional
Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended
(p.363).
569
Troubleshooting Guide
The movie appears to freeze momentarily.
 If there is a drastic change in the exposure level during
autoexposure movie shooting, the recording will stop momentarily
until the brightness stabilizes. In such a case, shoot in the <a>
mode (p.340).
The movie plays in slow motion.
 Since the High Frame Rate movie will be recorded as a 29.97 fps/
25.00 fps movie file, it will play back in slow motion at 1/4 speed.
No picture on the TV set.
 Make sure the [53: Video system] is correctly set to [For NTSC]
or [For PAL] (depending on the video system of your TV set).
 Make sure the HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (p.432).
There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.
 If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be
created automatically (p.360). However, if you use a CF card
exceeding 128 GB or an SDXC card formatted with the camera,
you can record a movie to a single file even exceeding 4 GB.
I cannot grab frames from a movie.
 You can grab frames only from 4K movies. Frame grabbing is not
possible with Full HD movies, High Frame Rate (HD) movies, and
4K movies shot with a different camera.
570
Troubleshooting Guide
My card reader does not recognize the card.
 Depending on your card reader and computer OS, large-capacity
CF cards or SDXC cards may not be properly recognized. In such
a case, connect your camera to the computer with the interface
cable, then transfer the images to the computer using EOS Utility
(EOS software, p.596).
I cannot process the RAW image.
 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the camera.
Use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.596) to process
those images.
I cannot resize or crop the image.
 With this camera, you cannot resize or crop JPEG c images,
1/41/61 images, or frame-grab images from 4K movies
saved as still photos (p.452, 454).
Dots of light appear on the image.
 White, red, blue, or other colored dots of light may appear on
images if the sensor is affected by cosmic rays, etc. Their
appearance may be suppressed if you perform [Clean nowf]
under [53: Sensor cleaning] (p.458).
The Dual Pixel information cannot be used for processing
the RAW images.
 Although Dual Pixel RAW images can be processed with [x1:
RAW image processing], this camera cannot process the image
using Dual Pixel data. For using Dual Pixel data, process the
images with the Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.596).
571
Troubleshooting Guide
Sensor Cleaning Problems
The shutter makes a sound during sensor cleaning.
 When you select [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a
mechanical sound during the cleaning, but the picture will not be
recorded to the card (p.458).
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
 If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> and <2> within
a short time period, the <f> icon may not be displayed (p.49).
Computer Connection Problems
I cannot transfer images to a computer.
 From the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM, p.4), install EOS Utility
(EOS software, p.596) to your computer (p.597).
 An interface cable cannot be used to connect the camera to a
computer when a Wi-Fi connection is already established.
 When using [32: Image transfer] to transfer images to a
computer, make sure EOS Utility’s main screen is displayed.
572
Error Codes
Error number
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Cause and countermeasures
Number
01
02
Error Message and Solution
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the
lens contacts.
 Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens, use a Canon
lens, or remove and install the battery again (p.27, 28, 44).
Card* cannot be accessed. Reinsert or replace card * or format
card * with the camera.
 Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the
card (p.45, 73).
Cannot save images because card* is full. Replace card*.
04
06
 Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card
(p.45, 439, 73).
Sensor cleaning could not be performed. Turn the camera off and
on again.
 Operate the power switch (p.49).
10, 20
30, 40
50, 60
70, 80
99
An error prevented shooting. Turn the camera off and on again or
re-install the battery.
 Operate the power switch, remove and install the battery again, or
use a Canon lens (p.49, 44).
* If the error still persists, write down the error code number and contact
your nearest Canon Service Center.
573
Specifications
• Type
Type:
Recording media:
Image sensor size:
Compatible lenses:
Lens mount:
Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera
CF cards (Type I, UDMA Mode 7 supported)
SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards
* UHS-I cards compatible.
Approx. 36.0 x 24.0 mm
Canon EF lenses
* Excluding EF-S and EF-M lenses
(The effective angle of view of a lens is approximately
equivalent to that of the focal length indicated.)
Canon EF mount
• Image Sensor
Type:
Effective pixels:
Aspect ratio:
Dust delete feature:
CMOS sensor
Approx. 30.4 megapixels
* Rounded off to the nearest 10,000 pixels.
3:2
Auto/Manual, Appending Dust Delete Data
• Recording System
Recording format:
Image type:
Pixels recorded:
Dual Pixel RAW:
Recording function:
Create/select a folder:
File name:
File numbering:
574
Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0
JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original),
RAW+JPEG simultaneous recording possible
L (Large)
: Approx. 30.1 megapixels (6720 x 4480)
M (Medium) : Approx. 13.3 megapixels (4464 x 2976)
S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 7.5 megapixels (3360 x 2240)
S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.5 megapixels (1920 x 1280)
S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 0.35 megapixels (720 x 480)
RAW
: Approx. 30.1 megapixels (6720 x 4480)
M-RAW
: Approx. 16.9 megapixels (5040 x 3360)
S-RAW
: Approx. 7.5 megapixels (3360 x 2240)
Possible
Standard, Auto switch card, Record separately, Record
to multiple
Possible
Preset code / User setting 1 / User setting 2
Continuous, Auto reset, Manual reset
Specifications
• Image Processing During Shooting
Picture Style:
White balance:
Automatic image
brightness correction:
Noise reduction:
Highlight tone priority:
Lens aberration
correction:
Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral,
Faithful, Monochrome, User Defined 1 - 3
Auto (Ambience priority), Auto (White priority), Preset
(Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light, White
fluorescent light, Flash), Custom, Color temperature
setting (approx. 2500-10000 K)
White balance correction and white balance bracketing
features provided
* Flash color temperature information transmission
possible
Auto Lighting Optimizer provided
Applicable to high ISO speed shots and long exposures
Provided
Peripheral illumination correction, Distortion correction,
Digital Lens Optimizer, Chromatic aberration correction,
Diffraction correction
• Viewfinder
Type:
Coverage:
Eye-level pentaprism
Vertical/Horizontal approx. 100% (with eyepoint approx.
21 mm)
Approx. 0.71x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)
Approx. 21 mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1)
Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)
Magnification:
Eyepoint:
Dioptric adjustment
range:
Focusing screen:
Fixed
Grid display:
Provided
Electronic level:
Provided
Function setting display: Battery (remaining capacity), Shooting mode, White
balance, Drive mode, AF operation, Metering mode,
Image type: JPEG/RAW, Digital Lens Optimizer, Dual
Pixel RAW, Flicker detection, Warning indicator, AF
status
Mirror:
Quick-return type
Depth-of-field preview: Provided
575
Specifications
• Autofocus (during viewfinder shooting)
Type:
TTL secondary image-registration, phase-difference
detection with the dedicated AF sensor
AF points:
Max. 61 points (Cross-type AF point: Max. 41 points)
* Number of available AF points, Dual cross-type AF points,
and Cross-type AF points vary depending on the lens used.
* f/2.8-sensitive, Dual cross-type AF at five center
vertical AF points (AF group: With Group A lenses)
Focusing brightness
EV -3 - 18 (Conditions: f/2.8-sensitive center AF point,
range:
One-Shot AF, room temperature, ISO 100)
Focus operation:
One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual focusing (MF)
AF area selection mode: Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), Single-point AF
(manual selection), AF point expansion (manual
selection: above, below, left, and right), AF point
expansion (manual selection: surround), Zone AF
(manual selection of zone), Large zone AF (manual
selection of zone), Automatic selection AF
AF point automatic
Based on EOS iTR AF setting
selection conditions:
(Enables AF incorporating human face/color information)
* iTR: Intelligent Tracking and Recognition
AF Configuration Tool: Case 1 - 6
AI Servo AF
Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking,
characteristics:
AF point auto switching
AF function
17 functions
customization:
AF fine adjustment:
AF Microadjustment (All lenses by the same amount,
Adjust by lens)
AF-assist beam:
Emitted by the EOS-dedicated external Speedlite
• Exposure Control
Metering mode:
Metering brightness
range:
576
Approx. 150,000-pixel RGB+IR metering sensor and
252-zone TTL open-aperture metering
EOS iSA (Intelligent Subject Analysis) system
• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)
• Partial metering (approx. 6.1% of viewfinder at center)
• Spot metering (approx. 1.3% of viewfinder at center)
• Center-weighted average metering
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Specifications
Shooting mode:
ISO speed
(Recommended
exposure index):
ISO speed settings:
Exposure
compensation:
AE lock:
Flicker reduction:
Interval timer:
Bulb timer:
Scene Intelligent Auto, Program AE, Shutter-priority AE,
Aperture-priority AE, Manual exposure, Bulb exposure,
Custom shooting modes (C1/C2/C3)
Scene Intelligent Auto: ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set automatically
P, Tv, Av, M, B: ISO Auto, ISO 100 - ISO 32000 manual
setting (in 1/3- or whole-stop increments), and expansion
to L (equivalent to ISO 50), H1 (equivalent to ISO
51200), H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) provided.
* If highlight tone priority is set, the settable ISO speed
range will be ISO 200 - ISO 32000.
Still photo shooting range, Auto range, Auto minimum
speed settable
Manual:±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
AEB: ±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (can be
combined with manual exposure compensation)
Auto: Applied in One-Shot AF mode with evaluative
metering when focus is achieved
Manual:With AE lock button
Possible
Shooting interval and shot count settable
Bulb exposure time settable
• HDR Shooting
Dynamic range
adjustment:
Effects:
Auto image align:
Auto, ±1, ±2, ±3
Natural, Art standard, Art vivid, Art bold, Art embossed
Provided
• Multiple Exposures
Shooting method:
Number of multiple
exposures:
Multiple-exposure
control:
Function/control priority, Continuous shooting priority
2 to 9 exposures
Additive, Average, Bright, Dark
• Shutter
Type:
Shutter speed:
Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter
1/8000 sec. to 30 sec. (total shutter speed range; available
range varies by shooting mode), Bulb, X-sync at 1/200 sec.
577
Specifications
• Drive System
Drive mode:
Continuous shooting
speed:
Max. burst:
578
Single shooting, High-speed continuous shooting, Lowspeed continuous shooting, Silent single shooting, Silent
continuous shooting, 10-sec. self-timer/remote control, 2sec. self-timer/remote control
High-speed continuous shooting: Max. approx. 7.0 shots/
sec.
* Continuous shooting speed decreases during Antiflicker shooting, during Dual Pixel RAW shooting,
during Live View shooting with Servo AF, or with Digital
Lens Optimizer set.
* The maximum continuous shooting speed during highspeed continuous shooting may decrease depending
on the power source type, battery level, temperature,
flicker reduction, Dual Pixel RAW shooting, Digital Lens
Optimizer, shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions,
brightness, AF operation, lens, flash use, shooting
function settings, etc.
Low-speed continuous shooting: Max. approx. 3.0 shots/
sec.
Silent continuous shooting: Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 110 shots (Card Full)
RAW: Approx. 17 shots (Approx. 21 shots)
RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 13 shots (Approx. 16
shots)
* Based on Canon’s standard testing CF card (Standard:
8 GB / High speed: UDMA Mode 7, 64 GB) and
Canon’s testing standards (high-speed continuous
shooting, ISO 100, Standard Picture Style, no IPTC
information appended).
* Figures in parentheses apply to an UDMA Mode 7, with
a CF card based on Canon’s testing standards.
* “Card Full” indicates that shooting is possible until the
card becomes full.
Specifications
• External Speedlite
Compatible Speedlites:
Flash metering:
Flash exposure
compensation:
FE lock:
PC terminal:
Flash control:
EX-series Speedlites
E-TTL II autoflash
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
Provided
Provided
Flash function settings, Flash C.Fn settings
• Live View Shooting
Focus method:
AF method:
Dual pixel CMOS AF
Face+Tracking, FlexiZone - Multi, FlexiZone - Single
Manual focusing (approx. 5x and 10x magnification
available for focus check)
Focusing brightness range:EV -4 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100, One-Shot AF)
Metering mode:
Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering (approx.
6.3% of Live View screen), Spot metering (approx. 2.7% of
Live View screen), Center-weighted average metering
Metering brightness
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
range:
Exposure compensation:±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
Silent Live View shooting:Provided (Mode 1 and 2)
Touch shutter:
Provided
Grid display:
3 types
• Movie Shooting
Recording format:
Movie:
Audio:
Movie recording size:
Frame rate:
Movie recording
method/Compression
rate:
MOV, MP4
4K: Motion JPEG
Full HD/HD: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 variable (average) bit rate
MOV: Linear PCM, MP4: AAC
4K (4096x2160), Full HD (1920x1080), HD (1280x720:
High Frame Rate movie)
119.9p/59.94p/29.97p/24.00p/23.98p (with NTSC)
100.0p/50.00p/25.00p/24.00p (with PAL)
* 119.9p/100.0p: High Frame Rate movie
Motion JPEG
ALL-I (For editing/I-only), IPB (Standard), IPB (Light)
* Motion JPEG and ALL-I available only when MOV is set.
* IPB (Light) available only when MP4 is set.
579
Specifications
Bit rate:
[MOV]
4K (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p) : Approx. 500 Mbps
Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/ALL-I
: Approx. 180 Mbps
Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB
: Approx. 60 Mbps
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/ALL-I
: Approx. 90 Mbps
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 30 Mbps
HD (119.9p/100.0p)/ALL-I
: Approx. 160 Mbps
[MP4]
Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard) : Approx. 60 Mbps
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 30 Mbps
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light) : Approx. 12 Mbps
Card performance
4K (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)
requirements
: CF UDMA 7: 100 MB/sec. or faster
: SD UHS-I 90 MB/sec. or faster
(Writing/reading speed):
Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/ALL-I
: CF UDMA 7: 60 MB/sec. or faster
: SD UHS-I Speed Class 3 or faster
Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB : CF 30 MB/sec. or faster
: SD Speed Class 10 or faster
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/ALL-I
: CF 30 MB/sec. or faster
: SD UHS-I Speed Class 3 or faster
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/IPB (Standard)
: CF 10 MB/sec. or faster
: SD Speed Class 6 or faster
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light)
: CF 10 MB/sec. or faster
: SD Speed Class 4 or faster
HD (119.9p/100.0p) : CF UDMA 7: 60 MB/sec. or faster
: SD UHS-I Speed Class 3 or faster
Focus method:
Dual pixel CMOS AF
AF method:
Face+Tracking, FlexiZone - Multi, FlexiZone - Single
Manual focusing (approx. 5x and 10x magnification
available for focus check)
Movie servo AF:
Possible
* Movie Servo AF customizable
580
Specifications
Focusing brightness range:EV -4 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100, One-Shot AF)
Metering mode:
Center-weighted average and Evaluative metering with
the image sensor
* Automatically set by the focus method
Metering brightness
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100, with centerrange:
weighted average metering)
Exposure control:
Autoexposure shooting (Program AE for movie shooting),
Shutter-priority AE, Aperture-priority AE, Manual exposure
Exposure compensation: ±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
ISO speed
[Full HD]
(Recommended
Scene Intelligent Auto: Automatically set within ISO 100 exposure index):
ISO 25600
P/Tv/Av/B: Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 25600,
expandable to H (equivalent to ISO 32000), H1
(equivalent to ISO 51200), H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400)
M: ISO Auto (automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 25600),
ISO 100 - ISO 25600 manual setting (in 1/3- or whole-stop
increments), expandable to H (equivalent to ISO 32000), H1
(equivalent to ISO 51200), H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400)
* The settable range is different for HDR movie shooting
and time-lapse movie shooting.
[4K]
Scene Intelligent Auto: Automatically set within ISO 100 ISO 12800
P/Tv/Av/B: Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 12800,
expandable to H (equivalent to ISO 16000/20000/25600/
32000), H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), H2 (equivalent to
ISO 102400)
M: ISO Auto (automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO
12800), ISO 100 - ISO 12800 manual setting (in 1/3- or
whole-stop increments), expandable to H (equivalent to
ISO 16000/20000/25600/32000), H1 (equivalent to ISO
51200), H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400)
ISO speed settings:
Range for movie shooting and 4K settable
Time code:
Appendable
Drop frames:
Compatible with 119.9p/59.94p/29.97p
Sound recording:
Built-in monaural microphone, external stereo
microphone terminal provided
Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,
attenuator provided
581
Specifications
Headphones:
Grid display:
HDR movie shooting:
Time-lapse movie:
2-screen display:
HDMI output:
Remote control
shooting:
Accessory mount:
Still photo shooting:
Headphone terminal provided, sound volume adjustable
3 types
Provided
Shooting interval and shot count settable
Required shooting time period, playback length, and
remaining card capacity can be checked
LCD monitor and HDMI output movie displayable
simultaneously
Image without information can be output.
* Auto / 59.94i/50.00i / 59.94p/50.00p / 23.98p
selectable.
* When [24.00p: Enable] is set, the movie image is
output at 24.00p via HDMI.
* Time code appendable
Provided
Bottom equipped with positioning hole to prevent
rotation.
Not possible during movie shooting.
• LCD Monitor
Type:
Monitor size and dots:
Brightness adjustment:
Color tone adjustment:
Electronic level:
Interface languages:
Touch screen:
Help display:
TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor
Wide 8.1 cm (3.2-in) (3:2) with approx. 1.62 million dots
Auto (Dark, Standard, Bright), Manual (7 levels)
Warm tone / Standard / Cool tone 1 / Cool tone 2
Provided
25
Capacitive sensing
Possible
• Playback
Image display format:
582
Single-image display (without shooting information),
Single-image display (with basic information), Singleimage display (Shooting information displayed: Detailed
information, Lens/histogram, White balance, Picture
Style 1, Picture Style 2, Color space/noise reduction,
Lens aberration correction 1, Lens aberration correction
2, GPS information, IPTC information), Index display (4/
9/36/100 images), Two-image display
Specifications
Highlight alert:
AF point display:
Overexposed highlights blink
Provided (may not be displayed depending on shooting
conditions)
Grid display:
3 types
Magnified view:
Approx. 1.5x-10x, initial magnification and position
settable
Image browsing method:Single image, Jump by 10 or 100 images, By shooting
date, By folder, By movies, By stills, By protected
images, By rating
Image rotation:
Provided
Image protection:
Provided
Rating:
Provided
Movie playback:
Enabled (LCD monitor, HDMI)
Start/end movie scene Possible
editing:
4K Frame Grab:
Frame Grab can be saved as JPEG image.
Slide show:
All images, By date, By folder, By movies, By stills, By
protected images, By rating
Copying images:
Possible
• Post-Processing of Images
In-camera RAW image Brightness adjustment, White balance, Picture Style,
processing:
Auto Lighting Optimizer, High ISO speed noise reduction,
JPEG image-recording quality, Color space, Lens
aberration correction (Peripheral illumination correction,
Distortion correction, Digital lens optimizer, Chromatic
aberration correction, Diffraction correction)
Resize:
Provided
Cropping:
Provided
• Image Transfer
Transferrable files:
Still photos (JPEG, RAW, RAW+JPEG images), Movies
• Print Ordering
DPOF:
Version 1.1 compliant
583
Specifications
• GPS Functions
Compatible satellites:
GPS satellites (USA), GLONASS satellites (Russia),
Quasi-Zenith Satellite System (QZSS) MICHIBIKI
(Japan)
Mode 1, Mode 2
GPS signal reception
modes:
Geotag information
Latitude, Longitude, Elevation, Coordinated Universal
appended to image:
Time (UTC), Satellite signal acquisition status
Position update interval: 1 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec., 15 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 2 min., 5
min.
Time setting:
GPS time data set to camera
Log data:
One file per day, NMEA format
* Change in time zone creates another file.
* The log data saved in internal memory can be
transferred to a card or downloaded to a computer as a
log file.
Log data deletion:
Possible
• Customization Features
Custom Functions:
Custom Quick Control:
Custom shooting
modes:
My Menu:
Copyright information:
IPTC information:
17 functions
Provided
Register under C1, C2, or C3 mode
Up to 5 screens can be registered
Text entry and appending possible
Appendable
• Interface
DIGITAL terminal:
SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.0)
Computer communication, Wireless File Transmitter
WFT-E7 (Ver. 2), Connect Station CS100 connection
Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible
HDMI mini OUT
terminal:
External microphone IN 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack
terminal:
Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 connection
Headphone terminal:
3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack
Remote control terminal:For N3-type remote control units
Wireless remote control: Compatible with Remote Controller RC-6
Eye-Fi card:
Supported
584
Specifications
• Power
Battery:
Battery information:
Number of possible
shots:
Movie shooting time:
Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6, quantity 1
* AC power usable with household power outlet
accessories.
Power source, Battery level, Shutter count, Recharge
performance, Battery registration indicated
With viewfinder shooting:
Approx. 900 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
approx. 850 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
With Live View shooting:
Approx. 300 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
approx. 280 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N.
Total approx. 1 hr. 30 min. at room temperature (23°C/
73°F)
Total approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at low temperatures (0°C/
32°F)
* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, Movie
Servo AF disabled, and Full HD 29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/
23.98p IPB (Standard).
• Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D):Approx. 150.7 x 116.4 x 75.9 mm / 5.93 x 4.58 x 2.99 in.
Weight:
Approx. 890 g / 31.39 oz. (Including battery, CF card, SD
memory card), Approx. 800 g / 28.22 oz. (Body only)
• Operation Environment
Working temperature
range:
Working humidity:
0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
85% or less
585
Specifications
 All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.
 Dimensions and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines (except weight
for camera body only).
 Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.
 If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the
respective lens manufacturer.
586
Trademarks
 Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
 Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
 Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
 CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.
 SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
 HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
 Google, Google Maps, and Google Earth are trademarks of Google Inc.
 Map Utility uses Google Maps to display images and routes traveled on a
map.
 All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may
be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4
compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial
purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide
MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for
MPEG-4 standard.”
* Notice displayed in English as required.
587
Third party software
This product includes third party software.
 expat.h
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
588
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended
This product is designed to achieve optimum performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine
accessories is highly recommended.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such
as malfunction, fire, etc., caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note
that repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine accessories will not
be covered by the warranty for repairs, although you may request such repairs
on a chargeable basis.
Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it
with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or
accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.
589
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland
and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be
disposed of with your household waste, according to
the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive
(2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing
those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above,
in accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal
(Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or
accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified
in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point,
e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product
or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this
type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human
health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will
contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact
your local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household
waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee,
or www.canon-europe.com/battery.
590
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.
591
592
16
Downloading Images to
a Computer / Software
This chapter explains how to transfer images from the
camera to a computer, gives an overview of the
software on the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM), and
explains how to install the software on a computer.
EOS Solution Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
EOS Solution Disk
(Software)
593
Downloading Images to a Computer
You can use EOS software to download the images in the camera to a
computer. There are two ways to do this.
Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer
1
Install the software (p.597).
the provided interface cable
2 Use
to connect the camera to the
computer.
 Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
 When connecting the cable to the
camera, use the cable protector
(p.38). Connect the cable to the
digital terminal with the plug’s
<
> icon facing the back of
the camera.
 Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal.
EOS Utility to transfer the
3 Use
images.
 For details, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual.
Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (p.525). When
connecting the interface cable, use the provided cable protector (p.38).
594
Downloading Images to a Computer
Downloading Images with a Card Reader
You can use a card reader to download images to a computer.
1
Install the software (p.597).
the card into the card
2 Insert
reader.
Digital Photo Professional to
3 Use
download the images.
 For details, refer to the Digital Photo
Professional Instruction Manual.
When downloading images from the camera to a computer with a card
reader without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to the
computer.
595
Software Overview
EOS Solution Disk
EOS Solution Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
Various software for EOS cameras is contained on the
EOS Solution Disk.
(Software Instruction Manuals are not contained on the
EOS Solution Disk.)
EOS Utility
With the camera connected to a computer, EOS Utility enables you to
transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the computer.
You can also use this software to set various camera settings and shoot
remotely from the computer connected to the camera.
Digital Photo Professional
This software is recommended for users who shoot RAW images. You
can view, edit, and print RAW and JPEG images.
* Certain functions differ between the version to be installed on a 64-bit computer
and that to be installed on a 32-bit computer.
Picture Style Editor
You can edit Picture Styles, and create and save original Picture Style
files. This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in
image processing.
596
Installing the Software
 Downloading from the Canon website
You can download the following software and Software Instruction
Manuals from the Canon website.
www.canon-europe.com/5dmarkiv-downloads
Map Utility
Shooting locations can be displayed on a map on a computer screen
by using the geotag location information recorded. Note that Internet
connection is required to use Map Utility.
EOS MOVIE Utility
This software enables you to play back the movies you shot,
consecutively play back movie files that were split up, and merge the
split movie files and save it as a single file. You can also grab movie
frames and save them as still photos.
Installing the Software
 Do not connect the camera to a computer before you install the
software. The software will not be installed correctly.
 If there is a previous version of the software already installed on the
computer, follow the procedure below to install the latest version.
(The previous version will be overwritten.)
1
Insert the EOS Solution Disk into the computer.
 For Macintosh, double-click to open the CD-ROM icon displayed
on the desktop, then double-click on [setup].
2 Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen
instructions to install.
3 After the software is installed, remove the CD-ROM.
597
598
Index
Numerics
10- or 2-sec. self-timer ..................163
w 1280x720 (movie) ..................352
L 1920x1080 (movie)................352
4, 9, 36, or 100 images .................403
H 4096x2160 (movie).................352
4K frame capture ..........................427
A
AF point selection ............ 107, 503
AF sensor................................. 113
Area AF frame.................. 105, 111
Beeper ....................................... 76
Color information...................... 147
Cross-type focusing ................. 113
Difficult subjects for AF .... 158, 324
Direct AF point selection .......... 503
Dual cross-type focusing.......... 113
A (Scene Intelligent Auto) ............94
f/8 AF ............................... 113, 114
AC adapter....................................530
Face information ...................... 147
Acceleration/deceleration
tracking .........................................133
Access lamp..............................47, 48
Accessories.......................................3
Adjust all by same amount (AF)....152
Adobe RGB...................................217
AE lock..........................................259
AEB
(Auto Exposure Bracketing) ...257, 483
AF ...................................................99
AF area selection
mode.........................104, 106, 109
AF-assist beam.........................139
AF Configuration Tool ...............127
AF function customization ........136
AF groups .................................115
AF method ........................316, 382
AF Microadjustment..................152
AF operation .....................100, 314
AF operation indicator ..............103
AF point auto switching ............134
AF point red illumination ...103, 150
AF point registration .................500
Manual focusing (MF) ...... 159, 329
Number of AF points ................ 115
Out of focus.................. 57, 58, 557
Recomposing ............. 97, 101, 259
Spot AF point ..................... 31, 109
AF point expansion
Manual Selection ............. 104, 109
Manual selection,
surrounding points ........... 105, 110
AF-ON (AF start)
button ............................. 58, 496, 498
AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF) ............. 102
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF)........ 97, 102
Acceleration/deceleration
tracking .................................... 133
AF point auto switching............ 134
AF points light up in red ... 103, 150
Initial position ........................... 146
Tracking sensitivity................... 132
ALL-I (For editing/I-only)............... 355
Ambience priority (AWB) .............. 194
Ambient light sensor............... 29, 442
Anti-flicker shooting ...................... 215
599
Index
Aperture-priority AE ..............248, 336
Area AF frame ......................105, 111
Aspect ratio...................................310
buSY (BUSY) ....................... 174, 205
C
Attenuator .....................................363
w (Custom shooting) .................. 520
Auto (D)....................................184
Cable protector............................... 38
Auto Lighting Optimizer ..........93, 201
Camera
Auto playback ...............................429
Camera shake ..................... 57, 96
Auto power off...........................49, 76
Camera vibration blur ........ 96, 276
Auto reset .....................................224
Clearing the camera settings
Auto switch card ...........................167
Auto time setting (GPS) ................237
Autofocus 9 AF
Automatic selection (AF).......105, 111
Av (Aperture-priority AE).......248, 336
B
to default .................................... 77
Holding the camera.................... 57
Settings display.......................... 87
Cards...................... 5, 27, 45, 73, 356
Card reminder............................ 46
Card requirements ................... 356
Formatting.................................. 73
B/W .......................................185, 189
Low-level formatting................... 74
Basic information display ..............397
Troubleshooting ................... 48, 74
Battery 9 Power
Write-protect switch ................... 45
Battery Grip...................................526
Cases (AI Servo AF) .................... 127
Beep (Beeper) ................................76
Center-weighted average
Bit rate ..........................................580
metering ....................................... 254
Black-and-white images........185, 189
CF card 9 Cards
Bracketing
Charger .................................... 36, 42
AEB (Auto exposure
Chromatic aberration correction... 211
bracketing)........................257, 483
Cleaning (image sensor) .............. 457
FEB
Clearing the camera settings
(Flash exposure bracketing).....293
to default ........................................ 77
WB-BKT (White balance
AI Servo AF characteristics ..... 135
bracketing)........................199, 483
Camera function settings ........... 77
Built-in microphone .......................334
Custom Controls ...................... 495
B (Bulb exposures) ...............260, 334
Custom Functions.................... 481
Bulb exposures
Custom Quick Control.............. 512
Bulb timer .................................261
600
Flash function settings ............. 295
Index
My Menu...................................518
Dioptric adjustment......................... 57
Clipped highlights..........................401
Direct selection (AF point) ............ 503
CLn ...............................................463
Distortion correction ..................... 209
Color space...................................217
Downloading images to
Color temperature .................192, 197
a computer ................................... 594
Color tone .....................................188
DPOF (Digital Print Order
Continuous (file numbering)..........223
Format)......................................... 471
Continuous shooting .....................160
Dragging......................................... 71
Contrast ................................188, 201
Drive mode ................................... 160
Copying images ............................435
Dual cross-type focusing .............. 113
Copyright information....................225
Dual Pixel RAW ............................ 175
Creative photo...............183, 263, 268
Dust Delete Data .......................... 460
Cropping (images) ........................454
Cropping information.....................491
E
Cross-type focusing ......................113
Electronic level ......................... 82, 83
Custom Controls ...........................495
Erasing images............................. 439
Custom Functions .................480, 482
Err (error codes) ........................... 573
Custom Quick Control...................510
Evaluative metering...................... 253
Custom shooting modes ...............520
exFAT ..................................... 74, 360
Custom White Balance .................195
Expanded ISO speed ... 177, 180, 379
D
Exposure compensation............... 255
Exposure compensation in M mode
D+ .................................................206
with ISO Auto ............................... 252
Date/time.........................................51
Exposure level increments ........... 482
Daylight saving time........................53
Exposure level
DC Coupler ...................................530
indicator.................... 32, 34, 301, 344
Default settings tables.....................77
Exposure maintained for new
Depth-of-field preview ...................250
aperture ........................................ 486
Dials
Exposure simulation ..................... 311
Main Dial.....................................59
Quick Control Dial.......................60
External microphone .................... 363
External Speedlite 9 Flash
Diffraction correction .....................212
Eyecup ......................................... 278
Digital Lens Optimizer...........210, 450
Eye-Fi cards ................................. 532
Digital terminal ..........29, 38, 466, 594
Eyepiece cover....................... 37, 278
601
Index
F
Flash mode .................................. 291
Faithful (U) ...............................185
FAT32 .....................................74, 360
FE lock..........................................286
Feature guide..................................91
FEB (Flash Exposure
Bracketing)....................................293
File extension................................222
File name ......................................220
Underscore "_" .................217, 222
File size.........................171, 359, 398
Filter effect (Monochrome)............189
Final image simulation ..........304, 348
Fine (image-recording quality) ......169
Fine Detail (u)..........................184
Fineness (Sharpness)...................188
Firmware.......................................550
First-curtain synchronization.........293
Flash (Speedlite)...........................285
Custom Functions ....................294
External flash units ...................286
FE lock .....................................286
Flash control
(function settings) .....................289
Flash exposure bracketing
(FEB) ........................................293
Flash exposure
compensation ...................286, 293
Flash sync speed .............288, 290
Manual flash .............................291
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain) .......................293
Wireless....................................292
602
Flash sync contacts........................ 28
Flash sync. speed in Av mode ..... 290
Focus indicator....................... 94, 101
Focus lock .............................. 97, 101
Focus mode switch .... 6, 55, 159, 329
Focusing 9 AF
Focusing point
(AF point) ............. 104, 107, 109, 113
Folder creation/selection ...... 218, 219
For editing (ALL-I) ........................ 355
Formatting (card initialization) ........ 73
Frame Grab.................................. 427
Frame rate............................ 352, 390
Free run........................................ 365
Full Auto mode ............................... 94
Full High-Definition (Full HD)
(movie) ................................. 333, 352
Functions available by
shooting mode.............................. 536
G
GPS.............................................. 227
Grid ........................ 81, 309, 382, 396
H
H/H1/H2/H3
(expanded) ................... 177, 180, 379
HD (High Frame Rate movie)....... 358
HDMI .............................. 38, 420, 432
Connection indicator ................ 387
Output .............................. 387, 390
Record command .................... 367
Time code ................................ 367
Index
HDMI CEC ....................................433
Highlight alert ........................... 401
HDR movie....................................369
Histogram................................. 402
HDR shooting................................263
Index display ............................ 403
Headphones..................................363
Jump display
Help.................................................91
(image browsing) ..................... 404
High-Definition ......................352, 358
Magnified view ......................... 406
High Frame Rate...........................358
Manual reset ............................ 224
High ISO speed noise reduction ...202
Manual rotation ........................ 411
Highlight alert ................................401
Playback .................................. 393
Highlight tone priority ....................206
Protecting images .................... 412
High-speed continuous shooting...160
Rating....................................... 415
Histogram......................301, 344, 402
Shooting information ................ 398
Hot shoe..................................28, 286
Size .......................... 171, 352, 398
Household power ..........................530
Slide show................................ 429
Transfer.................................... 466
I
Two-image display ................... 408
ICC profile .....................................217
Viewing on a TV set ......... 420, 432
Icons .................................................8
Index display ................................ 403
Illumination (AF point) ...................150
INFO.
Illumination (LCD panel) .................63
button ....... 63, 86, 301, 305, 344, 394
Image dust prevention ..................457
Initial AF Point .............................. 146
Image review time...........................77
Initial magnification ratio/position ... 407
Image-recording quality ........169, 351
Interval timer................................. 281
Image size ........................169, 352
IPB (Light) .................................... 355
Images
IPB (Standard).............................. 355
AF point display ........................402
IPTC information .......................... 493
Auto playback ...........................429
ISO speed .................... 177, 337, 341
Auto reset .................................224
Automatic setting (ISO Auto) ... 179
Auto rotation .............................444
Automatic setting range ........... 181
Continuous (file numbering) .....223
ISO expansion ......................... 180
Copying ....................................435
Manual setting range ............... 180
Downloading (to computer) ......594
Minimum shutter speed for
Erasing .....................................439
auto .......................................... 182
File numbering..........................223
Range for movies..................... 379
603
Index
Range for H ...........................379
Peripheral illumination
Setting increments....................482
correction ................................. 207
Range for stills..........................180
Light (IPB) .................................... 355
iTR AF...........................................147
Live View Shooting................. 98, 297
AF operation ............................ 314
J
Aspect ratio.............................. 310
JPEG ....................................169, 171
Exposure simulation ................ 311
Jump display.................................404
Face+Tracking ......................... 317
FlexiZone - Multi ...................... 319
L
Landscape (R) .........................184
Language........................................54
Large (image-recording quality)....171
Large Zone AF......................105, 111
LCD monitor....................................27
Brightness ................................442
Color tone setting .....................443
Electronic level .....................82, 86
Image Playback........................393
Menu display ......................67, 540
Quick Control........................64, 88
LCD Panel
Illumination .................................63
Lens ..........................................27, 55
AF group designations .............115
Chromatic aberration
correction..................................211
FlexiZone - Single.................... 321
Grid display.............................. 309
Information display................... 301
Manual focusing (MF) .............. 329
Metering timer.......................... 313
Possible shots.......................... 299
Quick Control ........................... 308
Silent LV shooting .................... 312
LOCK ....................................... 62, 90
LOG.............................................. 238
Logging ........................................ 238
Log Data .................................. 239
Long (bulb) exposures ................. 260
Long exposure noise reduction .... 204
Low-speed continuous shooting... 161
LV 9 Live View Shooting
M
Diffraction correction ................212
M (Manual exposure) ........... 251, 340
Digital Lens Optimizer ......210, 450
Magnified view ............. 325, 329, 406
Distortion correction .................209
Main Dial ........................................ 59
Focus mode
Malfunction................................... 554
switch .....................6, 55, 159, 329
Manual exposure.................. 251, 340
Lock release ...............................56
Manual focusing (MF) .......... 159, 329
Optical aberration correction ....207
604
Manual reset ................................ 224
Index
Manual selection
Compression method............... 355
(AF point) ......................104, 107, 109
Drop frame ............................... 368
Maximum burst .....................171, 174
Editing ...................................... 425
Medium
Editing out first and
(image-recording quality) ..............171
last scenes ............................... 425
Memory cards 9 Cards
Enjoying movies....................... 420
Menu ...............................................67
External microphone ................ 363
Dimmed menu items...................69
File size............................ 359, 360
My Menu...................................515
Frame Grab.............................. 427
Setting procedure .......................68
Frame rate ....................... 352, 390
Settings.....................................540
Free run ................................... 365
3 icon .........................................8
Grid display .............................. 382
Metering mode ..............................253
HDMI output..................... 387, 390
Metering timer .................58, 313, 385
HDR Movie Shooting ............... 369
MF (Manual focusing) ...........159, 329
Headphones............................. 363
M-Fn................62, 106, 144, 497, 499
High Frame Rate...................... 358
Microadjustment............................152
Information display................... 344
Microphone ...........................334, 363
Manual exposure shooting....... 340
Built-in.......................................334
Metering timer .......................... 385
External ....................................363
Mirror lockup .................................276
Mode Dial..................................35, 59
Monochrome (V) ......................185
Motion JPEG (J) ......................355
MOV..............................................351
Movies...........................................333
24.00p.......................................357
AE lock .....................................338
AF method ........................316, 382
AF speed during Movie
Servo AF...................................383
Aperture-priority AE ..................336
Attenuator .................................363
Autoexposure shooting.............334
Microphone ...................... 334, 363
MOV/MP4 ................................ 351
Movie recording method .......... 355
Movie Servo AF tracking
sensitivity ................................. 384
Movie shooting button...... 334, 386
One-Shot AF ............................ 314
Playback .......................... 420, 422
Playback count......................... 366
Quick Control ........................... 350
Rec run .................................... 365
Record command..................... 367
Recording quality (size) ........... 352
Recording time......................... 359
Recording/playback count........ 366
605
Index
Servo AF ..................................380
Shutter speed ...........335, 340, 343
Shutter-priority AE ....................335
Orientation linked AF point ........... 144
P
Sound recording/
P (Program AE).................... 244, 334
Sound-recording level ..............362
PAL............................... 352, 432, 549
Time code.................................365
Partial metering ............................ 253
Time-lapse movie .....................371
PC terminal ............................ 29, 288
Viewing on a TV set .........420, 432
Peripheral illumination correction... 207
Wind filter .................................363
Photobook set-up ......................... 476
MP4 ..............................................351
Picture Style ................. 183, 187, 190
M-RAW
Pixel count............................ 169, 171
(Medium RAW) .....169, 171, 172, 173
Playback....................................... 393
Multi function...62, 106, 144, 497, 499
Portrait (Q)............................... 184
Multi function lock .....................62, 90
Positioning hole.............................. 30
Multi Shot Noise Reduction ..........202
Positioning interval (GPS) ............ 236
Multi-controller ................................61
Possible recording time
Multiple exposure..........................268
(movie) ................................. 347, 359
My Menu .......................................515
Possible shots ................ 50, 171, 299
N
Power ............................................. 49
Auto power off...................... 49, 76
Neutral (S) ...............................184
Battery information................... 526
Noise reduction
Battery level ....................... 50, 526
High ISO speed ........................202
Charging .................................... 42
Long exposures........................204
Household power..................... 530
Nomenclature .................................28
Possible shots............ 50, 171, 299
Non-Canon flash units ..................288
Recharge performance ............ 526
Normal
Pressing completely ....................... 58
(Image-recording quality)..............169
Pressing halfway ............................ 58
NTSC ............................352, 432, 549
Printing
O
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF)...101, 314
One-touch image quality
setting ...................................174, 507
606
Photobook set-up..................... 476
Print order (DPOF)................... 471
Program AE.......................... 244, 334
Program shift ........................... 245
Protecting images ........................ 412
Index
Q
Q(Quick Control) ...64, 308, 350, 418
Quick Control Dial ...........................60
R
Serial number ................. 30, 155, 526
Servo AF
AI Servo AF.............................. 102
Movie Servo AF ....... 380, 383, 384
SERVO (LV) ............................. 315
Rating mark...................................415
Sharpness .................................... 188
RAW..............................169, 171, 173
Shooting information display ........ 398
RAW image processing ................446
Shooting modes ............................. 35
RAW+JPEG ..........................169, 171
Av (Aperture-priority AE)... 248, 336
Rec run .........................................365
B (Bulb) ............................ 260, 334
Recharging......................................42
w (Custom shooting).............. 520
Recording function ........................166
A (Scene Intelligent Auto)....... 94
Recording separately ....................167
M (Manual exposure) ....... 251, 340
Recording to multiple cards ..........167
P (Program AE)................ 244, 334
Reduced display ...........................403
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) .... 246, 335
Release shutter without card ..........46
Shutter button................................. 58
Remote control terminal................279
Shutter synchronization................ 293
Remote switch ..............................279
Shutter-priority AE ................ 246, 335
Resizing ........................................452
Silent shooting
Rotation (image) ...................411, 444
S
Silent continuous shooting ....... 161
Silent LV shooting .................... 312
Silent single shooting ............... 161
Safety precautions ..........................22
Single shooting..................... 160, 161
Safety shift ....................................485
Single-image display .................... 394
Saturation......................................188
Single-point AF............. 104, 109, 321
Scene icons ..........................303, 339
Single-point Spot AF............. 104, 109
Scene Intelligent Auto.....................94
Slide show .................................... 429
M icon..............................................8
Small (image-recording quality).... 171
SD, SDHC, SDXC cards 9 Cards
Sound recording/Sound-recording
Second-curtain synchronization....293
level .............................................. 362
Self-timer.......................................163
Speaker .................................. 29, 422
Sensitivity 9 ISO speed
Specifications ............................... 574
Sensor cleaning ............................457
Spot AF point.......................... 31, 109
Sepia (Monochrome) ....................189
Spot metering ............................... 254
607
Index
S-RAW
UTC (Coordinated Universal
(Small RAW) .........169, 171, 172, 173
Time) ............................................ 228
sRGB ............................................217
Standard (IPB) ..............................355
V
Standard (P).............................184
Vertical image auto rotation.......... 444
Stop down aperture.......................250
Video system................ 351, 432, 549
Strap ...............................................37
Viewfinder
Strength (Sharpness)....................188
Dioptric adjustment .................... 57
System map..................................524
Electronic level........................... 83
Grid ............................................ 81
T
Information display..................... 84
Temperature warning ............331, 391
Viewing on a TV set ............. 420, 432
Threshold (Sharpness) .................188
Volume (movie playback) ............. 423
Time code .....................................365
Time zone .......................................51
Time-lapse movie..........................371
Tone priority ..................................206
W
Warning icon ................................ 489
White balance (WB) ..................... 192
Auto ......................................... 194
Toning effect (Monochrome) .........189
Bracketing................................ 199
Touch beeping ................................76
Color temperature setting ........ 197
Touch operation ......................70, 409
Correction ................................ 198
Touch shutter ................................327
Tracking sensitivity .......................132
Tripod socket ..................................30
Troubleshooting ............................554
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) .........246, 335
Two-image display ........................408
U
Ultra DMA (UDMA) .................46, 171
Underscore "_"......................217, 222
USB (DIGITAL)
terminal .....................29, 38, 466, 594
User Def. (W)............................185
608
Custom .................................... 195
White priority (AWB)..................... 194
Wind filter ..................................... 363
Z
Zone AF ............................... 105, 110
609
CANON INC.
30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
Europe, Africa & Middle East
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
For your local Canon office, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support
The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.
The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of February 2018.
For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,
refer to the Canon website.
CEL-SW7MA212
© CANON INC. 2018
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising